Home

Installing SAP Applications on System i Models: An

Contents

1. Figure 2 10 SAP NetWeaver 04 software components The main constituents of SAP NetWeaver are grouped in the ABAP and Java stacks The additional components shown in Figure 2 10 are optional that is you only have to install them depending on your specific requirements 2 3 2 Basic system variants of the SAP Web Application Server SAP Web AS 6 40 is a main component of SAP NetWeaver It can be installed in different basic system variants Basic system variants The following are the basic SAP variants gt ABAP system This system variant consists of the ABAP installation There is no J2EE Engine gt Java system This system variant consists of the Java installation that is the J2EE Engine and auxiliary services There is no ABAP application server Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 23 24 gt ABAP Java system This system variant consists of the ABAP installation and the installation of the Java Add In You can then operate both the ABAP application server and the J2EE Engine on the SAP system Distribution of SAP system instances Additionally we show you the distribution of SAP system instances within these basic system variants for example fora mySAP ERP solution You can install all mandatory SAP system components on a single host central system or on separate hosts distributed system SAP Web AS ABAP system This variant shown in Figure 2 11 only consists of the ABAP Engine There is
2. Thanks to the following people for their contributions to this project Barbara Roth IBM Germany Thomas Obermeier SAP J rgen Zeh basycs GmbH Germany Erica Wazewski Linda Robinson IBM ITSO A special thank you to the following people for their thorough review and continual support of this ITSO residency people project and Redpaper Christian Bartels Gert Ruland IBM Germany x An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Dorothea Link SAP Germany Volker Gueldenpfennig consolut gmbh Become a published author Join us for a two to six week residency program Help write an IBM Redbook dealing with specific products or solutions while getting hands on experience with leading edge technologies You ll team with IBM technical professionals Business Partners and or customers Your efforts will help increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction As a bonus you ll develop a network of contacts in IBM development labs and increase your productivity and marketability Find out more about the residency program browse the residency index and apply online at ibm com redbooks residencies html Comments welcome Your comments are important to us We want our papers to be as helpful as possible Send us your comments about this Redpaper or other Redbooks in one of the following ways gt Use the online Contact us review redbook form found at ibm com redbooks gt Send your comment
3. Welcome to NetWeaver Installation D CSAP ERP 2004 SR1 D SAP SRM 4 0 SR1 DA SAP NetvVeaver 04 Support Release 1 Figure 3 15 The so called NetWeaver components 2 This opens up several windows to enter parameters for your installation before it starts loading the database For loading the database you can choose to load The ABAP stack The JAVA stack For each stack you can choose between The Unicode version UC The non Unicode version NUC Figure 3 16 on page 53 shows you the paths to these variants especially to the Non Unicode ABAP stack 52 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models i SAPinst SAPINST IBASO3 BASYCS COM Welcome Welcome to NetWeaver Installation T E SAP NetWeaver 04 Support Release 1 2 ABAP System 7 IBM DB UDB for iSeries D Unicode Z E Non Unicode re Database Instance Installation Central Instance Installation Dialog Instance Installation Internet Graphic Server Upgrade Installation ABAP Database Content Export 7 Gl Java Add In for ABAP V IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries db Central System Db Distributed System z A Java System D IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries S E NetWeaver Components Running on Java Y A Adobe re Adobe Document Services Installation V EBW Java Components BW UDI Java Components Installation 7 X Components re Exchange Infrastructure Installation Adapter Engine Installation T A
4. Run RSBTCPRIDEL without parameters Check the TemSe Objects SP12 and then with the menu bar TemSe_Database gt Consistency_Check If everything is not alright delete the corresponding entries Delete all SAP spool entries Call report RSP01041 select older than 0 days Execute the procedure in the background Check if there are still spool entries Transaction SP01 If so then delete them Delete all update records in Transaction SM13 Delete all BatchInput Data and Logs in Transaction SM35 all relevant clients 10 Assign the TARGET SID System to the printers Select transaction SPAD Utilities gt For output devices Assign server see Figure 6 11 on page 229 Note You should lock most of the printers as immediate or redirect the output by changing the printer definition to another physical printer because otherwise test printing can produce paper output on production printers 228 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Utilities M i For output devices Delete all For device types gt Assign server Ini For character sets Export devices Extended admin Full administrati For output management system gt Import devices Display SAPPARAM r Spool lock overview Devices servers j Admin Change Requests Organizer Figure 6 11 Homogeneous system copy adapt the output devices 11 Import the profiles from the IFS into t
5. 154 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models gt You run SAPINST and select SAP CRM 4 0 gt ABAP System Unicode or non Unicode Install a Database Instance to install the database instance gt You run SAPINST and select SAP CRM 4 0 gt ABAP System Unicode or non Unicode Install a Central Instance to install the central instance The following is the list of activities for the mySAP CRM server installation Planning activities Preparation activities Installation activities Post installation activities vvvy From the Table of Content of the SAP Customer Relationship Management 4 0 SR1 ABAP IBM server iSeries we outline the considerations planning and preparation activities before the installation and the post installation steps Note The descriptions in the following implementation steps maintain the use of the term iSeries to be consistent with the installation document referenced iSeries servers as well as IBM System i5 IBM server i5 and AS 400e servers are represented by the term System i in this IBM Redpaper In this installation guide there are also special checklists for gt SAP CRM Central System gt SAP CRM Distributed System gt Dialog Instance Implementation considerations gt Basic system variants gt Installation components gt Distribution of installation components for SAP SCM ABAP SAP SCM ABAP Java SAP Web AS Jav
6. QPFRADJ After adjusting the pool definitions and all other System i system values QSTRUPPGM od Typically this is program QSTRUP in library QGPL QBASACTLVL Should be calculated to the number of relevant SAP work processes multiplied by 1 20 We recommend that the value be increased Note Refer to the installation guide for a discussion of these i5 OS system values 6 Set the time zone environment variable In OS 400 V5R2 you must add the time zone environment variable PASE_TZ to your System i configuration to ensure the correct resolution of time zones If you have not configured the time zone variable correctly you get the error message shown in Example 5 1 Example 5 1 Time zone variable ABAP runtime errors ZDATE_LARGE_TIME_DIFF Occurred on 2004 01 15 at 17 46 49 Large time difference between application server and database What happened The R 3 System synchronizes the times of the database and application server regularly As a result a very large time difference was detected between these two systems To set the time zone environment variable perform the following steps a Log on to your System i server as user QSECOFR b Enter command WRKENVVAR and choose F4 c The Work with Environment Var WRKENVVAR window opens For the Level parameter specify SYS and choose ENTER d The Work with Environment Vars SYS window opens Under Opt enter 1 and under Name add the PASE_TZ environment variable Choos
7. 000 00 naeun aaea 77 4 3 2 SAP BW technical system landscape 0 000 cee eee ee 77 4 3 3 SAP BW installation steps overview 000 0c eee eee 79 4 3 4 SAP BW documentation reference 600 e eee 80 4 4 Installation of SAP Enterprise Portal 0 000 c cece eee 81 4 4 1 SAP EP business overview 00600 cece eee 81 4 4 2 SAP EP technical system landscape 0 000 e eee eee eee 82 4 4 3 SAP EP installation steps overview 0000 cee ee 83 4 4 4 SAP EP documentation references 00 0c cece eee 84 4 5 Installation of SAP Exchange Infrastructure Xl 0 0 00 e eee eee 84 4 5 1 SAP XI technical system landscape 0 000 cece ee eee eee 85 4 5 2 SAP Exchange Infrastructure installation steps overview 89 4 5 3 SAP XI documentation reference 0 0000 e eee eee 90 4 6 Installation of SAP Mobile Infrastructure 0 0 00 eee 91 4 6 1 SAP Mobile Infrastructure Client 0 0 0000 c eee 92 4 6 2 SAP Mobile Infrastructure Server 0 000 00 cee tees 92 4 6 3 SAP Mobile Infrastructure installation steps overview 0 0005 93 4 6 4 SAP Mobile Infrastructure documentation reference 00 0005 93 4 7 Installation of SAP Knowledge Warehouse 00 0 e eee eee eee es 93 4 7 1 SAP Knowledge Warehouse business overview 0 000 e0eeeeee 93 4 7 2 SAP KW installation steps overv
8. 1 Call the program SAPINST EXE in the subdirectory SAPINST OS400 AS400 of the Installation Master CD Figure 3 11 shows you the path from the SAPINST EXE on the NetWeaver Installation Master CD E DyD_Nwo04_SR1Inst_Mst_ECC_SOSR1_SRM_405R1_ 5 Imis_o5400_64 sapinst H E COMMON 05400 Dg a ECCO4SR1 E aR NWO4SR1 SRMO4SR1 i E tmKsve _ Zl TRANS TRANS Figure 3 11 Path for the SAPINST EXE from the TMKSVR on the Installation Master CD P Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 49 From the mySAP ECC50_SR1 Master CD the path to the SAPINST EXE is shown in Figure 3 12 tmp CDs D51031149_ECC50_SR1_InstMaster IM15_0S5400_64 SAPINST OS400 AS400 Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras 2 H Zur ck A Suchen Gy Ordner 9 My GE X wy Ese O E Wechseln zu Drdner A SL yp enn eee esrden manera OSYS LIB r CIECCO4SRI Dateiordner 04 05 2006 14 21 H QTCPTMM EaR Dateiordner 04 05 2006 14 21 S E tmp NWO4SR1 Dateiordner 04 05 2006 14 20 E brms C SRMO4SR1 Dateiordner 04 05 2006 14 17 5 cds Markieren Sie ein Objekt um CI TMKSVR Dateiordner 04 05 2006 14 17 S D51031149_ECC50_SR1_InstMaster seine Beschreibung anzuzeigen fa catalog dtd 2KB DTD Datei 02 07 2004 18 31 E pocu Siehe auch L2 helppool 251 KB XML Document 29 12 2004 21 08 EH IM15_09400_64 Eigene Date
9. 28 This section provides details about the SAP system components Overview A minimum SAP system consists of a central instance a database instance and if you install an SAP system with a J2EE Engine a central services instance You can then install optional dialog instances application server on different hosts after you have completed the installation of the central instance the central services instance if required and the database instance You can think of an SAP instance central instance central services instance database instance dialog instance and gateway instance as a group of processes that are started and stopped at the same time Every instance except the database instance has a two digit identifier between 00 and 97 that must be unique on a computer Definition When you set up an SAP system you need to install the main components that enable the system to operate the following gt Central instance The central instance is the core component of an SAP system Exactly one central instance must exist in each SAP system The central system usually provides all SAP system utilities especially the central utilities enqueue service and message service If you install an SAP system with a J2EE Engine the Software Deployment Manager SDM is part of the J2EE Engine of the central instance gt Central services instance If you install an SAP system with the J2EE Engine a central services instance is
10. Qp2Term 117 QPFRADJ 118 QSECURITY 117 QSTRUP 118 QSTRUPPGM 118 QSYS2924 61 123 QSYS2938 123 QSYS2959 123 QSYS2984 61 123 QTIME 118 QTIMZON 84 QTOTJOB 117 quality management 165 Quick Sizer 17 QUTCOFFSET 84 QXDAEDRSQL 134 R R 3 Standalone Gateway 149 R3LOAD 57 64 224 jobs 64 R3RMTDB 134 R38SETUP 36 232 R8SIDDATA 119 R38SIDJRN 119 raw devices 211 Redbooks Web site 240 Contact us xi registration mode 216 Remote Function Call RFC 85 Responsive Replenishment RPT 157 RFC 85 RFC destination 137 RNIF 85 Room Content Search 83 Room Directory iView 83 rootbin share 43 RPT 157 RSA7 225 RTVCLPGM 118 Runtime Workbench 87 RZ04 135 226 229 RZ12 229 S SAF 154 SAINT 111 SAP Index 245 SAP Business One 1 Software Distribution Center 9 SAP APO Optimizer 158 SAP Auto ID Infrastructure 2 SAP Business Connector BC 109 SAP Business Information Warehouse BW 77 SAP code page 1100 62 SAP code page 4102 62 SAP Communication Station 109 SAP Composite Application Framework 2 SAP Content Server 109 148 SAP cProject Suite 165 SAP cryptographic software 66 SAP EarlyWatchAlert EWA 9 SAP Enterprise Portal 81 SAP ERP ECC5 0 110 SAP Event Manager 158 SAP Gateway 95 215 SAP GoingLive Functional Upgrade Check 234 SAP Installation Guide link to 15 SAP Internet Graphic Server IGS 109 SAP Internet Pricing and Configurator IPC 109 SAP Internet Transaction Server ITS 96 109 SAP Knowledge Warehouse KW 93 SAP
11. This applies analogously to the installation of all other SAP components based on Web Application Server 6 40 and the installation tool SAPINST and begins with a Log on to the Windows host as the installation user For more information see the Preparing a Windows User Account and iSeries User Profile topic in Part of the Planning and Preparation SAP installation guide for the SAP Solution Manager b If you want to install a central instance a database instance or a dialog instance copy the SAP Installation Master DVD to your System i host If you want to install additional components mount the mySAP NetWeaver Components DVD In this case replace SAP Installation Master DVD with mySAP NetWeaver Components DVD in this section c Start SAPinst from the SAP Installation Master DVD in one of the following ways e Using the default installation directory recommended Start the installation with the command sapinst exe Install in the path Mapped_Drive Copied SAP Installation Master DVD IMx_OS400_64 SAPINST OS400 AS400 e Using an alternative installation directory Create a new installation directory and change into this directory Enter the following command to start SAPinst from the SAP Installation Master DVD Mapped Drive Copied SAP Installation Master DVD IMx_0S400_64 SAPINST OS400 AS400 sapinst exe SAPinst uses the port 21212 and 21213 during the installation for communication with the SAPinst GUI
12. gt SAP service catalog http service sap com servicecat gt Epic Editor 4 3 1 from Arbortext Inc http www arbortext com gt Authentic 2004 from Altova http www altova com download_authentic html How to get IBM Redbooks You can search for view or download Redbooks Redpapers Hints and Tips draft publications and Additional materials as well as order hardcopy Redbooks or CD ROMs at this Web site ibm com redbooks Help from IBM IBM Support and downloads ibm com support IBM Global Services ibm com services 240 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Index Symbols XI 84 QFileSvr 400 188 Numerics 2 tier 184 landscape 184 3 tier 184 differences between 2 tier and 3 tier landscapes 187 documentation 184 example setup a 3 tierlandscape 195 heterogeneous 3 tier landscapes 197 homogeneous System i 3 tier landscapes 191 installation guides 184 instance profile parameters 187 landscape 184 743113 SAP note 18 A ABAP add ons 126 ABAP central instance installing 56 ABAP stack 23 installing 53 Abstract Window Toolkit AWT 91 Adapter Engine 87 88 Adaptive Computing Controller 2 ADDENVVAR 118 Administrator Workbench 77 application Adapter Engine 87 Adaptive Computing Controller 2 APO Optimizer 158 Auto ID Infrastructure 2 Business Explorer 77 Business Explorer Analyzer 80 Business Information Warehouse 72 77 Business Intelligence Information Broadcasting 72 Com
13. http service sap com notes 3 Install SAP Web AS Java 6 40 If required install the J2EE in add in mode You can also choose to install this J2EE in stand alone mode In general we recommend a stand alone installation mode To maximize performance set heap size to 1024 MB and PermSize to 256 MB 128 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Installation gt Installation Guide Web AS Java 6 40 lt Platform gt lt Database gt at http service sap com nw04installation 4 Install Adobe Document Services 1 0 and note the platform restrictions For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Installation gt Dev Env gt Installation Guide Adobe Document Services at http service sap com nw04installation 5 Install Internet Pricing and Configurator IPC 4 0 This IPC is used for certain scenarios such as procurement with SAP SRM but not for Internet sales An additional database is not required In contrast see installation step 7 of the ERP host For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics mySAP ERP 2004 ERP Java Components gt IPC 4 0 Server Installation Guide at http service sap com erp inst 6 Install SAP Business Connector SAP BC 4 7 Core Fix 3 minimum For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic SAP note 571530 Availability of
14. Java NET BW ee BI Content Interoperability einicg Content Management ET and Collaboration Conin Saner BW Functionality Portal Platform Portal Runtime for NET XI Functionality KW IKS Search and BW Java Components Classification TREX XI Components Visual Composer Server Adobe Document KW Functionality Services XI Adapter Engine NWDI Web AS ABAP XI Adapter Engine ease sacl ea e J2EE Additional ABAP Stack Java Stack Components Figure 4 3 All installable components of mySAP NetWeaver 04 mySAP NetWeaver 04 is the foundation of mySAP ERP 04 mySAP NetWeaver facilitates the integration and alignment of people information and business processes across organizational and technological boundaries It easily integrates information and applications from virtually any source It incorporates with and can be extended using the primary market technologies Microsoft NET Sun s J2EE and IBM WebSphere With mySAP NetWeaver 04 fewer components have to be installed separately particularly in the ABAP stack Nevertheless it bears mention that these components might still have to be patched separately depending on the requirements of your ERP scenarios or on SAP s Support Package Stack strategy The latter states that you should keep all components which are installed in one system on a defined stack level Therefore it is useful to know the technical components of mySAP NetWeaver for which support packag
15. Logor Figure 3 20 SAPINST Central instance installation window The following figures show System i specific window that are seen during the installation The windows are mostly self explanatory If you do not know what to enter read the Additional Information section or use the F1 key for the input fields During the installation process the menu of the SAPINST GUI appears asks for the necessary input and guides you through the installation steps Specifying the kernel library When specifying the kernel library you can use an existing library or copy the kernel from the DVD or CD to a new library whose name you can define Even though it is possible to share kernel libraries between multiple SAP we recommend that you do not share the libraries Whenever you replace the kernel with a newer patch level you have to shut down all SAP systems that use this kernel The changes affect all the SAP systems that share the kernel If possible use an existing prepared kernel including the patches of a support package stack The installation uses R3LOAD therefore this should be patched before the database load takes place Never exchange R3OPT SAR in a copied kernel CD You would mess up the patch information of SAP s final assembly which comes with R3OPTC1 SAR on the CD You can prepare a kernel beforehand with standard methods Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 57 I SAPinst SAPINST IBASO3 BASYCS CO
16. The scenarios offered through SAP KW benefit from key functions of the solution SAP KW is designed to gt Provide a user friendly authoring environment for authors creating different types of materials gt Allow for maximum reuse of content stored in the system gt Deliver workflow based translation functions for multilingual environments gt Generate output formats in a purpose oriented and target group oriented flexible fashion gt Provide an infrastructure for distributing the respective materials to end users The scenarios Documentation and Training focus on the traditional knowledge transfer topics of the creation and management of documentation and classroom training materials The Quality management manual scenario supports you in creating managing and distributing a quality management manual according to the requirements of the ISO 9000 ff and 14000 standards Figure 4 11 on page 95 shows the technical system landscape of SAP KW 94 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Front End we Supported Basic XML Editor System Variants Lhe Editon SAP Web AS n ABAP Java 7 SAP Web AS SAP GUI with e ae Java SAP Web BW Extensions 2000 or XP AS ABAP Non SAP Component SAP Knowledge Warehouse Mandatory Component KON Portal Optional integration Na Enter Portal w ie BW Functionality XI Functionality MI Functionality KW Functionality W
17. 1 Log on as user root 2 Manually create a compressed tar archive that contains all installed files For saving on tape run the following command tar cf file_system compress c gt tape device For saving on file system run the following command tar cf file_system compress c gt ARCHIVENAME tar Z Restoring Your Backup Check for modifications in the existing parameter files before you overwrite them when restoring the backup 214 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 1 Log on as user root 2 Restore the data that you previously backed up Restore the data from tape cat tape_device compress cd tar xf Restore the data from the file system cat ARCHIVENAME tar Z compress cd tar xf 3 Maintain your company address for initial users 4 Prepare the SAP system for preparing business applications If required prepare the SAP system for using business applications which includes customizing the SAP Web Application Server and the business components For more information choose Solution Life Cycle Management Customizing in the SAP Library 6 2 Standalone SAP gateway The SAP gateway makes the remote function call RFC interface between the SAP instances available within an SAP system and beyond system boundaries Each instance of an SAP system has a gateway The gateway enables communication between work processes and external programs as well as com
18. 108 mySAP Customer Relationship Management CRM 138 mySAP Enterprise Resource Planning ERP 110 mySAP ERP components 110 mySAP NetWeaver 71 244 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models mySAP Product Lifecycle Management PLM 164 mySAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM 172 mySAP Supply Chain management SCM 157 mySAP Supply Chain Management solution suite 157 N NETBIOS naming convention 205 NetWeaver ix 40 71 component 72 Development Infrastructure 31 NetWeaver 2004 70 NetWeaver Development Environment NWDE 72 NetWeaver Development Infrastructure NWDI 31 Network File System NFS 188 network information service NIS 210 NFS 188 NFS mounts 191 NIS 210 non Unicode version NUC 52 NUC 52 NWDE 72 NWDI 31 O OAC3 231 OLAP 77 OLTP 79 Online Analytical Processing 77 Online Transaction Processing OLTP 79 operating system requirements 18 OptiConnect 192 OY25 230 231 P PAM 116 PASE 117 PI_BASISplug in 79 ping 122 Plain J2SE Adapter Engine 88 PLM 164 components 166 plug in PI_BASIS 79 Portable Application Solution Environment PASE 117 Portal Host 128 PREPARE 234 Product Availability Matrix PAM 116 program Qp2Shell 117 Qp2Term 117 QSTRUP 118 program and project management 165 PSEMAINT 231 PTF 60 Level Check Window 60 python 80 Q QACTJOB 117 QADLACTJ 117 QADLTOTJ 117 QAUTOCFG 118 QBASACTLVL 118 QCTL 117 QCTLSVBSD 117 QDATE 118 QJOBMSGQFL 118 Qp2Shell 117
19. 3 2 10 Copy Toolbox JDBC driver If you run your Java instance with the Toolbox JDBC driver we recommend that you do not use the driver jt400 jar from the default IBM directory Use your own copy for example in the directory sapmnt jdbc Toolbox By doing so you ensure that a newer version that is downloaded from the Internet is not automatically replaced by an older version that comes with a PTF package such as cumulative PTF package 3 2 11 Install cryptographic software and policies 66 To install the J2EE Engine with strong encryption download the encryption software from the topics SAP Software Distribution Center gt Download gt SAP Cryptographic Software at http service sap com swdc An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Download the JCE policy files from the IBM Web site http www ibm com developerworks java jdk security index htm Copy the JCE policy files copied into the directory QIBM ProdData Java400 jdk1 4 lib security 3 2 12 Create users SAPJSF J2EE_ADM In order to allow the J2EE server accessing the ABAP server create several user IDs in the ABAP server such as SAPJSF_sid J2EE_ADML_sid and J2EE_GST_sid 3 2 13 Install Java Add in Install the Java add in by starting SAPINST EXE in the subdirectory SAPINST OS400 AS400 filling in the user dialogs mostly self explanatory and starting the installation 3 2 14 Remove SAPinst installation files Afte
20. All systems are implemented on System i systems or partitions Our configuration is illustrated in Figure 6 4 on page 196 where you see gt One database server with an additional application server central instance on the same machine gt Two additional application servers Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 195 TCP IP configuration Figure 6 4 shows you a homogeneous System i landscape as the basis for the succeeding example Server Network 192 3 2 1 CIDBS 192 3 2 3 APP1S 192 3 2 4 APP2S Database Server Application Server Application Server DBMS Dialog Instance Dialog Instance Application Server Central Instance Cl Hostname CIDB Hostname APP1 Hostname APP2 192 5 1 6 CIDB 192 5 3 4 APP1 192 5 4 2 APP2 SS Backbone SL Access Network Figure 6 4 Homogeneous System i landscape The following are extracts of the host tables Command CFGTCP option 10 from gt CIDB Central Instance database server gt Appi Application Server 1 gt App2 Application Server 2 Table 6 1 has the same entries on all systems Table 6 1 Host tables for homogeneous 3 tier System i system landscapes number prame Besson ooo 192 3 2 1 CIDBS Database server Server Segment Interface 192 3 2 3 APP1S Application Server 1 Server Segment Interface 196 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Perform the following tasks and consider the following
21. Business System Environment Business System Plain J2SE Adapter Engine Integration Builder Integration Directory Integration Repository Business System AS Java 6 40 SR1 Adapter Engine Figure 4 9 Overview of the relevant XI software components SAP Exchange Infrastructure Install the SAP Exchange Infrastructure on the central instance of a Unicode SAP Web AS ABAP Java 6 40 SR1 It comprises the following units gt Integration Server gt Integration Builder which includes the following components Integration Directory Integration Repository gt Runtime Workbench gt Adapter Engine Adapter Engine Install the Adapter Engine on the central instance of an SAP Web AS Java 6 40 SR1 This engine includes the Java Proxy Runtime and Java Proxy Server that enable Java application business system to exchange data using Java proxies It comprises the following adapters File adapter Mail adapter JMS adapter JDBC adapter SOAP adapter Marketplace adapter BC adapter RNIF adapter CIDIX adapter Java proxy server Java proxy runtime vvvvvvvvvvy Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 87 You can install the Plain J2SE Adapter Engine on a non SAP Business system with JDK 1 3 1 or higher It contains the following adapters File Adapter JMS Adapter JDBC Adapter SOAP Adapter vvvy Special considerations for the adapter environment The following are the installation opt
22. During the installation Use the SAPinst CD Browser dialog that is you can check the entered location and then copy the entire DVD to the path you entered in the field Copy Package to These preparation activities are optional and only apply if you decided to use LDAP for SAP Logon or Microsoft Management Console MMC and you have to prepare the active directory for use with the SAP system 5 2 4 mySAP ERP installation activities The next step is to install an SAP instance using SAPinst Reminder We discussed the concepts the procedures and the installation steps in detail in 3 2 Installation steps for the SAP Web Application Server 6 40 on page 41 Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 125 Overall installation sequence The following table describes the installation steps for a sample minimal landscape It also describes the suggested sequence of installation steps that you should perform to obtain a full fledged system landscape Before you start the installation it is imperative that you know which components are required for the business processes you plan to use We recommend that you do not install all components as a matter of course Only install those components that are required for the business processes you use For more information about the required components review the software component matrix for each key capability During the installation process an SAP Solution Manager system is r
23. NIS If you use NIS distribute users over the network If you do not create users manually SAPinst creates them automatically during the installation All users must have identical environment settings If you change the environment delivered by SAP such as variables paths SAP does not assume responsibility SAPinst checks all required users groups and services on the local machine If you manage users groups or services network wide in your company SAP recommends that you create the user and group NIS entries before running SAPInst SAPinst checks if the required services are available on the host and creates them if necessary See the log messages about the service entries and adapt the network wide Network Information Service NIS entries accordingly SAPinst checks the NIS users groups and services using NIS commands However SAPInst does not change NIS configurations For more information for checking the NIS see the installation guide 3a in 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 6 Create operating system users and groups manually If you do not want SAPinst to create operating systems users groups and services you can optionally create them manually before the installation SAPinst checks whether the required users and groups already exist If not it creates new users and groups as necessary SAPinst chooses available user IDs and group IDs unless you are installing a dialo
24. No additional installation procedure required Suitable for development or test scenarios Installation possible on Non released SAP Web AS platforms Only HTTP connection required between adapter and Integration server Suitable for a more heterogeneous system landscape with mixed operating systems and authorization concepts or for distributed WAN environments with firewalls and so on Data source file database JMS provider must be accessible using NFS tcp ports and so on may be only available in homogeneous LAN environments Possible performance bottleneck due to high RAM needs The system needs three times the amount of the maximum message size as RAM for example Additional installation procedure required for JDK and adapter itself 4 5 2 SAP Exchange Infrastructure installation steps overview This section lists the sequence of steps required to implement SAP Exchange Infrastructure Now we mention the implementation steps to realize at least one of the communication 0 1 ptions A P Installation of a Unicode SAP Web AS ABAP Java system A Unicode SAP Web AS is a prerequisite for the core component SAP Exchange Infrastructure Integration Server Integration Builder and XI Adapter Engine that realizes the communication options A P You must prepare SAP Web AS as described in the documentation Installation Guide SAP Exchange Infrastructure Installation of SAP GUI on each host fro
25. gt gt Enhance the start up profile of the central instance In the illustrations in the following bullets the host name of the application server is APPSRV1 the SAP System ID is PRD and the instance number is 01 Enter an additional startup program for each instance that is at the end of the start up program Start_Program_06 APPSRV1 STR_PRD_0O1 Enter an additional stop program for each instance Stop_Program_03 APPSRV1 STP_PRD_01 When you start the central instance these entries cause a job to be started on APPSRV1 SBMJOB CMD CALL STR_PRD_01 Or when stopping the job SBMJOB CMD CALL STP_PRD_01 The library list in these jobs has already been set correctly by calling CALL PGM R3PRD400 R3INLPGM Thus create the following two CL programs on the System i APPSRV1 CL program STR_PRD_0O1 PGM CALL PGM R3SID400 R3INLPGM STARTSAP SID PRD INSTANCE 01 ENDPGM CL program STP_PRD_01 PGM CALL PGM R3SID400 R3INLPGM STOPSAP SID PRD INSTANCE 01 ENDPGM Place the CL programs into a general library such as QGPL For details about how to start and stop all instances of an SAP system at the same time for homogeneous 3 tier installations refer to SAP note 93316 6 1 7 Example Setup a 3 tier landscape in a homogeneous System i landscape This section discusses the setup of a 3 tier landscape in a homogeneous System i landscape In this setup the database and application servers are on System i servers
26. http service sap com businessobjects gt SAP business packages http service sap com ep content gt SAP Developer Network 238 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models http www sdn sap com SAP portal content portfolio https www sdn sap com irj sdn developerareas contentportfolio SAP R 3 Enterprise and SAP Component http service sap com r3 plug in SAP system landscape http service sap com ti SAP platforms http service sap com platforms SAP remote connection http service sap com remoteconnection SAP SP stack http service sap com sp stacks SAP support packages http service sap com patches SAP Support Package Manager http service sap com ocs schedules SAP note Assistant http service sap com noteassistant ERP Java Components http service sap com erp inst SAP ITS 6 20 http service sap com sap its CRM documentation and installation guides http service sap com crm inst SAP Solution Manager http service sap com solutionmanager SAP Mobile Infrastructure http service sap com mi SAP Enterprise Portal http service sap com nw ep SAP SCM http service sap com scm SAP PLM http service sap com plm SAP System Copy and Migration http service sap com systemcopy SAP OS DB Migration http service sap com osdbmigration Related publications 239 gt SAP license keys http service sap com licensekeys gt SAP system copies http service sap com systemcopy
27. iv Specify the Backup media type and the destination of the backup Choose Next Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 207 v Check the information on the dialog box and then select Finish to start the backup c Backup all SAP specific and all database related directories i Select Start gt Programs Accessories System Tools gt Backup ii Select Backup Wizard gt Next iii Select Backup selected files drives or network data and select Next iv In What to Back Up select the Windows directory and all SAP and database related directories including the following usr sap HOMEDIR of sidadm WINNT usr sap trans The directory usr sap trans is only required for SAP systems that have the ABAP engine installed v Select Next vi In Where to Store the Backup screen select the Backup media type and enter the Backup media or file name for the backup vii Select Next viii Check the information displayed and then select Finish to start the backup 6 1 10 Database server on the System i and application server on Linux This section discusses the setup of a 3 tier landscape with a database server on a System i server and an application server on Linux The central system of the SAP system must already be installed normally as 2 tier system on the System i host Then plan and perform the installation of the additional application server on Linux First get the required documentation Planning Guide Instal
28. knowledge gt Life cycle collaboration Integrates business partners customers and suppliers to communicate data such as project plans documents service bulletins parts information and product structures across virtual teams gt Program and project management Provides advanced capabilities to plan manage and control the complete development process allowing project managers to control project structures schedules costs and resources gt Quality management Provides integrated total quality management for all industries throughout the entire product life cycle to provide the best quality from concept to production gt Asset life cycle management Manages physical assets and equipment throughout the whole life cycle of an asset to improve plant performance and equipment availability gt Environment health and safety EH amp S Provides a comprehensive answer to environmental health and product safety issues by helping enterprises to fully comply with government regulations and risk management 5 5 2 About SAP cProject Suite 3 10 for mySAP PLM SAP cProject Suite 3 10 for mySAP PLM consists of the applications cProjects 3 10 and cFolders 3 10 Collaboration projects cProjects enables you to realize innovative ideas in development projects simplify internal processes implement recognized quality standards and reduce costs incurred by errors It is a cross industry application that supports the entire p
29. product or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others viii An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Preface Systems Applications and Products in Data Processing SAP offers software applications for business including a comprehensive set of business applications that are supported on the IBM System i family of products and the IBM i5 OS integrated DB2 Universal Database UDB for the IBM eServer iSeries database The following are some of the more than 50 SAP business applications available for System i models gt Business Applications and Solutions for example mySAP Enterprise Resource Planning ERP mySAP Customer Relationship Management CRM mySAP Supply Chain Management SCM mySAP Product Lifecycle Management PLM mySAP NetWeaver components mySAP Enterprise Portal EP mySAP Business Information Warehouse BW mySAP Exchange Infrastructure XI mySAP Mobile Infrastructure MI mySAP Knowledge Warehouse KW gt Solutions for small and midsize enterprises mySAP All in One SAP Business One All of the SAP applications are based on a common infrastructure layer called SAP NetWeaver This IBM Redpaper focuses on the SAP business applications based on mySAP NetWeaver 2004 and outlines the activities involved when installing an SAP system which are specific to the System i customer Use this Redpaper as an installation che
30. that is the implementing of SAP applications on i5 OS with its integrated database DB2 UDB for iSeries To describe the planning preparation installation post installation and configuration steps of all these components is beyond the scope of this book But we provide a description of the installation of the SAP Solution Manager because it is mandatory for all SAP components as of SAP applications based on Web Application Server 6 40 6 6 Planning an SAP upgrade The upgrade of the SAP components is described in specific SAP upgrade guides You find the upgrade guides for each SAP component on the SAP Marketplace at http service sap com instguides Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 233 But they are in different sub trees than the installation guides The upgrade of the SAP components is a rather sophisticated process As it is beyond the scope of this Redpaper to describe the upgrade processes we refer to the official SAP upgrade guides mentioned above When you plan to upgrade an existing system you first have to check the source release of your SAP system for the following gt Minimum support package level gt SPAM update level gt Kernel patch level You also have to check if an operating system upgrade and a database upgrade which is part of the i5 OS is necessary before starting the SAP upgrade Before you begin the upgrade installation plan it carefully This planning includes requesting all the necessary
31. this component is often operated on a separate server For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Inst Guide Search and Classification TREX at http service sap com nw04installation Alternatively see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic SAP note 745115 Installing TREX 6 1 SP4 at http service sap com notes Install Internet Pricing and Configurator IPC 4 0 along with a database for it This component is used for certain Internet sales scenarios but not for operational procurement with SAP SRM For more information see SAP Service Marketplace under the topics mySAP ERP 2004 ERP Java Components IPC 4 0 Server Installation Guide at http service sap com erp inst Install the following ERP Java Applications on the SAP J2EE Engine FSCM Biller Direct 3 0 XSS 500 Internet Sales ISA WAC 4 0 for ERP IPC Web Application 4 0 LSO Content Player 3 0 for SAP Learning Solution These Java components are combined in a single installation as ERP Java components Note Important restrictions apply to a minimal setup For example regarding EBPP payments a large number of open items can cause a high consumption of memory and CPU capacity For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic SAP note 741821 Release restrictions for SAP ERP 2004 at http service sap com notes Refer to the installation guide for the ERP Java Components under the
32. 3 10 you find this matrix with details about the release versions of the components 5 5 5 Technical implementation The technical implementation depends on the system landscape and in particular on the security policy of the enterprise SAP supports three installation variants 1 Installation of cFolders and cProjects within the intranet Choose this installation when you use cProjects and cFolders applications for internal collaboration only All participants in the collaboration must have access to the company s internal network within the firewall 2 Installation of cFolders and cProjects outside the intranet usually DMZ demilitarized zone SAP does not recommend this installation due to security reasons Choose this scenario if cProjects and cFolders applications should primarily be accessible to external collaboration partners 3 Installation of cFolders outside the intranet usually DMZ demilitarized zone and cProjects within the intranet SAP recommends this scenario Choose this installation when you use the cProjects for internal project management and cFolders for secure collaboration with external partners 5 5 6 Installation of SAP cProjects Suite 3 10 and cFolders part of cProjects SAP note 717650 provides information about installing and upgrading to cProject Suite 3 10 CPROJECTS 310 using Transaction SAINT It also provides prerequisites preconditions and the requested passwords for the installation of cProj
33. ABAP on page 186 1 Prepare the installation DVDs For more information about preparing the installation DVDs see the installation guide 3b and the 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 2 Mount a CD or DVD for Linux a Log on as user root b Create a mount point for the CD DVD with the command mkdir medium mountdir For example medium mountdir is sapcd c Mount the first CD or DVD device with the command mount t iso9660 r device medium mountdir Where device is dev cdrom for non SCSI CD devices and dev scdn for SCSI drives with the device number n If the file names on the mounted CD or DVD are written in lowercase letters remount the CD or DVD with the following commands umount device mount t iso9660 r o map off device medium mountdir 3 Check prerequisites for all instances For more information about checking the prerequisites for all instances refer to the installation guide 3b shown in 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 212 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 4 Install the SAP system instances using SAPinst For more information about using SAPinst refer to the installation guide 3b in 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 The installation guide tells you how to run SAPinst to install one or more SAP instances It describes an installation wh
34. After installing the SAP system kernel check the TCP IP connection again with the WRKLNK command QFileSvr 400 host_name Your host name is displayed under Object link for example IBASO3 for the host in the example given previously For more information about TCP IP configuration see the IBM documentation TCP IP Configuration and Reference SC41 5420 12 Adjust the relational database name Perform the following steps to adjust the local relational database name RDB name so it is the same as the TCP IP host name a Log on to your database host as user QSECOFR b To display your TCP IP host name enter the CHGTCPDMN command and choose F11 c Search for the contents of HOSTNAME This is your TCP IP host name d Before you can adjust the local RDB name you have to check whether the local RDB name exists To do this enter the WRKRDBDIRE command Depending on the outcome proceed as follows e Ifan entry for RDB name exists and you want to adjust the name to the TCP IP host name tcp_host_name enter the following command CHGRDBDIRE RMTLOCNAME LOCAL IP PORT DRDA RMTAUTMTH ENCRYPTED ALWLOWER DEV LOC LCLLOCNAME LOC RMTNETID LOC MODE NETATR TNSPGM DRDA e If there is no such RDB name you have to add one with the correct name tcp_host_name To do this enter the following command ADDRDBDIRE RDB tcp_host_name RMTLOCNAME LOCAL IP PORT DRDA RMTAUTMTH ENCRYPTED ALWLOWER DEV LOC LCLLOCNAM
35. Application Platform SAP Web Application Server gt ABAP Technology gt ABAP Programming and Runtime Environment External Programming Interfaces gt RFC Programming in ABAP gt Maintaining Remote Destinations 22 Change the passwords of created System i users For security reasons you should change the passwords of the user profiles supplied with your SAP system Table 5 6 System i specific user profiles and their initial passwords after an SAP standard installation User profile Initial password SIDOFR SAPOFR SIDOPR SAPOPR SAPnnPWD nn is the instance number In 3 tier systems these three users must have the same password on all System i servers Make sure that for every instance nn a user S Dnn exists on the central instance host To change passwords at an i5 OS level use the command CHGPWD or CHGUSRPRF 23 Change the passwords of created users You need to change the passwords of the users that SAPinst creates during the installation Table 5 7 on page 138 lists these users You also have to remove the contents of the installation directory and store them securely otherwise they might represent a security risk Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 137 Change the passwords of these users according to the SAP security guide For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com securityguide SAP system users might exist in more SAP system clients than listed i
36. Content As of mySAP NetWeaver 04 SR1 you can also optionally install the SAP Enterprise Portal components on an SAP Web AS ABAP Java 2 Optional Installation of Search and Classification TREX Use the following installation parameters for the Search and Classification TREX installation Perform the installation steps to set up an HTTP connection During Search and Classification TREX installation select the languages you want Search and Classification TREX to recognize Search and Classification TREX uses this information to perform the language recognition procedure which is necessary for indexing documents No Python extensions are required For more information see the Installation Guide Search and Classification TREX 3 Import Business Packages More information about how to find Business Packages install and use them in a Portal environment is available under the topic Portal Content Portfolio Quick Link gt New gt Finding and Downloading Content gt New Process at https www sdn sap com irj sdn developerareas contentportfolio 4 Optional Configure a portal cluster and add dialog instances or server nodes using Java tools To add Portal Platform nodes use the following topics Adding Deleting a Server Process to add or remove a server process in a system where a dispatcher is already installed Adding a Dialog Instance to add a dispatcher and a server on a dedi
37. If this port is already used by another service you must add the parameter SAPINST_DIALOG_PORT free_port_number to the relevant sapinst command listed previously Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 103 For example Mapped Drive Copied SAP Installation Master DVD IMx_0S400_64 SAPINST OS400 AS400 sapinst exe SAPINST_DIALOG_PORT free_port_number d The SAPinst TMKSVR Session Parameters dialog box opens and prompts you for the target System i parameters Enter your values Continue the SAP SolMan installation analogously as described in the mySAP NetWeaver or mySAP ERP installation section Note Refer to the Installation and Post installation Guide SAP Solution Manager 3 2 IBM server iSeries Part II Installation and Post Installation in the SAP Marketplace at http service sap com instguides Follow exactly the guidance which is written in this guide and in the appropriate SAP notes The installation guide tells you how to run SAPinst to install one or more SAP instances It describes an installation where SAPinst GUI and SAPinst server are running on the same host Each SAP instance requires a separate installation directory We recommend that you keep all the installation directories until the system is completely and correctly installed If you are installing a second or subsequent SAP system into an existing database ensure that the database is up and running before starting the installation 5 Ch
38. Installation Guides for the SAP Web Application Server 6 40 SR1 The installation documentation consists of two guides gt Partl Planning and Preparation This guide is specific to your operating system OS Therefore you no longer require SAP Software on UNIX OS Dependencies Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 185 gt Part Il Installation and Post Installation Activities This guide is operating system specific and provides all necessary information about installing your system with SAPinst and the post installation steps required to successfully complete your installation On the bottom of the window you are asked to choose the database We select IBM DB2 Universal Database for iSeries Installation guides of SAP Web Application Server on System i models At this link we see the installation guides listed in Figure 6 1 These guides have the necessary information for the installation of additional SAP application server for a System i database server SAPNet Guides_DB4 Installation of SAP Web Application Server 6 40 SR1 on IBM eServer iSeries Part I Planning and Preparation SAP Web AS ABAP iSeries SAP Web AS Java iSeries SAP Web AS ABAP on Linux Dialog instance only SAP Web AS Java on Linux Dialog instance only SAP Web AS ABAP on Windows Dialog instance only e SAP Web AS Java on Windows Dialog instance only Part Il Installation and Post Installation SAP Web AS
39. Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 82478 223 83292 7 835170 180 853564 18 86557 235 92313 7 92589 187 92589 117 92963 221 93316 195 94998 132 version 6 SAP Notes Assistant 9 SAP Partner Connectivity Kit 90 SAP Quick Sizer 17 SAP Security Guide 12 SAP Service and Asset Management 1 SAP Software Distribution Center 9 SAP Solution Manager application 2 SAP Solution Manager key 115 SAP Solutions for Small and Midsize Enterprises 1 SAP S User 8 SAP terminology database 11 SAP transaction 230 BD54 230 BDLS 230 DBO2 230 OAC3 231 OY25 230 231 PSEMAINT 231 RSA7 225 RZ04 135 226 229 RZ12 229 SCC4 66 226 230 SCCL 66 SE01 226 SE38 228 SICK 228 SLG2 230 SM13 225 228 SM21 229 SM30 230 SM35 228 SM37 226 SM51 229 SM58 229 SM59 226 229 SMLG 135 SP01 228 SPAD 226 228 SPAM 136 STMS 226 230 STRUST 231 WE21 231 SAP Upgrade PREPARE 234 SAP xApps Composite Applications 1 SAP 130 SAP_Web_AS_ Docu 185 SAPCAR 46 SAPconnect 148 SAPINST starting 50 SAPINST CD 45 updating 45 SAPInst CD 37 sapmnt 190 SAPphone 148 SAProuter 134 SAPSIDDB 120 SAPSIDJRN 120 saptext 190 satellite system 97 SCC4 66 226 230 SCCL 66 scenario 14 152 177 business 159 160 173 Catalog Content Management 172 collaborative 166 competitive 166 Computer Telephony Integration 148 Forecasting and Replenishment 157 Maintenance and Service Planning 157 Make to Order forOEM 157 Multip
40. LDAP for SAP Logon or Microsoft Management Console MMC Note For all these mySAP SRM preparation activities point 1 to 19 see the corresponding considerations and procedures as described in the 5 2 3 mySAP ERP installation preparation activities on page 116 and the following mySAP SRM Installation activities Prepare the installation DVDs Install an SAP instance using SAPinst Check the prerequisites before starting SAPinst all instances Run SAPinst to install the instances of your SAP system Check using the SAPinst GUI Check interrupted installation with SAPinst Change the SAPinst GUI host Start SAPinst GUI on another host If you decided to use a generic LDAP directory and you did the necessary preparatory steps as described in Part Planning and Preparation you have to create a user for LDAP directory access vvvvvvrvvy 176 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Note For all these mySAP SRM installation activities point 1 to 9 see the corresponding considerations and procedures as described in 5 2 4 mySAP ERP installation activities on page 125 and the following mySAP SRM Post installation activities gt gt gt Grant authorizations for operating system collector programs Start and stop the SAP system Log on to the SAP system Set up the load balancing Check that the SAP system services are present Install the SAP online documentation Instal
41. Linux host where the file system should be imported e Create the sapmnt file system for the SID mkdir sapmnt mkdir sapmnt profile mkdir sapmnt global mkdir sapmnt j2ee mkdir sapmnt jdbc Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 211 f Mount those file systems using the following command mount t nfs o soft ci host sapmnt SID subdirectory sapmnt SID subdirectory For example mount t nfs o soft ci host sapmnt SID profile sapmnt SID profile 11 Install the SAP front end software For more information about installing the SAP front end software refer to the installation guide 3a and refer to 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 12 Prepare the system for SAPinst For more information about preparing the system for SAPinst refer to the installation guide 3a and the 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 13 Prepare the system for the SAPinst GUI For more information about preparing the system for the SAPinst GUI refer to the installation guide 3a and 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 Installation activities for installing a Linux application server The procedure to install a Linux application server is summarized in the following steps For more information about the single installation activities see the installation guide 3b see 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS
42. Messaging Server Installation x gt SAP Content Server Installation Guide x gt Computer Telephony Integration CTI x gt SAP MCIS Installation Guide x gt SAP Mobile gt Infrastructure Installation gt Interaction Center Web Client x gt SAP Enterprise Portal Installation Guide Before starting the actual implementation or upgrade you must fulfill some prerequisites The description of these activities is not part of the CRM Master Guide gt Hardware sizing You can find detailed information about sizing calculation of hardware requirements such as CPU disk and memory resource and the Quick Sizer tool at http service sap com sizing gt Planning the system infrastructure You can find comprehensive information about network integration and technical infrastructure aspects at http service sap com ti Information about network and application security is available at http service sap com securityguide Information about released platforms is available at http service sap com platforms Also read the letter that is included in the SAP CRM installation package It contains important information about several third party software components Additionally read the latest and related SAP notes to the SAP CRM You find the SAP notes number in the guides and the SAP notes themselves in the SAP Marketplace at http service sap com notes Note We recommend that you use the documents that are available o
43. NetWeaver components 77 Front End in Supported Basic System Variants SAP Web AS B ABAP Java SAP Web AS Java SAP Web AS ABAP SAP Web AS ABAP Non SAP Component Mandatory Component BW Precalculation BI Content ervice Optional Component E a 4 SAP System BW Functionality MI Plug in li XI Functionality or PLBASIS Search and Classification TREX MI Functionality External i Data KW Functionality Source Web AS ABAP lil ABAP Stack Java Stack ai Database ABAP ABAP Schema Schema Figure 4 5 SAP Business Information Warehouse BW technical system landscape Components used for SAP BW The following graphics show the main components of SAP BW and illustrate communication between the components To verify which components are obligatory and which can be installed optionally refer to the mySAP NetWeaver 04 master guide section Technical Scenarios of mySAP NetWeaver SAP Business Information Warehouse Installation This section also directs you to the relevant installation guides Figure 4 6 on page 79 shows you the SAP Business Information Warehouse BW technical system landscape but without external data source 78 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Frontend c Intranet Internet SAP GUI with BW Extensions BW Precalculation Service NT only S
44. Non Unicode gt Databa__ ABAP System gt SAP System Identification Select the SAP system ID SAP System Identification SAP System ID SAPSID ERX Additional Information The SAP System iD is an identifier for your SAP system It must be unique throughout your system landscape Figure 3 18 SAPINST SAP System ID installation window Installation type In the following example we perform a standard installation For our example we use a standard installation Alternative installation methods are e Standard System Copy Migration R3load based e IBM UDB for System i specific Homogeneous System Copy SAVLIB RSTLIB Method e IBM DB2 UDB for System i specific ASCII to Unicode Code page Conversion Figure 3 19 on page 56 shows you the Database installation window Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 55 S SAPinst SAPINST IBASO3 BASYCS COM SAP NetWeaver 04 Support Release 1 gt ABAP System gt IBM DB2 UDB f Pi E3 ABAP System gt Database Select the database installation method Database Installation O Standard System Copy Migration R3load Based O IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries Specific Homogeneous System Copy SAVLIB RSTLIB Method O IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries Specific ASCII to Unicode Codepage Conversion Additional Information To install a new SAP system database choose Standard Installation The SAP data dump will be loaded Back _Ned Cancel L
45. Preparation Guide for the IBM server iSeries You have to complete the following preparation activities 1 Check the general information hardware and software requirements 2 Check the hardware and software requirements 3 Check Qp2Term Qp2Shell and the OS 400 Portable Application Solution Environment Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 9 Install the Qshell Check and adjust System i system values Set the time zone environment variable Adjust the startup program QSTRUP Check the distribution of libraries on ASPs Add a user ASP 10 Configure the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP 11 Adjust the relational database name 12 Install English as a secondary language 13 Install additional languages 14 Set up the transport directory 15 Prepare a Windows user account and System i user profile 16 Install TMKSVR and create an installation share 17 Install the SAP front end software 18 Generate the SAP Solution Manager key 19 Check the general information about preparing the system for SAPinst 20 Prepare the system for the SAPinst GUI OOANDASA These preparation activities are optional and only apply if you decided to use LDAP for SAP Logon or Microsoft Management Console MMC and you have to prepare the active directory for use with the SAP system 2 1 3 The main SAP documentation types 10 The first step in any installation is collecting information from s
46. RNM usr sap trans buffer TARGET SIDdate usr sap trans buffer TARGET SID Check the resulting TMS Queues in transaction STMS Push the refresh button 19 Make the needed system change settings in SEO3 or SE06 as well as client change settings and client role in table TOOO from transaction SCC4 Do not change the logical system in SCC4 20 Delete clients you do not want to keep in the TARGET SID 21 Perform the update of the logical system for all relevant customer clients a Call Transaction BDLS to change the logical system of the client from the value that came from the SOURCE SID client to the former value of the TARGET SID client Execution of the transaction should be performed in the background Dependent on the support package level it might be necessary to delete the entry for the target value of the logical system of the TARGET SID client from the view V_TBDLS This is preferred in a local transport request and should immediate be released b Check the results Transactions SCC4 BD54 SM30 or OY25 22 Optionally delete all application logs 23 Execute Transaction SLG2 or Report SBAL_DELETE for background execution 24 Update the table statistics from transaction DBO2 25 Clear the tables DBTABPRT and DBTABLOG in library RSTARGET SIDDATA if they exist 26 Reorganize the database files only those with a high amount of deleted records using RGZPFM on operating system level 27 Check for update collection runs the
47. Release 6 40 but starts including all support packages up to SPO9 Finally the mySAP NetWeaver 2004s see next paragraph is based on SAP basis Release 7 00 mySAP NetWeaver 2004s mySAP NetWeaver 2004s is the mySAP Business Suite edition of mySAP NetWeaver 2004 It is a minor release that delivers on specific needs of the mySAP and xApps solutions delivered by SAP in 2005 The s stands for mySAP Business Suite Edition We recommend an implementation of mySAP NetWeaver 2004s only to customers requiring it in the context of an application implementation project for example SAP ERP 2005 In An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models addition some customers require mySAP NetWeaver 2004s due to specific enhancements for example in the following areas gt Business intelligence enhanced query analysis and reporting integrated business planning high performance analysis gt Enterprise portal global federated portal gt Development Web Dynpro for ABAP Switch Framework supporting multiple industry solutions For more information about the mySAP NetWeaver 2004s release refer to http service sap com netweaver Difference between mySAP NetWeaver 2004 and mySAP NetWeaver 2004s If mySAP Business Suite or mySAP application customers are planning the deployment of mySAP ERP 2005 or any other 2005 solution that is part of the mySAP Business Suite you deploy mySAP NetWeaver 2004s because it is the pl
48. SAP s Support Package Stack strategy The latter states that you should keep all components which are installed in one system on a defined stack level Therefore it is useful to know the technical components of SAP NetWeaver for which support packages or patches that continue to be produced In Figure 2 9 you see all possible SAP NetWeaver 04 software components again divided in the areas of gt ABAP stack gt Java stack gt Additional components 22 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models SAP NetWeaver 04 Software Components BI Content Add on Enterprise Portal BW Java Components BW ANALYZER PRECALC BI CONT 3 5 2 CM BW UDI 350 COLLABORATION 6 0_640 XI Components PORTAL PLATFORM TREX 6 1 6 0_640 XI CONTENT i BAP_BASIS 6 40 SAP Content KW IKS XI TOOLS 3 0 Server 6 30 SAP_IKS_100 XI ADAPTER SAP MI Client 2 5 FRAMEWORK 3 0 Adobe Doc Services XI ADAPTER FRAMEWORK ADOBE DOC CORE 3 0 XI Adapter Engine J2SE SAP WAO AS AEA SERVICES 00 XI CONNECTIVITY SE 3 0 XI CONNECTIVITY SAP BW 3 50 SE 3 0 PI_BASIS JDI 6 40 NW Developer 2004_1_640 Studio SAP AGA GAG JDI BUILD TOOL XI Adapter Engine 6 40 NW DEVELOPER STUDIO 2 0 XI ADAPTER SAP BASIS 6 40 JDI OFFLINE 6 40 FRAMEWORK 3 0 SAP IGS 6 40 XI ADAPTER SAP Web AS Java FRAMEWORK SAP KERNEL 6 40 CORE 3 0 SAP J2EE Engine 6 40 SAP J2EE Engine SAP IGS 6 40 6 40 Additional ABAP Stack Java Stack Components SERVICE 350
49. SAP Applications on System i Models 4 6 Installation of SAP Mobile Infrastructure SAP Mobile Infrastructure SAP MI is a technical scenario on which SAP applications for mobile business are based However with SAP MI you can also make non SAP based applications mobile The SAP MI Client Component is installed locally on mobile devices and is equipped with a Web server a database layer and its own business logic Therefore staff working remotely can work offline and does not have to wait for a network connection to complete time critical business applications SAP MI offers tools for synchronization and data replication that make the data of the mobile device consistent with that of the back end system SAP MI also supports the Abstract Window Toolkit AWT platform AWT is part of the Java Foundation Classes JFC and provides Java developers with a framework and routines for graphic user interfaces Figure 4 10 shows the technical system landscape of SAP MI Back End SAP System Mobile Application 1 Mobile Application 2 Non SAP System Mobile Application 1 Key Supported Basic System Variants gt SAP Web AS ABAP Jaa Non SAP Component Mandatory Component Optional Component BW Functionality XI Functionality MI Functionality KW Functionality Web ASABAP Additional Components Figure 4 10 SAP Mobile Infrastructure technical system landscape The following
50. SAP Business Connector at http service sap com notes 7 Install SAP ITS 6 20 Normally in a production landscape you can operate this ITS ona separate server For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic Downloads at http service sap com sap its 8 Install SAP Content Server 6 30 Note that an SAP DB is required for this component For more information see SAP Service Marketplace under the topics SAP Components gt SAP Content Server Release 6 30 at http service sap com instguides 9 Install SAP GUI 6 20 or 6 40 You can install this component at any time since it is installed on the clients Note that SAP GUI is mainly required for administrators and power users Moreover certain mySAP ERP processes which are not yet entirely portal based still require SAP GUI The installation of front ends for the SAP system is described separately in the SAP Front End installation guide Refer to this guide under the topics Installation and Upgrade Guides SAP Components SAP Front End Components at http service sap com instguides 5 2 5 mySAP ERP post installation activities The following are the ERP post installation activities 1 Grant authorizations for operating system collector programs If your primary language is not English you must enable SAP Support to activate the newly installed secondary language For more information see Installing the English secondary language libra
51. SAP Internet Graphic Server IGS SAP Internet Pricing and Configurator IPC SAP Content Server SAP Communication Station In most cases these middleware components run on special Windows or Linux machines We do not to focus on these components in this section Some front end components such as SAP Graphical User Interface GUI Web Browser like Internet Explorer IE or Netscape Web Dynpro Mobile User Interface Ul You also require a database for the specific mySAP Business Suite solution itself such as mySAP ERP mySAP CRM mySAP PLM mySAP SCM mySAP SRM Keep in mind that in an SAP landscape for a special SAP scenario normally you implement the following vvvy A customizing environment A quality and assurance or test environment A production environment Sandboxes training environments and more The installation concepts and the System i specific aspects for an installation of a mySAP Business Suite solution are already described in the previous sections The procedure to install a mySAP Business Suite solution is also described in detail in the SAP installation guides and the corresponding SAP notes You can find these documents in the SAP Marketplace gt For the installation guides http service sap com instguides For the SAP notes http service sap com notes Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 109 5 2 Installation of mySAP Enterp
52. SAP SolMan is a tool with various functions and one of its main functions is the configuration of SAP applications and business scenarios It contains IMG activities transactions and so on as well as documentation Instead of the configuration documentation in SAP SolMan there can be separate business scenario configuration guides in the SAP Service Marketplace for previous shipments of the business scenarios This guide is located in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com ibc Production operation The Solution Management Guide is the starting point for operating an SAP application The guide refers users to the tools and documentation that are necessary to perform various tasks such as monitoring backup or restore master data maintenance transports and tests It also refers users to other documents for example the SAP Library the master guide and the component management guides 12 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models This guide is located in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com instguides Upgrade The following guides for upgrades are available gt Upgrade Master Guide The Upgrade Master Guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios of an SAP application It provides scenario specific descriptions of the preparation execution and follow up of an upgrade It also refers to other documents such as the component upgrade guides and SAP notes Ins
53. SAP installation log files with and without text conversion Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 65 SAP Installation Viewing Log Files I usr sap SAPinst NW04SR1 WEBAS_ABAP_DB4_UC DB log 6660d06aaUGOOAAAAGZGAaAUAGOLG06C2G00665 6 166066 PA Bits mid E z aa adddmUAG 9 Ax 160 a0 J fare EAPC NN OASRIWEEAE ABAP DB4 UCIDBIIog R3640UN4U R3LOADDB4 START OF LOG 20050707105238 R3640UN4U R3LOADDB4 sccsid Id bas 640_R R3640UN4U R3LOADDB4 version R6 40 V1 4 UNICODE A IR R3640UN4U R3LOADDB4 ctf I tmp N4U Export NwO4sr usr sap SAPinst NWO4SR1 WEBAS_ABAP_DB4_UC DB SAP R3640UN4U R3LOADDB4 job completed R3640UN4U R3LOADDB4 END OF LOG 20050707105242 conversion rootbin Share with text conversion Figure 3 29 SAP Web AS installation viewing the installation log files 3 2 8 Post installation steps for ABAP At the end of the installation you can execute the described post installation steps such as granting authority to the operating system command CHGSYSLIBL and executing several ABAP reports in case of a Unicode installation 3 2 9 Client copy to production client Before you continue with the Java installation you should perform a client copy transactions SCC4 SCCL with profile SAP_UCSV to set up your production client By doing this the Java user management is set up correctly for your production ABAP system
54. SCM scenario SAP System matrix M mandatory O optional SAP system Business scenario Fae oe ae SAP R 3 4 6C or higher M M M gt Refer also to the release constraints as described in SAP note 708736 SAP R 3 4 6C or higher gt Refer also to the release constraints as described in SAP note 708736 Plug in 2004_1_466 or higher Ea a ee eee SAP BW 3 5 server ee a F and R Forecasting and Replenishment b PM Project Manufacturing c RR Responsive Replenishment d RP Release Processing e SMI Supplier Managed Inventory M see SAP note 669718 M see SAP note 157755 5 4 3 System infrastructure To plan the system infrastructure you have to determine the requirements that your system must fulfill The following list can help you to identify the requirements that influence the design of the technical infrastructure most Purpose of the system Number of users Scalability Availability Security Manageability High availability vvvvvvy 5 4 4 Technical infrastructure of mySAP SCM exemplary Figure 5 9 on page 161 shows an exemplary technical infrastructure of SAP SCM server and its sub related components liveCache SAP APO Optimizer and the communication between them Depending on the involved scenario liveCache or SAP APO Optimizer are not necessary or optional 160 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models SAP SCM Server 4 1 Central Instance Optimizatio
55. This includes the installation of the JRE a Check the JRE versions that are released for SAP systems on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Product Availability Matrix SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 04 JSE Platforms at http service sap com platforms b Ensure that a valid JRE version is installed on every host on which you want to install an SAP instance with the J2EE Engine as follows e If JRE is not already installed Since JRE is not part of the SAP shipment you need to download and install it JRE is part of JDK For the recommended JDK versions for your platform and how to obtain them see SAP note 709140 e The JRE is already installed Check the installed version of the JRE by entering java version 22 Prepare the installation DVDs We recommend that you make all the required DVDs available in parallel The Export DVDs must be available in parallel a Identify the required DVDs for your installation as detailed in the following list and keep them separate from the remaining DVDs This helps you to avoid mixing up DVDs during the installation e For the installation of a Unicode SAP system the Unicode SAP kernel DVD is required e For the installation of a non Unicode SAP system the non Unicode SAP kernel DVD is required b Use one of the following methods to make DVDs available in parallel Before the installation e Have sufficient DVD drives e Copy DVDs manually to local hard disks
56. activate the SLD server after installation Asan SLD client that is you connect SAP Web AS to an existing SLD An SLD client can be either an ABAP Java or ABAP Java system For more information about the installation and configuration of SLD see the documentation Post Installation Guide SAP System Landscape Directory on SAP Web AS 6 40 on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Installation SAP Web AS at http service sap com instguidesnw04 The following planning activities are optional and only apply if you want to perform one of the following gt Installation of multiple SAP systems on a single System i server gt Use the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP for SAP Logon for the Microsoft Management Console MMC LDAP can also be used for other purposes for example the LDAP Connector If you do not want to use LDAP for SAP Logon or MMC no LDAP specific installation steps are required now 5 2 3 mySAP ERP installation preparation activities Follow these steps to prepare for installing mySAP ERP 1 Check the general information hardware and software requirements For example Check the HW sizing Check the i5 OS and SAP release level including patches For supported operating system releases see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic Product Availability Matrix PAM at http service sap com platforms Validate network requirements Check the hardware
57. also a mandatory installation component of your SAP system The central services instance forms the basis of communication and synchronization for the Java cluster A central services instance consists of the message service and the enqueue service An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models The message service keeps a list of the Java dispatchers and Java server processes of the Java cluster It provides the infrastructure for data exchange small data sets only between the participating nodes The message service also supplies information to the SAP Web Dispatcher about load balancing between multiple Java instances The enqueue service manages logical database locks which are set by the executed application program in a Java server process The enqueue service also synchronizes data across the Java cluster For more information see the following documentation in the SAP Library Application Platforms SAP Web Application Server Java Technology in SAP Web Application Server gt Architecture Manual Java Cluster Architecture gt Central Services gt Database instance The database instance is a mandatory installation component for the installation of an SAP system The J2EE Engine uses its own database schema For the installation of a Java Add In both the ABAP and the Java database schema are installed in the same database gt Dialog instances if required Dialog instances are installed o
58. and process or delete these records after discussing with the owners of these update records There should not be open or canceled update records Else they are removed Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 225 3 Save the database of the SOURCE SID Library R3SOURCE SIDDATA and if you also copy a Java Database SAPSOURCE SIDDB Schedule a normal daily or weekly backup Check the number of saved objects from the output of the DSPLOG or DSPLOGBRM command or the Joblog of the backup procedure you use Look for the following entries Number of saved objects Objects not saved If there are objects that could not be saved repeat the backup if you are not sure the content of these tables can be omitted in the copy Prepare the target SID system Follow these steps to prepare the old TARGET SID System 1 2 3 Save all relevant information you need to rebuild after the copy Note the client list and their settings in table TOOO using Transaction SCC4 If there are open transport requests in the TARGET SID check if you need to release them or they can be discarded Transaction SE01 Create a list of the open transport requests including owner information and discuss with the owners of the transport requests This mainly applies to copies from a production to a development system There should be no open Transport Requests RFC Connections including details as TRFC Options Gateway Options login data Trans
59. basic operations You need to perform some basic operations that are described in the SAP Library a Open the SAP library b Choose the relevant section to perform the operations described in Table 5 5 Table 5 5 Basic operations after a standard installation Navigation to the section in the SAP help library Set up operation modes Solution Life Cycle Management System Management gt transaction RZ04 Configuration Operation Modes Set up logon groups Solution Life Cycle Management System Management gt transaction SMLG Configuration gt Dynamic Logon Load Distribution gt The SAP Logon Set up administrators Solution Life Cycle Management System Management gt Background Processing Authorizations for Background Processing Schedule background Solution Life Cycle Management System Management gt jobs Background Processing Install a printer Solution Life Cycle Management System Management SAP Printing Guide Configure the system log Solution Live Cycle Management System Management gt Tools for Monitoring the System System log Configuring the System Log 14 Check the configured number of work processes SAPinst installs SAP systems with a minimum number of work processes This is only an initial configuration to get you started after the installation It is not detailed enough for a production system because the optimal number of each type of work process depends on
60. can find all documentation within the topic labeled instguides In SAP NetWeaver gt Release 04 you can find the general Installation amp Implementation Documentation Center Starting from here you find all available SAP documentation concerning gt Overview documentation gt Guides for Planning for installation and operation Installations Upgrades Operations Maintenance SAP notes for NetWeaver 04 gt Supplementary information such as Security Guide High availability documentation Sizing guidelines and recommendations The Platform Available Matrix for technical and release planning on SAP NetWeaver Best practice information How to guides for specific tasks gt Guide finder We focus the nstallation guides which you can access directly at http service sap com nw04installation At this site select the SAP Web AS SAP Web AS 6 40 SR1 and Related Documentation General SAP Web Application Server Documentation At the entry window for SAP Web AS 6 40 SR1 Installation and Related Documentation you find documentation for SAP Web Application Server Adobe Document Services SAP Front End Installation SAP Internet Graphics Service Homogeneous and Heterogeneous System Copy System Landscape Directory Java Troubleshooting Guide XML Based Data Archiving High Availability with MSCS for SAP Web AS 6 40 SR1 Java vvvvvvvvy On this window you also find
61. can find more details about the time zone settings on System i configurations in SAP note 391658 iSeries Daylight saving time standard time change 8 Check the distribution of libraries on ASPs As in SAP Web AS 6 30 there can be two libraries required to store data For ABAP components database objects for example tables indexes and views are stored in library R3S DDATA as in previous releases For Java components the equivalent database objects are stored in library SAPS DDB Before you run SAPinst to install your SAP system you must decide how you want to distribute the SAP system data that is the corresponding libraries where the data resides and their associated journal receiver libraries on ASPs Depending on the installation type the following libraries are found on the system after the installation For ABAP systems SAPinst asks for the ASP in which it should install the new libraries for ABAP e R8SIDDATA This is the data library for ABAP It already exists on the system e R8S IDJRN This is the journal receiver library that is associated with R3S DDATA It already exists on the system For ABAP J2EE systems Add In e R8SIDDATA This is the data library for ABAP It already exists on the system Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 119 120 e RS8S DJRN This is the journal receiver library that is associated with R3S DDATA It already exists on the system e SAPS DDB This is the da
62. can help you understand the total cost of ownership and value of System i implementations gt An IDC report outlining the cost savings and enablement benefits AIX 5L Linux and Windows Integration in System i implementations http www ibm com servers eserver iseries idcroi gt Aconsultant report which explains the value delivered by technology when balancing management and acquisition costs ftp ftp software ibm com common ssi rep_wh n 1ISLO2177USEN ISLO2177USEN PDF http www grupointercompany com br itg_sap pdf Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 71 72 Components of mySAP NetWeaver mySAP NetWeaver consists of the following technical scenarios gt SAP Business Information Warehouse SAP BW SAP Business Information Warehouse is a robust and scalable data warehouse The reporting and analysis tools within SAP Business Information Warehouse offer a quick and easy way to gain access to the information you need Business Intelligence Information Broadcasting BI Information Broadcasting Information broadcasting with SAP Business Information Warehouse SAP BW enables users to broadcast and schedule reports as needed SAP Enterprise Portal serves as the single point of entry for the end user to access the complete business intelligence Bl information portfolio SAP Enterprise Portal SAP EP For mySAP NetWeaver 04 SAP Enterprise Portal 6 0 is changing its naming convention SAP En
63. central instance you are currently installing for example 46 Do not use instance numbers 98 and 99 These instance numbers are reserved for internal purposes Make sure that you specify an instance number SAPSYSNR that does not already exist on this host e The name of the central instance host for example as0070 e The name of the database host for example as0071 e The name of the SAP kernel library for example R346COPT e The i5 OS release on which the kernel was compiled for example V5R3 This i5 OS release might not be the same as the i5 OS release of your System i model 3 Insert the SAP kernel CD 4 You are prompted twice to enter or confirm the path to the SAP kernel CD Example QOPT CD_label_name R3SETUP now runs through the remaining installation steps without requiring further user entries as Table 6 2 shows Table 6 2 Installation steps Requesting installation details GATEWAYINSTANCE_IND_DB4ASCII Requesting information on CDs CDSERVERKERNEL_IND_DB4ASCII Loading the SAP kernel LODR3KRN_IND_DB4ASCII 220 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Creating the SAP System objects CRTR38SYS_IND_DB4ASCII Creating the instance objects CRTR8INST_IND_DB4ASCIl Creating locale objects DB4CREATESORTTABLE_IND_DB4ASCII Starting the SAP System R38START_GATEWAY_IND_DB4ASCII The following error text displays because a central instance is typically required for the configuration of every ins
64. contains predefined evaluations and reports gt SAP R 3 4 6C SP47 4 70 SP20 or mySAP ERP ECC 5 00 SP00 The ERP system contains additional PLM functions financial data in case financial integration is used and other ERP functions You can use SAP R 3 to create object links to SAP R 3 business objects such as documents material masters or purchase order items gt R 3 Plug In Install an R 3 Plug In on the R 3 system It is a mandatory component when using an R 3 system 168 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models gt SAP Content Server You can use the SAP Content Server for storing documents If no SAP Content Server is available documents are stored in WAS 6 40 gt ITS You can use an Internet Transaction Server ITS to call SAP transactions directly using the HTML GUI gt TREX You can use TREX for full text search functions Note Search functions for Knowledge Provider documents are currently not supported in Unicode environments gt WFM Core You can install WFM Core on the cProjects system or on a separate instance For more information about the WFM Core installation see SAP notes 718626 and 565437 gt Business Package for Projects You can use cProjects within the Business Package for Projects Installation sequence Host A 1 Install SAP Web Application Server Installing the required languages 2 Install Plug In PI BASIS 3 Install SAP cProject Suite 3 10 Ad
65. describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions for raising the security levels A collective security guide is available for the SAP NetWeaver technologies such as the SAP Web Application Server This document contains general guidelines and suggestions about the system security Other technologies and individual applications have a security guide of their own This guide is located in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com securityguide Implementation The following is a list of the implementation guides gt Master Guide The Master Guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP application It lists the required SAP components and the third party applications that are required for each business scenario It provides scenario specific descriptions of the preparation execution and follow up of an implementation It also offers references to other documents such as component installation guides and SAP notes This guide is located in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com instguides gt Component Installation Guide The Component Installation Guide describes the technical implementation of an SAP component taking into account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business related configuration This guide is located in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com instguides gt Configuration documentation in SAP SolMan
66. guidelines to setup the correct TCP IP configuration gt Follow the instructions in the SAP Network Configuration Guide to configure TCP IP and for a homogeneous System i 3 tier landscape gt Select CIDBS as the database server name for the SAP system name when you install the Central Instance APP1S when you install the first application server and APP2S for the second application server gt The implementation of TCP IP in an SAP environment in the i5 OS operating system first uses the DEFAULT routing entry and then looks for static routes This differs from standard TCP IP implementations gt The definition of a static route results only in a situation where no traffic is on the server segment Therefore direct routes must be defined in addition to the DEFAULT route for the access network gt Create the following additional routing entries on CIDBS ADDTCPRTE RTEDEST 192 3 2 3 SUBNETMASK HOST NEXTHOP DIRECT BINDIFC 192 3 2 1 DUPRTEPTY 6 ADDTCPRTE RTEDEST 192 3 2 4 SUBNETMASK HOST NEXTHOP DIRECT BINDIFC 192 3 2 1 DUPRTEPTY 6 gt Create the following routing entries on APP1S ADDTCPRTE RTEDEST 192 3 2 1 SUBNETMASK HOST NEXTHOP DIRECT BINDIFC 192 3 2 3 DUPRTEPTY 6 ADDTCPRTE RTEDEST 192 3 2 4 SUBNETMASK HOST NEXTHOP DIRECT BINDIFC 192 3 2 3 DUPRTEPTY 6 gt Create the following routing entries on APP2S ADDTCPRTE RTEDEST 192 3 2 1 SUBNETMASK HOST NEXTHOP DIRECT BIND
67. instance Gateway instance Front ends Before you install your SAP system you need to know how to manage your user data This is especially important if you have an existing system landscape and you have to decide which system is your primary user management system For more information see the documentation Integration of User Management in your System Landscape in SAP Library Security gt SAP NetWeaver Security Guide User Administration and Authentication Ensure that the SAP Solution Manager is available in your SAP system landscape By using SAP Solution Manager throughout the life cycle of your mySAP ERP solution you can achieve faster implementation and more efficient operation of your system The SAP Solution Manager provides you with all the implementation and upgrade content for commonly used standard processes In addition projects become more transparent because you have the up to date central project documentation all in one place at any time To make sure that this application management platform is available you require an SAP Solution Manager system minimum requirement 3 1 SP20 to perform any upgrade or installation of mySAP ERP 2004 During the installation process an SAP Solution Manager system is required to generate the SAP Solution Manager key for the installation of SAP ECC Without this key the installation process cannot continue You can generate the required key with SAP Solution Mana
68. iv Continue the installation using the SAPinst GUI 8 Start SAPinst GUI on another host You use this procedure to run SAPinst GUI on the sapinst_GUI_host The sapinst_GUI_host is the host from which you want to control the installation with the SAPinst GUI Start the installation on the sapinst_exe_host During installation select the Logoff button in the SAPinst GUI You prepare the sapinst_GUI_host for the SAP system installation You prepare a Windows user account on the sapinst_GUI_host as described in the section Preparing a Windows User Account and iSeries User Profile of the SAP Solution Manager installation guide Part Planning and Preparation The procedure is as follows a Log on to the sapinst_GUI_host as a user who is a member of the local administration group Insert the SAP Installation Master DVD into your drive To start the SAPinst GUI double click startinstgui bat in the path Drive IMx_0S400_64 SAPINST 0S400 AS400 To find the SAPinst executable in your platform specific IMx directory see the README TXT file in the SAP Installation Master DVD The SAPinst GUI now gets started and connects automatically to the host that is waiting for a connection The SAP Installation GUI Connection dialog opens Enter the host name of the Installation Host sapinst_exe_host and the same Port as SAPinst uses on this host Choose OK SAPinst GUI now connects to the SAPinst server and the first dialog o
69. mySap PLM gt mySap SCM gt mySap SRM SAP NetWeaver e Additional Solutions SAP Components SAP xApps Other Documentation Figure 3 2 Overview from the SAP installation guides A listing and discussion of all the installation tasks of all SAP applications beyond the scope of this book For detailed information and the latest information about the installation of a specific SAP application refer to the SAP specific information planning and installation guides 3 2 Installation steps for the SAP Web Application Server 6 40 Table 3 1 on page 42 shows at a high level the steps that you need to perform if you install SAP WebAS 6 40 SR1 For a complete description of all the steps that you need to perform refer to the installation documentation System i specific steps are indicated by a in the description column Note The descriptions in Table 3 1 maintain the use of the term iSeries to be consistent with the installation document referenced iSeries servers as well as IBM server i5 and AS 400e servers are represented by the term System i in this Redpaper Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 41 Table 3 1 Single steps for installing SAP Web Application Server 6 40 SR1 ne pern O O Rtronoo Rona Sats S eapo ee e System i user profile 2 Prarnaie widows Persant seme a oom oos cries araon semea e oraromesansro femes s reamoremenr
70. of your SAP system 5 Check using the SAPinst GUI The SAPinst GUI on System i models requires the installation of the Java Runtime Environment JRE The JRE is included in the Java Development Kit JDK Check interrupted installation with SAPinst Change the SAPinst GUI host Start SAPinst GUI on another host If you decide to use a generic LDAP directory perform the necessary preparatory steps as described in the installation guide 1a shown in SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 10 Create a user for LDAP directory access oOo ON OO Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 193 194 Post installation activities for installing a System i application server Perform the following steps after installing a System i application server Grant authorizations for operating system collector programs Start and stop the SAP system Log on to the SAP system Set up load balancing Check that the SAP system services are present Install the SAP Online documentation Install the SAP license ON DOA KF WN Remove the SAPinst installation files 9 Access a remote database 10 Configure SAProuter for Remote Connection to SAP Support 11 Run unicode specific reports 12 Configure the transport management system TMS 13 Perform basic operations 14 Check the configured number of work processes 15 Install additional languages 16 Activate the integrated Internet Tra
71. ofthe required software packages Ifyou do not want to check the location now deselect the Check Location flag and SAPinst will ask you again later Ifyou want to copy the required DVD CD to your local disk enter the target location in the Copy Package To column Figure 3 22 SAPINST SAP kernel load and kernel check installation window Figure 3 23 on page 60 shows how the kernel is loaded This window gives you a good example about how SAPinst provides status information Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 59 60 Installation Progress Ei x Installation Progress SARS The installation is running iSeries Installation Steps Load SAP Kernel Library Check applied PTFs Create SAP System Create Locales iSeries Installation Steps post processing Create Service Ports post processing Adapt Instance Profiles post processing Create Database DB2 400 Post Load Actions Le he ON tm an a Figure 3 23 Installation progress of the SAPINST procedure Performing the PTF level check In order to ensure that your system is up to date with PTFs the installation compares the PTFs that are installed on your system with the PTFs that are listed in the IBM Informational APAR for your operating system release for example 1113337 for OS 400 V5R2 or 1113868 for i5 OS V5R3 In Figure 3 24 on page 61 you see the PTF Level Check window An Overview of Installi
72. on relationship with all suppliers across all categories of spend at all times It covers the full supply cycle from strategic sourcing to operational procurement and supplier enablement leveraging consolidated content and master data With mySAP SRM you can collaborate with all suppliers for all purchased goods and services so you can constantly optimize supplier selection compress cycle times and devise sourcing and procurement strategies To facilitate the implementation process all information within this document is ordered by scenario You can choose from several generic business scenarios and find all the information that is relevant for the technical implementation of a specific business scenario in this section Each business scenario supports a number of variants In this master guide only key variants are described in detail The complete mySAP SRM solution consists of the following top level scenarios and business scenarios gt Self Service Procurement Self Service Procurement Indirect Procurement enables your employees to create and manage their own requirement requests This relieves your purchasing department of a huge administrative burden while making the procurement process both faster and more responsive gt Plan Driven Procurement Plan Driven Procurement Direct Procurement automates and streamlines ordering processes for regularly needed core materials Since mySAP SRM is integrated with planning design an
73. procedure are 6 GB to 8 GB per processor better 8 GB An additional 4 GB for the central instance About 4 GB for every additional application server This means that you should not have less than 8 GB main memory It runs with less memory but more slowly 2 2 5 Disk size requirements This section provides details about the disk size requirements Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 19 Multiple disk size requirements When you start the installation you require disk size for the following gt Enough space for the database of the SAP system gt Additional space when the SAP system is started gt Temporary additional disk space during the installation gt 4 3 GB of temporary disk space for every required installation DVD you have to copy to a hard disk You have to reserve disk space for approximately five to ten DVDs Detailed space requirements The amount of space required for an SAP system on System i servers is dependent on many variables such as the following gt Size of the database mainly influenced by the number of SAP clients and the application data in these clients gt Number of work processes gt Number of users Table 2 3 gives a practical overview of the SAP disk space requirements Table 2 3 SAP disk space requirements SAP kernel library 4 GB to 5 GB Release 6 40 SAP database library 50 GB for an ERP system after installation For other systems between 30 GB and 40 GB
74. ready before starting the installation Important SAP notes can have different versions with ascending two digit version numbers If the content of an SAP note changes then the SAP note number remains the same but the version number is increased by one Therefore ensure that you always have the most recent version of an SAP note See Figure 2 1 6 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models amp https Awebsmp101 sap ae de SAP Note Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras ar E Pe G zrck x BD suchen P Favoiten 42 Norton Antivitus v A Q Back SAP Note Number 789188 INST SAP Web AS 6 40 SR1 on IBM eServer iSeries Note Language EN Released of jFer g i E Ee E 3 E Internet Figure 2 1 Version and last updated date of an SAP note gt i5 OS operating system and other system programs Ensure that your base System i installation with the required i5 OS version and additional licence programs and all other hardware fulfill the following requirements The required i5 OS version and the required licence programs are complete and correctly installed All necessary CUM PTFs hyper and fix packs and other patches are installed The software prerequisite information is available in the following SAP preparation guides For the required IBM operating system release and relevant PTFs see SAP on iSeries SAP note 83292 For example Version 27 No
75. see SAP note 673144 Configure ABAP based clients To establish the connection between an ABAP client and the SLD server register a J2EE Engine as an RFC server define an RFC destination in the ABAP stack transaction SM59 and maintain the SLD connection parameters transaction SLDAPICUST For more details see the Post Installation Guide for SLD 640 section 5 1 2 4 4 Related documentation in SAP Service Marketplace Here are related documents that you can find in the SAP Service Marketplace gt gt gt Planning Guide System Landscape Directory http service sap com instguides System Landscape Directory http service sap com sld Platform and Technology Information Center http service sap com plat forms R 3 Security Guide http service sap com security Guidelines and Audits Sizing http service sap com sizing Find information about the installation and configuration of SLD Post Installation Guide SAP System Landscape Directory on SAP Web AS 6 40 on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Installation gt SAP Web AS IBM DB2 Universal Database for iSeries Installation and Post Installation gt SAP Web AS ABAP iSeries at http service sap com instguidesnw04 Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 35 2 5 The Client Server concept for an SAP installation on System i servers 36 For systems with basis 6 10 or higher the installation procedure is based on the SAPINST pro
76. semos e rearme ree as O fee 7 iste aea conaran feere O a Foroaren orase O feoeo o omoro panan O Sse io eo Towooeomane feere i rear enponapne sotare ara porees Srepases 12 erea user GARISE AEE ADM ara soor Soeweer E a e Feror serorea seeme Here we show you 14 steps for the installation of a Web Application Server 6 40 SR1 This is somewhat different from the ten general steps of an SAP Installation shown in 2 6 General steps of an SAP installation on page 37 We make this distinction because here we want to focus more on the activities than the general aspects of an installation The following sections explain the steps listed in Table 3 1 3 2 1 Preparing a Windows user account and a System i user profile The SAP installations are done by the SAP tool SAPINST So we call this point Preparing a Windows user account and a System i user profile also Create SAPINST user on PC and System For the installation you have to create a user account on your Windows installation host and a user profile on the System i server you want to install The following requirements apply gt The System i user profile and the Windows user account must have the same name and password gt The System i user profile must have user class SECOFR and all the special authorities that belong to user profile QSECOFR gt The Windows user account must have administrator rights on the Windows installa
77. so called V3 update records with report RSM13005 See also SAP note 140357 230 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 28 Perform the collection run s for the update records See SAP note 176679 RSM13005 29 Cleanup of IDocs SM58 and BatchInput sessions SM35 30 Re establish Central User Management CUM if it was activated in the old TARGET SID 31 Re Activate BW Source System Connections Note that the recommended procedures are changing sometimes Search for SAP notes for Copies in the BW Landscapes 32 Check and correct ALE Partner port in transaction WE21 33 Check for archiving OY25 logical system name OAC3 Archive ID ID Type T for non production P D U for production systems 34 Check generate or update SSL certificates Transactions STRUST PSEMAINT 35 Perform a backup of the copied system 36 Release the suspended batchjobs using report BTCTRNS2 37 Reactivate the Central User Administration CUA if it was active before the copy or include the copied system in the Central User Administration Landscape See also the SAP note 550718 SAP note 565697 and SAP note 801877 6 3 2 Heterogeneous system copy Heterogeneous System Copies for SAP systems based on WEB Application Server are SAP standard procedures and do not need a special Migration Kit The guideline Homogeneous and Heterogeneous System Copy for SAP Systems based on SAP Web AS describes the procedure and the prereq
78. steps refer to the installation guide 2b and the 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 Check the SAP system services Install the SAP Online documentation Configure SAProuter for remote connection to SAP support Perform basic operations Check the configured number of work processes Activate the Integrated Internet Transaction Server ITS optional Apply Support Packages Change the passwords of the SAP predefined standard users sa 7oaQ0o0D Change the passwords of these users according to the SAP Security Guide For more information see also SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com securityguide 3 Perform a backup of the dialog instance Perform an offline backup of your dialog instance at the end of the installation Stop the dialog instance and the SAP related services SAPSID_instance and SAPOSCOL Log on as user sidadm and shut down the SAP system a To save the registry i Select Start gt Programs Accessories System Tools gt Backup ii Select Emergency Repair Disk The Emergency Repair Diskette dialog box appears iii Select Backup the Registry to the Repair directory When you confirm your entry the registry is written to diskette b Save the System State Data i Select Start gt Programs Accessories System Tools gt Backup ii Select Backup Wizard Next iii Select Only backup the System State Data and choose Next
79. stopping the SAP system Logging on to the SAP system Installing the SAP online documentation Installing the SAP license Starting the SAP Presentation GUI Checking the SAP system services Adjusting the menu and IMG structure Changing passwords of created users SAP system users System i users Removing the spiniest installation files Accessing a remote database Configuring SAProuter and SAPNet R 3 Front End Configuring the Transport Management System Performing basic operations Configuring the number of work processes Installing additional languages Activating the Integrated Internet Transaction Server Scheduling asynchronous indexing and de indexing Checking for problems in IMS monitoring Performing the client copy Performing a full backup vvvvvvvvvvvvrvyvrvyvrvyvrvvvvvvy vy Note For all these mySAP CRM concepts planning preparation installation and post installation activities see the corresponding considerations and procedures as described in 5 2 2 mySAP ERP installation planning activities on page 115 and the following 156 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 5 4 Installation of the mySAP Supply Chain Management The mySAP Supply Chain Management mySAP SCM solution is based on SAP Supply Chain Management server SAP SCM server It contains all activities for installation and configuration of mySAP SCM mySAP SCM consists of the following business scenarios Forecasti
80. system Installation of SAP KW Internet Knowledge Servlet 3 Installation of SAP Content Server 4 Installation of SAP Gateway 6 40 7 8 If you do not use Search and Classification TREX and have installed SAP Content Server on the SAP Web AS host you do not have to install SAP Gateway Installation of Search and Classification TREX Use the following installation parameters for the Search and Classification TREX installation for more information see the documentation Installation Guide Search and Classification TREX Perform the installation steps to set up an RFC connection Automatic language recognition is not required You can adopt the default settings for document languages during the installation of Search and Classification TREX No Python extensions are required After the installation of Search and Classification TREX you have to create a search server relation as described in the Installation Guide Search and Classification TREX Optional only for mySAP NetWeaver Support Package Stack 12 or lower Installation of SAP Internet Transaction Server ITS 6 20 SAP ITS is no longer required for SAP KW as of mySAP NetWeaver Support Package Stack 13 For mySAP NetWeaver Support Package Stack 12 or lower we recommend that you install SAP ITS to display properties from a Web browser Installation of SAP GUI with SAP KW Add On Installation of SAP GUI If yo
81. system or on separate hosts distributed system Mandatory instances of an ABAP system are the central instance and the database instance Optionally you can install one or more dialog instances and gateway instances but nobody does it But you can and should consider a two system landscape for the SAP SolMan Customizing system Development system Test system Production system 2 Check SAP system components As mentioned previously for the SAP SolMan ABAP installation you have the following A central instance A database instance One or more dialog instances optional if required 100 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models One or more gateway instances optional if required Front ends 3 Before you install your SAP system you have to know how to manage your user data This is especially important if you have an existing system landscape and you have to decide which system is your primary user management system It makes sense to implement the Central User Administration CUA on the SAP SolMan where you have one central system to manage all your SAP user in your SAP system landscape For more information see the documentation Integration of User Management in your System Landscape in the SAP Library gt Security SAP NetWeaver Security Guide gt User Administration and Authentication 4 Identify the basic SAP system parameters This is the same procedure as de
82. system and performance check after the installation For production systems we recommend that you activate the Early Watch Alert using this OSS service connection that automatically generates a system report 8 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Ensure that you have a fully functional and stable connection to the SAP Marketplace at http service sap com You have to download patches and additional software For performance reasons you require a good bandwidth and we recommend a bandwidth of at least 1 Mbps capacity for download You need the SAP OSS connection for online connection to SAP For example the SAP Notes Assistant transaction SNOTE and the SAP EarlyWatchAlert EWA Service is based on this connection Additionally you need this connection for remote support from SAP For the OSS connection you do not need this broad bandwidth An ISDN connection 64 Kb s with channel bundling might be sufficient However setting up a virtual private network VPN or SNC connection to the OSS Server is more cost effective The SAProuter connections via SNC topic in Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 provides details about how to set up a SNC connection gt SAP support packages Download all the necessary patches and support packages that are not already included in the installation Service Release or the Support Package Collection DVD that comes with the installation pa
83. technical system landscape Figure 4 7 shows the technical system landscape of SAP Enterprise Portal EP ABAP Stack Java Stack Components Key Front End x Supported Basic System Variants SAP Web AS Java SAP Web AS ABAP Java Non SAP Component Mandatory Component 0008 O Optional Component Content Management and Collaboration Portal Platform Search and Classification TREX Web AS Java Additional i Java i Schema Figure 4 7 SAP Enterprise Portal EP technical system landscape 82 From a technical point of view Search and Classification TREX is an optional prerequisite when using collaboration rooms in SAP Enterprise Portal However SAP recommends installing TREX for the following reasons An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models gt If alarge number of collaboration rooms have been created more than 100 users can experience performance problems when displaying collaboration rooms in the Room Directory iView without TREX gt With TREX users can search for documents in collaboration rooms This is known as a Room Content Search which is part of the room templates delivered by SAP 4 4 3 SAP EP installation steps overview In order to obtain all of the SAP Enterprise Portal components on one or more hosts follow these installation steps 1 Install the SAP Web AS Java 6 40 system Portal Platform and optionally
84. the system resources and on the number of users working in each SAP system application 15 Install additional languages To install an additional language you have to perform the following steps a Classify the language b Schedule the language transport c Schedule the language supplementation You can also install additional languages later but if you install any support packages in the meantime you have to perform one of the following options Install the support packages again Use the report RSTLAN_IMPORT_OCS to extract the language relevant information from each support package For more information about how to transport an additional language see Language Transport which you can find in either of the following SAP Service Marketplace under the topic Operations at http service sap com instguidesNw04 SAP Library by choosing Solution Life Cycle Management Software Change Management Change and Transport System gt Language Transport 16 Activate the integrated Internet Transaction Server optional The integrated Internet Transaction Server ITS was installed automatically with the SAP kernel To be able to use the integrated ITS you have to configure and activate the Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 135 Internet Communication Manager ICM and make sure that the Web GUI service is activated in the Internet Communication Framework ICF For more information se
85. through a gateway or if the remote host resides in a different network or subnetwork to the local host you need to configure a route Enter option 2 in the Configure TCP IP menu to work with the TCP IP routes and add an entry containing your router s IP address c If the domain name is empty and your System i server is not in a domain enter your host name a second time in place of the domain name that is host_name host_name IBAS03 1IBAS03 Note It is important that you enclose your host name entry in single quotation marks If you do not the System i server reads the characters as uppercase characters If you have one or more remote name servers you need to define the IP address here Note that the Host name server priority must be set to LOCAL 11 You have test the TCP IP connection Before proceeding with the kernel installation that is the installation of the executable programs check that this TCP IP connection has been set up correctly To test the connection perform the following steps a Enter the ping command verify TCP IP connection specifying your own system as the Remote system b Do this twice once specifying only host_name and once host_name domain_name For example we assume that the host name is as0008 and the domain name wdf sap ag de In this case your entries are as follows ping IBAS03 ping IBASO3 basycs com 122 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models c
86. to SAP and receive replies from SAP Issue tracking provides follow up functionality for the Service Desk Configure the basic Service Desk scenario as a prerequisite for the Implementation and Distribution the Change Request Management and the Solution Monitoring scenarios Implementation and Distribution The Implementation and Distribution scenario supports the implementation of customer projects and the definition of template projects and upgrade projects This scenario includes an implementation roadmap an editor for creating and maintaining business blueprints access to the implementation guides IMG and tools for testing monitoring and distributing customizing Upgrading SAP Solutions To configure SAP Solution Manager for the Upgrading SAP Solutions scenario follow the steps to configure the Implementation and Distribution scenario Note The technical requirements apply only to the release of the SAP application that you are upgrading Change Request Management Change Request Management enables you to manage your SAP Solution Manager projects maintenance implementation template and upgrade projects from top to bottom Starting with change management and project planning through resource management and cost control to physical transports of changes from the development environment into the production environment Ongoing software and configuration changes as well as large implementations are ongoing challenges for m
87. topics mySAP ERP 2004 gt ERP Java Components at http service sap com erp inst Optional Install SAP GUI 6 20 or 6 40 This component can be installed at any time since it is installed on the clients Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 127 Note SAP GUI is mainly required for administrators and power users Moreover certain mySAP ERP processes which are not yet entirely portal based still require SAP GUI The installation of front ends for the SAP system is described separately in the SAP Front End installation guide Refer to this guide under the topics Installation and Upgrade Guides SAP Components gt SAP Front End Components at http service sap com instguides Installation sequence Portal Host 1 Install SAP Web AS Java 6 40 Install the J2EE in stand alone mode see the following Set heap size to 1024 MB and PermSize to 256 MB Refer to the topics Installation gt Installation Guide Web AS Java 6 40 lt Platform gt lt Database gt at http service sap com nw04installation 2 Install SAP Enterprise Portal EP 6 0 including CMC if required Because EP 6 0 currently does not support an add in installation and because it requires a large amount of memory and makes substantial demands on the host performance of the CPU install this as well on a separate server For installation information consult the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Installation gt SAP EP at http
88. you have the following information The interface of your System i server to which the Local Area Network is attached The IP addresses of your System i server subnet mask and router or gateway The local domain name Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 121 The System i host name Decide on your System i host name The host name cannot be longer than eight characters Note The TCP IP configuration on System i configurations is case sensitive Do not enter your host name first in uppercase and then in lowercase It is important that you enclose your host name entry in single quotation marks Otherwise System i servers read the characters as uppercase characters Remark An IP address is a unique address in a TCP IP network for a particular System i server A subnet mask is a mask used to divide a single network address into multiple logical networks a To call the TCP IP configuration menu enter the CFGTCP command Enter option 1 Work with TCP IP interfaces You need at least two entries e One for the loopback entry e One for the IP address of your System i server The loopback address always has the IP address 127 0 0 1 subnet mask 255 0 0 0 and line description LOOPBACK To add an entry enter option 1 ADD and choose ENTER Add entries for the first three fields and accept the default values for the other fields b If the route to the remote host in this case the PC workstation is
89. 00 as well as sending to printers and between multiple R 3 systems Use SAPconnect to create links to various types of communication components and communication systems gt Fax servers pagers SMTP gateways or X 400 gateways which support the SAPconnect interface gt The SAP Internet Gateway gt Microsoft Exchange servers and therefore Microsoft Exchange users Fax servers SMTP connectors or X 400 connectors installed on MS Exchange gt Other R 3 systems gt Printers Computer Telephony Integration SAPphone The goal of telephony integration in R 3 is to make the telephone an integral part of business scenarios In this case business process can refer to an individual R 3 application or an R 3 business workflow scenario based on the SAP Customer Interaction Center CIC ina call center environment In all of these scenarios Computer Telephony Integration CTI components such as a gateway to a call center system communicate with R 3 components through SAPphone an R 3 Basis Services component SAP Content Server If you want to administer a larger amount of documents in the product catalog for example in CRM eSelling we recommend that you use the SAP Content Server However you can also administer documentation without this server The SAP Content Server is accessed using HTTP If you want to integrate another Content Server into the scenario the new server must fulfill the requirements of the
90. 1402188625680b0002037e eb952 09430bbcb7486256d170047484a 0penDocument amp Highl ight 0 showler routes gt SAP installation guides from the SAP Service Marketplace http service sap com instguides gt SAP notes http service sap com notes gt SAP NetWeaver 2004 release http service sap com netweaver Copyright IBM Corp 2006 All rights reserved 237 gt SAP software catalog http service sap com swcat gt Managing S User http service sap com user admin gt SAP software distribution center http service sap com SWDC gt SAP terminology database http service sap com sapterm gt SAP help portal http help sap com gt SAP NetWeaver 2004 help portal http help sap com nw04 gt SAP integrated business http service sap com ibc gt SAP security guide http service sap com securityguide gt SAP Release notes http service sap com releasenotes gt SAP NetWeaver http service sap com nw04installation gt SAP network requirements http service sap com network gt SAP System Landscape Directory SLD http service sap com sld gt SAP Platform and Technology Information Center http service sap com platforms gt SAP R 3 Security Guide http service sap com security gt SAP Service Marketplace sizing http service sap com sizing gt Installation and configuration of SLD http service sap com instguidesnw04 gt Java Development Kit http java sun com gt SAP business objects
91. 2004 components You cannot install the constituent parts of ERP Central Component ECC 5 0 shown individually in Figure 5 1 above Nevertheless support packages for each subcomponent continue to be produced Therefore each subcomponent if necessary can be patched separately All subsequent figures in this document that display system landscapes solely display one component SAP ECC 5 0 which comprises all subcomponents shown in Figure 5 1 inside the ECC 5 0 box WFM Core requires a separate license Note Some industry solution add ons have been integrated into SAP ECC 5 0 For more information about this topic see SAP note 700778 Depending on the key capabilities or business processes you intend to deploy you can install the add ons shown within the frame Add ons based on NetWeaver ABAP explicitly Install all add ons using the SAINT tool The components included in the Java Web Applications frame are independent J2EE components combined in one single installation tool as ERP Java Components Therefore if you want to install one or more of these components the ERP Java Components installation is required which is performed by the SAPinst tool Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 111 112 To see what is inside the NetWeaver 04 Additional Components box refer to Figure 4 4 on page 76 Integrating other SAP Business Suite components with SAP ECC 5 0 You can integrate other mySAP Business Suit
92. 2_classes jar Figure 6 2 IFS structures for the Web Application Server ABAP and Java The SAP file system for a system on a single System i host The most simple setup of SAP directories occurs when only one System i host is involved in the SAP system landscape It is advisable to understand this concept first in order to understand more complex landscapes sapmnt is a physical directory It contains a subdirectory SID named like the system ID of the system usr sap is a physical directory It also contains a physical subdirectory SID which contains a directory named SYS In sapmnt SID gt there are special directories known as physical directories for example profile These directories are linked into usr sap SID SYS The directory usr sap trans is linked to sapmnt trans by default The SAP file system for a system distributed to multiple System i hosts If System i models are involved in any system configuration we can assume the central instance host is a System i host Other system configurations are currently not supported by SAP Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 189 If you set up a multi System i environment the special directories in sapmnt on the non central instance hosts are linked to the central instance host using QFileSvr 400 For example sapmnt SID profile on a non central instance host is a link to QFileSvr 400 central instance host sapmnt SID profile Be aware that you link to a physical d
93. ABAP iSeries SAP Web AS Java iSeries SAP Web AS ABAP on Linux Dialog instance only e SAP Web AS Java on Linux Dialog instance only SAP Web AS ABAP on Windows Dialog instance only SAP Web AS Java on Windows Dialog instance only Figure 6 1 Installation guides in the SAP Marketplace 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP In the following sections we reference the guides listed in Figure 6 1 Specifically the ABAP documentation consists of gt Part Planning and Preparation 1a SAP Web AS ABAP iSeries 2a SAP Web AS ABAP on Linux Dialog instance only 3a SAP Web AS ABAP on Windows Dialog instance only gt Part Il Installation and Post Installation 1b SAP Web AS ABAP iSeries 2b SAP Web AS ABAP on Linux Dialog instance only 3b SAP Web AS ABAP on Windows Dialog instance only Note For information about the installation of an additional Java application server check the installation guides listed in Figure 6 1 186 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 6 1 4 Differences between 2 tier and 3 tier landscapes The main concepts and management of 2 and 3 tier systems and what are the biggest differences between these two classes include gt 3 tier systems invariably display higher database response times than 2 tier systems This is due to the network overhead between the application and database serv
94. ABAP and Java stack together with its additional components as the essential basis of the mySAP ERP 2004 application mySAP ERP 2004 Analytics Financials Human Capital Management Procurement amp Logistics Execution Product Development amp Manufacturing Sales and Service Corporate Services SAP NetWeaver 04 Java NET BW Scena BI Content Interoperability ervice Content Management Content Server and Collaboration BW Functionality Portal Platform Portal Runtime for NET XI Functionality KW IKS Search and BW Java Components Classification TREX MI Functionality Toe Vieualcompocer Server Adobe Document KW Functionality Services XI Adapter Engine NWDI Web AS ABAP XI Adapter Engine ease a J2EE Additional ABAP Stack Java Stack Components Figure 2 9 SAP NetWeaver 04 as the foundation of mySAP ERP 2004 SAP NetWeaver facilitates the integration and alignment of people information and business processes across organizational and technological boundaries SAP NetWeaver easily integrates information and applications from virtually any source It interoperates with and can be extended using the primary market technologies Microsoft NET Sun J2EE and IBM WebSphere With SAP NetWeaver 04 fewer components have to be installed separately particularly in the ABAP stack Nevertheless these components may still have to be patched separately depending on the requirements of your ERP scenarios or on
95. AP BW 3 5 plus SAP BI Content 3 5 2 Add On SAP Catalog Content Management 2 0 Add On Search and Classification TREX 6 1 mo o Mey fom fo SAP Enterprise Portal 6 0 Portal Server eS Business Packages for SAP Enterprise Portal gt Business Package for SRM gt Business Package for Supplier Portal Live Auction Cockpit Web Presentation Server LACWPS 2 0 SAP Exchange Infrastructure 3 0 SAP XI o mM of m o Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 173 Software component Business scenario Process integration content XI content for SAP SRM Server 5 0 SAP Catalog Content Management 2 0 SAP RosettaNet 1 0 SAP BI Content 3 5 2 sarau ewmm w u u SAP R 3 OLTP as of 3 11 or SAP R 3 Enterprise 4 70 SAP R 3 4 6C recommended SAP R 3 Plug In 2004 1 or higher version if one is available a SSP Self Service Procurement b PP Plan Driven Procurement c SS Strategic Sourcing d CM Catalog Content Management e SP Service Procurement f SA Spend Analysis You require Search and Classification TREX in the following cases You use SAP Catalog Content Management Add On You use the contract management application to efficiently search for information With the current release the RosettaNet standard is not generally supported If you want to use the RosettaNet standard you need to implement it on a project basis The installation of the single software
96. AP NetWeaver the concepts to install each of them are similar gt The Web Application Server Web AS is required with the following ABAP stack stand alone JAVA stack stand alone ABAP stack and the JAVA stack together There are different architectures and basic concepts about how to organize and how to install the Web AS with its components We discussed these in the previous sections For special business scenarios you require some components from the SAP NetWeaver Platform for example SAP Enterprise Portal EP SAP Business Information Warehouse BW SAP Exchange Infrastructure EP SAP Mobile Infrastructure MI Within these components you have to distinguish the following ABAP and JAVA aspects 108 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Code page aspects ASCII Unicode All of these components whether in ABAP or in JAVA have a database or more precisely a database schema This is described in the i5 OS chapter of Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 On System i models an SAP database is represented by a i5 OS library The SAP database and therefore the i5 OS library has an ASCII or a Unicode Code page Additionally a mySAP Business Suite application also requires some middleware components such as SAP Internet Transaction Server ITS SAP Business Connector BC Search and Classification TREX
97. AP System R 3 Plug in or PI_BASIS SAP Web AS ABAP lt Database gt ABAP Schema Figure 4 6 Technical system landscape of SAP BW without external data source 4 3 3 SAP BW installation steps overview To implement SAP BW follow these steps 1 Preparing an SAP system as data source Check or install the suitable PI_BASIS Plug in in the underlying SAP R 3 or ERP system With SAP BW Java Components see the following section you can access non SAP data sources by using the corresponding JDBC driver You do not have to prepare this SAP system for SAP BW Staging with external system as data source For all other scenarios you have to prepare this SAP system only if you want to use an Online Transaction Processing OLTP system such as SAP R 3 or SAP R 3 Enterprise back end as data source 2 Installation of SAP BW a Install SAP Web AS ABAP which includes SAP BW PI_BASIS and the SAP IGS SAP BW Staging with external system as data source only e If you want to run ABAP and Java parts as one system in one database instance install an SAP Web AS ABAP Java system instead of SAP Web AS ABAP e If you want to run the Java components in a separate system install an SAP Web AS Java system additional to SAP Web AS ABAP Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 79 b Configure the database of your SAP Web AS for SAP BW see SAP note 567745 c Install SAP GUI with SAP BW Add On on
98. AP online documentation SAP currently provides an HTML based solution for the online documentation the SAP Library The library includes the application help glossary implementation guide IMG and release notes You can display the documentation with a Java compatible Web browser on all front end platforms supported by SAP Install the SAP online documentation SAP Library in your SAP system as described in the README TXT file contained in the root directory of the online documentation DVD delivered as part of the installation package For other ways to access the SAP library see the SAP library for an example located at the SAP Help Portal at http help sap com nw04 7 Install the SAP license You must install a permanent SAP license When you install your SAP system a temporary license is automatically installed This temporary license allows you to use the system for only four weeks from the date of installation Before the temporary license expires you must apply for a permanent license key from SAP We recommend that you apply for a permanent license key as soon as possible after having installed your system If you installed a Java system as a prerequisite for the SAP Enterprise Portal installation do not install the SAP license now The license of the SAP Web AS Java system is automatically installed as part of the SAP Enterprise Portal installation When you install the SAP Web AS license a license for the J2EE Engine i
99. ASP and the installation fails If you have sufficient disk space we recommend that you work around this problem by adding a second user ASP for example ASP 3 The alternative is to leave the journal receivers in the system ASP However SAP does not recommend this for security and performance reasons For detailed information see the IBM documentation OS 400 Backup and Recovery C41 5304 To add a user ASP perform the following steps a za gt oag cd Perform a manual Initial Program Load IPL of your System i server i Set the mode to manual on the control panel ii Enter the System i command PWRDWNSYS IMMED RESTART YES Enter option 3 Use Dedicated Service Tools DST from the menu that opens Sign on by entering your DST user and password Enter option 4 Work with disk units Enter option 1 Work with disk configuration Enter option 3 Work with ASP configuration Enter option 6 Move units from one ASP to another Specify the ASP to which you want to move specific units by entering the number of the ASP next to the relevant unit in the column New ASP Choose ENTER In the next window choose ENTER to confirm that you want to continue The Confirm Move of Units window opens To confirm your choices choose ENTER Moving units take several minutes Continue the procedure and complete the IPL m Switch back to normal mode 10 Configure the TCP IP Before configuring TCP IP ensure that
100. Add on for cProjects Add on forCRM SAP WFM Add on WFM Add SAP WFM Add on SAP CRM Intelligence Connector C A _ meos o on e om om Ca _ froisircmreos PPP T A Note In the mySAP CRM 4 0 SR1 Master Guide you find the scenario specific sections and an overview of the overall implementation process the technical infrastructure and the installation sequence In addition these sections include information about related upgrade documentation if available Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 153 5 3 8 General mySAP CRM installation issues mySAP CRM is based on SAP Web Application Server SAP Web AS 6 40 technology which is the underlying technology of almost all solutions of mySAP Business Suite For more information about the technology provided by SAP Web AS see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com netweaver We focus on the ABAP part of the SAP CRM installation The ABAP part is required for the installation of SAP CRM ABAP and SAP CRM ABAP Java If you want to install the Java part of SAP CRM you have to install SAP Web AS 6 40 Java This is because the technology of the Java part of SAP CRM is the same as that of SAP Web AS 6 40 Installation of CRM Java Components You can now install the following CRM Java Components with the installation service Install CRM Non ABAP Components gt Intelligence Connector IC gt Interac
101. An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Preparations for installing SAP applications with IBM i5 0S amomo Redpaper International Technical Support Organization An Overview of Installing SAP Applications August 2006 Note Before using this information and the product it supports read the information in Notices on page vii First Edition August 2006 This edition applies to Version 5 Release 4 and Release 3 Modification 5 of i5 OS product number 5722 SS1 and SAP ERP 640 ECC 5 0 based on NetWeaver 04 Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2006 All rights reserved Note to U S Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Contents Notices oprea feiss Male eee ee eget he Be A ea vii ACOIMALKS 23 i PR A ehh eR ANS ao AEN IR ik ide i ALAR ate da Jd a Me et viii Preface 220 in eet eed oe Sed edad Saeed a Mee 8 ix The team that wrote this Redpaper 0 cee eee x Become a published author 1 0 2 0 teens xi Comments welcome 00000 tent eee xi Chapter 1 Overview of SAP solutions applications components and tools 1 Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 00 0000 5 2 1 Planning and preparing an SAP installation 0 0000 eee eee 6 2 1 1 Checklist for preparing an SAP installation 00 0 0 e eee eee 6 2 1 2 E
102. Application Sharing Server to a dedicated host If you installed Collaboration in a production environment we recommend that you install the Application Sharing Server for Collaboration on a dedicated host for better performance 4 4 4 SAP EP documentation references The following documentation is available for SAP EP gt Planning guides available on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic Planning at http service sap com instguidesNw04 Technical Infrastructure of SAP Enterprise Portal Installation guides available on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic Installation at http service sap com instguidesNWw04 Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server Java on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt Installation Guide SAP Enterprise Portal Installation Guide Search and Classification TREX Installation Upgrade and Configuration Guide PDK for NET Configuration guides available in the SAP Library at Portal Security Guide Choose SAP NetWeaver gt Security gt SAP NetWeaver Security Guide Security Guides for the SAP NetWeaver Products Portal Security Guide Portal Platform Administration Guide Choose SAP NetWeaver gt People Integration Portal Administration Guide 4 5 Installation of SAP Exchange Infrastructure XI SAP Exchange Infrastructure SAP XI is the technical solution for integrating heterogeneous software components of your system lands
103. DST separately prior to specifying it in the window of Figure 3 26 So if you want to use an ASP 2 for the journal receivers you need to configure the ASP 2 before starting the installation Software package check The SAPINST installation procedure checks and loads the required installation software packages on and from the DVDs or CDs see Figure 3 27 on page 64 Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 63 I SAPinst SAPINST IBASO3 BASYCS COM SAP NetWeaver 04 Support Release 1 gt ABAP System gt IBM DB2 UDB f SAPinst DVD CD Browser gt Software Package Check BEE Enter the location ofthe required software packages Software Package s EXPORT DVD Additional Information SAPinst will detect the required software packages on DVD CD and check the package identification file LABEL ASC of the required software packages if you do not want to check the location now deselect the Check Location flag and SAPinst will ask you again later if you want to copy the required DYD CD to your local disk enter the target location in the Copy Package To column Figure 3 27 SAPINST Checking and loading the SAP software packages Number of parallel R3LOAD jobs Specify the number of parallel R83LOAD jobs for loading the data We recommend that you specify a number up to four times the number of processors In our example we have one processor CPU The SAP BC consultant spec
104. E LOC RMTNETID LOC MODE NETATR TNSPGM DRDA 13 Install English as a secondary language On every System i configuration where English is not the primary language you must install English as the secondary language library This is necessary for SAP to be able to provide support To check if English is already installed on your System i model as a secondary language enter WRKLIB QSYS29 on the System i command line If one of the following secondary language libraries is displayed you have already installed English as a secondary language library QSYS2924 QSYS2938 QSYS2959 or QSYS2984 If it is not installed perform the following steps a On the System i command line enter GO LICPGM b Enter option 21 Install secondary languages c Enter option 1 to select any of the following libraries QSYS2924 QSYS2938 QSYS2959 or QSYS2984 14 You install additional languages This is an optional and hardware independent task For more details refer to the installation guide Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 123 15 Set up the transport directory This is a hardware independent task The normal standard directories are created by the installation procedure For more details refer to the installation guide To change the usr sap trans to sapmni trans of any other host proceed as follows a Log on to the System i host as a user with administrator rights similar to QSECOFR b To link to another
105. Ensure that all other applications are closed before starting the application gt TREX 5 0 You can use TREX 5 0 for full text search functions Note Search functions for Knowledge Provider documents are not currently supported in Unicode environments gt Business Package for Design Collaboration 60 1 You can use cFolders within the Business Package for Design Collaboration Installation sequence Host B 1 Install SAP Web Application Server Installing the required languages 2 Install Plug In PI BASIS 3 Install SAP cProject Suite 3 10 Add on 4 Optional Install SAP Content Server for cFolders Host B Host A 1 Install SAP Web Application Server Installing the required languages 2 Install Plug In PI BASIS 3 Install SAP cProject Suite 3 10 Add on Optional back end systems 1 SAP Business Information Warehouse Install SAP BW Install BI Content Add On Install R 3 Plug In 2 SAP R 3 Install SAP R 3 4 6B or higher b Optional Install SAP Content Server for cProjects on R 3 System Host Install R 3 Plug In Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 171 5 6 Installation of mySAP Supplier Relationship Management mySAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM belongs to the mySAP Business Suite so we want to show you a short overview about its functions and installation steps 5 6 1 SAP SRM Business overview mySAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM maximizes the return
106. Enter the following to start a dialog instance startsap instanceID 3 To stop the SAP Instance enter the following to stop dialog instances stopsap instanceID Start stop script with a Linux application server The SAP system can be started as user Inxadm with the command startsap and can be ended with the command stopsap both are aliases Make sure that the system shuts down correctly after a power off or a reboot of the server otherwise data can be lost You can integrate the start and the stop of the SAP system into the start and the stop procedure of the whole system Refer to Example 6 4 that shows you a script for starting and stopping an SAP system named LNX Example 6 4 Script to start and stop an SAP system Linux bin sh sapr3 Script to start and stop SAP system at startup or shutdown chkconfig 2345 98 02 description start and stop SAP instance Source function library etc rc d init d functions See how we were called Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 199 case 1 in start echo Starting SAP system su Inxadm c usr sap LNX adm startsap_ hostname _17 touch var lock subsys sapr3 stop echo Stopping SAP system su Inxadm c usr sap LNX adm stopsap_ hostname _17 rm f var lock subsys sapr3 status this is way overkill but at least we have some status output sapinfo from the frontend CD restart reload do not do anything this is unreasonable echo Restar
107. FS directories between hosts is linked via QFileSvr 400 usr sap SID is the local work directory tree of an SAP system and its instances In some places it contains links to sapmnt SID There are four special directories in usr sap SID SYS Two are common for any system global and profile For SAP systems containing Java there are two additional directories named j2ee and jdbc On UNIX and System i models these directories link to sapmnt SID There are also the directories named usr sap SID SYS exe and sapmnt SID exe which have no individual characteristic for 3 tier landscapes An important directory is usr sap trans which is the SAP system transport directory If you have more than one SAP system on more than one host no matter which operating system is run normally this transport directory has to be shared in order to have a working SAP transport system In the 6 xx releases there is an i5 OS specific configuration directory named config in ust sap trans which contains information about the system configuration 188 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Figure 6 2 shows you the standard SAP file system Depending on the installation option selected you need to set up the following standard SAP file system and also the database file system IFS Structures SAP Web AS ABAP and Java ABAP path en hysical iene j db2_classes jar Java path DOUA physical gt Link target faim db
108. IFC 192 3 2 4 DUPRTEPTY 6 ADDTCPRTE RTEDEST 192 3 2 3 SUBNETMASK HOST NEXTHOP DIRECT BINDIFC 192 3 2 4 DUPRTEPTY 6 For more information refer to SAP note 484548 and the Prioritization of one local route over another section in the IBM knowledge base article Schowler Routes on the IBM System i at http www 912 ibm com s_dir slkbase nsf 1ac66549a21402188625680b0002037e eb952094 30bbcb7486256d170047484a 0penDocument amp Hi ghl ight 0 showler routes It is essential that you verify the correct route selection by testing the connections with the commands PING and TRACEROUTE between all the servers Check that the correct interface is used for traffic and shows activity during the PING 6 1 8 Heterogeneous 3 tier landscapes SAP 3 tier System landscapes on System i configurations typically mean that the database server and central instance run on System i models and additional application instances run on other platforms You can use either a Windows server or a Linux server as an application server in a 3 tier system landscape You can have multiple application servers on different platforms System i Windows Linux We explain some procedures about how to start and stop the instances with a Windows and Linux application server Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 197 Start and stop all instances together with a Windows application server To start and stop all instances at the same time in a heterogeneous 3 tier insta
109. Information Extraction TREX Install SAP Web AS Java 6 40 or SAP Web AS Java 6 20 including Basic Java Libs and SAP Java Connector JCO a Start the CRM Java Components Installer b Install the SAP J2EE Engine including Basic Java Libs and SAP Java Connector JCO c Deploy the following J2EE applications on the SAP J2EE Engine i IPC Web Applications ii ISA Web Application Components for E Selling iii CRM ICO iv CRM ICSS for Internet Customer Self Service v Install MapBox vi IC WFM Calculation Server and IC WFM Application Server for Workforce Management vii 7g CRM ICWC Interaction Center WebClient for the Java Configuration of Interaction Center WebClient N Oa fF OND viii CRM SAF Software Agent Framework for the Java Configuration of Interaction Center WebClient ix CRM BMS Broadcast Messaging Server for the Java Configuration of Interaction Center WebClient x ME Mobile Engine part of Mobile Infrastructure In the release for CRM 4 0 Add On for Service Industries it is possible to have a non Java configuration of Interaction Center WebClient 8 Install the SAP Business Connector and RosettaNet 9 Install the Communication Station required for Mobile Sales and the DCOM Connector 10 Install the CRM Designer 11 Install the Groupware Connector 12 Install the Internet Transaction Server ITS 13 Install the MCI Multichannel interface Note We recommend that you install
110. Java on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt SAP Front End Installation Guide Installation Guide SAP Business Information Warehouse Installation Guide Search and Classification TREX Installation Guides for Crystal Enterprise SAP Edition available on SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Documentation amp Installation Guide Crystal Enterprise Version 10 at http service sap com businessobjects Crystal Enterprise SAP Edition Installation Guide Crystal Reports Installation Guide SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com r3 plug in SAP Front End Installation Guide SAP Library under SAP NetWeaver gt SAP NetWeaver Configuration gt Technical Scenarios of SAP NetWeaver SAP Business Information Warehouse SAP Web Application Server gt SAP Web Application Server Java gt J2EE Engine Configuration Template Configuration Tool See other BW and BI guides in the SAP Marketplace 4 4 Installation of SAP Enterprise Portal This section provides an overview of the following topics which are useful when installing SAP Enterprise Portal EP vvvy SAP Enterprise Portal EP business SAP Enterprise Portal EP technical system landscape Installation steps for SAP Enterprise Portal EP References installation guides and other documentation for the SAP Enterprise Portal 4 4 1 SAP EP business overview SAP Enterprise Portal consists of gt gt gt gt Th
111. KW technical system landscape 94 SAP license 132 SAP logon dialog box 131 SAP Manufacturing 1 SAP MI Client 92 SAP MI Server 92 SAP MI technical system landscape 91 SAP Mobile Infrastructure MI 91 SAP NetWeaver ix 1 ABAP stack 23 components 21 Java stack 23 SAP NetWeaver 2004 70 SAP NetWeaver Application Server 2 SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence 2 SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio 2 SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure 2 SAP NetWeaver Master Data Management 2 SAP NetWeaver Mobile 2 SAP NetWeaver Portal 2 SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer 2 SAP note 18 130906 224 135369 188 140357 230 14754 187 153967 80 157755 160 171356 209 210 176679 231 19466 136 213 202593 187 206935 225 25380 227 26317 187 321729 188 327434 221 36302 7 391658 119 392165 18 405827 211 410783 18 428855 19 187 431502 162 443925 28 450351 187 484548 197 543715 232 547227 216 548016 224 550718 231 565437 169 565697 231 567745 80 181 571530 129 584654 35 585277 224 225 60252 187 621793 19 63058 7 654801 28 120 657465 159 667233 191 669718 160 673144 35 682281 199 697353 118 700778 111 701226 46 704564 162 180 705060 128 705962 191 203 707805 46 708736 160 180 708736 160 708864 225 709140 125 717650 167 717812 181 718626 169 741821 114 127 744055 28 745115 127 760874 136 767123 132 770200 98 774933 80 785927 209 789188 45 46 798532 136 79913 7 801877 231 805390 124 805447 62 818091 211 246 An Overview of
112. M SAP NetWeaver 04 Support Release 1 gt ABAP System gt IBM DB2 UDB iof x A ah ABAP System gt Kernel Library for System ERX Specify the SAP kernel library parameters SAP Kernel Library Kernel Library Name E Library Location Load a new kernel library from DVD CD O Use existing library Additional Information The system needs a library that contains executables and other 08400 system objects The contents ofthis library are loaded to the directory uswsayy lt SAPSID S S exe un of the system We recommend you to Load a new kernel library from DVD CD Go to next dialog Figure 3 21 SAPINST kernel installation window In the example of Figure 3 21 we use the kernel name R3640A0102 where R3 fix 640 Web AS Release A For ASCII version of the kernel another version would be U for Unicode 0102 for the patch level of the main kernel component disp work vvvy Recommendation Use a separate kernel library for each SAP system Now the kernel is loaded and checked see Figure 3 22 on page 59 58 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models SAPinst DVD CD Browser gt Software Package Check Enter the location of the required software packages Software Package s KERNEL DYD X Mtmp CDs SRN Additional Information SAPinst will detect the required software packages on DVD CD and check the package identification file LABEL ASC
113. MB fos Lokales Intranet Aston Gy Aibeitsplat YX tmpAC 8Z Unbenan f Hardcopi I9 Sitzung A BH CAwINn eB winzip Norton BE ADIBAH 12 18 Figure 3 4 The copied installation CDs and DVDs The advantage of this is that you can repeat single installation steps as often as you want Additionally you can perform the installation from any front end or PC 3 2 4 Updating the SAPINST CD The procedure needs a preparation step to update the Installation Master CD also named SAPINST CD 1 First copy the CD or DVD to a hard disk on a Windows front end or to a mapped System i IFS directory If fixes are necessary for the installation tools they are provided as JSERPACK The installation note for your release for example SAP note 789188 for SAP Web AS 6 40 SR1 states if an ISERPACK is necessary and what number for example ISERPACK7 2 Install some patches Normally there is a cross reference in the installation guide to the appropriate SAP note This varies depending on the SAP component SAP Release Service Release and for R 3 Enterprise the Extension Set you want to install Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 45 For systems based on Web AS 6 20 6 40 and higher refer to following for information about how to install the ISERPACK even if they are not mentioned in all installation guides SAP note 701226 SAP Web AS 6 40 on IBM server iSeries or newer SAP not
114. NST files are located use the Windows search tool Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 133 Tip Do this later approximately four weeks after the installation 9 Access a remote database We recommend that you use 100 MB Ethernet connections to a remote database only for small test environments or in some special circumstances For production environments we recommend that you use GB Ethernet or HSL for System i models Ensure that the complete traffic from the application server to the DB server and vice versa runs by GB Ethernet or HSL especially if you have 100 MB Ethernet installed as well Attention It is not easy to check which connection the 100 MB Ethernet or the GB Ethernet is taken to access the remote database Accessing a Remote Database via TCP IP sockets If you have both an SAP system with Release 6 40 and SAP systems with releases lower than 4 6A running on a single System i server you should note the following In SAP Release 6 40 the command STARTSAP DB does not start the database server job R3RMTDB which is required for releases prior to 4 6A To start these SAP systems you should continue to use the command STARTSAP DB from the older SAP release QXDAEDRSAQL the job necessary to access a remote database is normally started automatically It runs in subsystem QSYSWRK If it is not running you can start it with the System i command STARTSAP DB When a work process connects t
115. P 600_620 IPC SAP Web AS Java 6 40 JCO Basic Java Libs fe 5 E EP Platform 8 0 A Physical server host EP for CRM Z Database system S amp S ie m O CRM CAT Server IC WFM Calc Srv IC WFM Appl Srv IPC WEB APPs ISA WAC IC Web Client CRM BM 5 CRM SAP CRM ICO CRM ICS 8 MapBox Business Connector RNET DCCM Connector st Web Server for E Selling port 1080 WebServer Plug in DO TeaLeaf Host m MS Exchange Mobile Client Server 15b Aee eee D CRM Designer Groupware Connector D 8a E 9a 10 o TeaLeaf 14 Figure 5 5 mySAP CRM minimal system landscape Note The numbers beside the software components correspond to the overall installation order 5 3 3 Overall installation sequence The following list provides information about a valid overall installation sequence for the solution mySAP CRM 4 0 The installation sequence corresponds to the numbers in Figure 5 5 Installation sequence CRM Host As shown in Figure 5 5 the CRM host includes all the CRM 4 0 software components as well as the solution manager components Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 141 Install the Java Development Kit JDK Install the SAP Solution Manager Install the SAP CRM server 4 0 with WFMCORE 1 00 and WP PI 600_620 Install the SAP Internet Pricing and Configurator IPC Install the CRM CAT server Install Text Retrieval amp
116. PH 32 central services instance 28 Central User Administration CUA 32 CFGTCP 122 cFolders 165 166 Channel Management CHM 154 CHGIPLA 117 CHGR3SHLOC 124 241 CHGSBSD 19 CHGSYSLIBL 66 CHGTCPDMN 123 CHM 154 client CRM mobile 148 User Management Engine 113 client copy 136 code page 1100 62 4102 62 UNICODE 62 collaboration 81 Collaboration Projects 167 command ADDENVVAR 118 CFGTCP 122 CHGIPLA 117 CHGR38SHLOC 124 CHGSBSD 19 CHGSYSLIBL 66 CHGTCPDMN 123 CRTCLPGM 118 DSPF 65 EDTF 65 GO LICPGM 123 ping 122 R3LOAD 57 224 R3SETUP 232 RTVCLPGM 118 SAPCAR 46 STARTSAP DB 134 WRKENVVAR_ 118 WRKLNK 123 WRKRDBDIRE 123 command EDTF 118 command wrapper 117 Computer Telephony Integration SAPphone 148 Content Server 95 CPH 32 CPI C 215 cProjects 165 CRM 138 Collaboration Projects 167 Communication Station 149 components 141 Development Station 149 Installation 138 installation guide 139 Java Components 154 server 146 software component matrix 149 CRM mobile client 148 CRM WAC E Selling Web Application Components ISA 154 CRTCLPGM 118 Crystal Enterprise 80 Crystal Reports 80 CUA 32 Customizing Scout 143 D data staging 77 database instance 29 DBO2 230 DDIC 130 developer trace 131 dialog instance 29 directory sapmnt 189 sapmnt SID exe 188 ustr sap 189 190 ustr sap SID 188 190 ust sap SID SYS 188 ust sap SID SYS exe 188 ust sap trans 188 System Landscape 29 system landscape 5 dis
117. Pterm SAP Library Master Guide Installation Guide I I Security Guide I Configuration l ee Release Notes I Implementation Guide IMG Delta and Upgrade IMG Upgrade Master Guide Component Upgrade Guide Q fe 3 5 fe 3 D 5 2 Solution Operation Guide Figure 2 3 SAP documentation types in the software life cycle Cross phase documentation The following is a list of the cross phase documentation gt SAPterm SAPterm is SAP s terminology database It contains SAP specific vocabulary in over 30 languages as well as many glossary entries in English and German It is located in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com sapterm gt SAP Library The SAP Library is a collection of function oriented and process oriented documentation for SAP components The SAP Library also contains business scenario descriptions It is located in the SAP Help Portal at Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 11 http help sap com It is also available as documentation CD located in the SAP Service Marketplace only the business scenario descriptions at http service sap com ibc gt Implementation Guide IMG The IMG is a tool for configuring the SAP system to meet customer requirements Its structure and documentation are component oriented You can find the IMG in the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing gt IMG gt SAP Security Guide The Security Guide
118. SAP Solution Manager is described as mandatory for upgrades and new installations based on SAP Web Application Server 6 xx 4 8 1 Technical system infrastructure The SAP Solution Manager runs on a separate central system to which all other SAP systems are connected Systems that are administered using the SAP Solution Manager are referred to as satellite systems Figure 4 12 on page 98 shows you the SAP Solution Manager connected via RFC to gt Some satellite systems for example P01 as a mySAP ERP production system Q01 as a mySAP ERP quality assurance system T01 as a mySAP ERP test or development system BW1 as a mySAP BW production system AP1 as a mySAP APO production system gt The SAPNet for handling customer messages SAP services or both gt The SAP Marketplace via the Internet Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 97 Customer Solution Landscape Satellite Systems RFC connections for data transfer e Solution monitoring CCMS EarlyWatch Alert e Configuration e Distribution issues customizing templates Change Request Management SAPNet R 3 Frontend RFC connection Send and update messages e Service update and delivery SAP Solution Manager System Internet connection e Order services Search SAP Notes SAP Service Marketplace SAP Router Figure 4 12 Solution landscape with the c
119. SAP notes Careful planning is a prerequisite for both a successful SAP installation and an SAP upgrade The following information helps you to plan your upgrade so that downtime is reduced to a minimum and the upgrade runs as efficiently as possible TeamSAP offers the upgrade service SAP GoingLive Functional Upgrade Check The yearly SAP licence maintenance charge includes two SAP services for free A team of experts checks the parameter settings of your system in one session before the upgrade and gives you detailed recommendations on the configuration After the upgrade the parameters and the entire system status are checked again in a second session For information about this and other SAP services see the SAP Service Marketplace Service Catalog under the topics SAP Safeguarding SAP GoingLive Functional Upgrade Check at http service sap com servicecat SAP Support is your contact for ordering this service When you plan your upgrade note the following information in addition to the information in the SAP upgrade installation guides Planning an upgrade Step by step gt All the times specified in this documentation are based on hardware with medium performance levels gt Do not perform any additional actions during the upgrade that could cause it to run less smoothly gt Start planning your upgrade in good time gt To make sure that all requirements are met run the PREPARE program as soon as possible The PREPARE c
120. Special SAP installations 191 gt Should TCP IP or OptiConnect be used One GB Ethernet TCP IP and OptiConnect or OptiMover on earlier systems are each supported for connections between database and application servers Slower TCP IP connections can work but for performance reasons they are not recommended and are not supported by SAP Whether OptiConnect or TCP IP is used in a 3 tier installation is controlled by the parameter dbs db4 opticonnect The default value for this parameter is 1 for an OptiConnect connection If you want to run 3 tier via TCP IP then use the following command to set the parameter to 0 in all instance profiles dbs db4 opticonnect 0 If the database server can use several TCP IP adapters with different transmission speeds it is important that the communication between the database and application servers takes place over the fastest line gt Additional SAP application server s on one server or partition In some cases the number of work processes needed is too high to be handled by a single SAP dispatcher process but the server is powerful enough to handle the workload Additional application instances are installed best on the database instance server Then the access from the application instances to the database is handled locally on one server Installation of an additional application server on a separate System i The installation of an additional application server on a separate System i server
121. TRCV YES if there are other SAP activities at the same time when the homogeneous system copy is running 2 CLRPFM for R8TARGET SIDDATA FileName with the following FileNames ALCONSEG ALSYSTEM CSMSEGM DBSTATHDB4 DBSTAIHDB4 MONI PAHI OSMON DBSNP SDBAH SDBAD SDBAP SDBAR TPFET TPFHT TLOCK DDLOG see SAP note 25380 All the objects listed above are located in the library RSTARGET SIDDATA Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 227 3 Install the permanent SAPLICENSE SAPLICENSE instal1 Cut and paste the information from the SAP Service MarketPlace from the path http service sap com licensekeys Delete all SQL Packages for the TARGET SID 5 Change the Message Queue for the journal if you need it for your backup procedures For example CHGJRN JRN R3TARGET SIDDATA QSQURN MSGQ R3TARGET S1ID400 SAVDLTRCV And then call CLRMSGQ MSGQ R3TARGET S1ID400 SAVDLTRCV Post installation steps Target system activities 1 Check if the SAP license was installed correctly Log on to the system with a user that is not SAP or DDIC 2 Call the Installation Check Transaction SICK 3 Setup and rebuild the Correction and Transport System with Transaction SE06 Log in 8 9 with user DDIC in client Call the following SAP reports Transaction SE38 SDB4GEN RSDB4GEN RSBTCDEL older than O days with forced mode and user name alternatively call Report RSBTCDEL2
122. Tealeaf 14b on a separate machine see the additional box for the Tealeaf host 14 Install the ARS transport service 15a on the CRM host and the Mobile Client Software 15b for Field Sales on the Tealeaf host 15 Install Vertex 142 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Installation sequence Enterprise Portal Host On the portal host install all the software components that are required for the implementation of SAP Enterprise Portal Install the Java Development Kit JDK and the JSE Java standard edition software Install the SAP J2EE Engine Cluster Version Install the Portal Runtime Install the iView Runtime Java Install the Enterprise Portal Platform 6 0 Install CM 6 0 including the connector Install the Business Package for Communication Install the Web server with the related Plug in for the E Selling Scenario IIS ANOnRWOND As an alternative you can also install the Web server on the CRM host Be aware that the minimum system landscape described in this section does not reflect recommendations for production use such as security requirements 5 3 4 Additional tools technology components and activities In this section we provide a short description of some of the additional activities and components that are used in the CRM environment Monitoring the system landscape After you have installed the components of your CRM system we recommend that you r
123. a for SAP CRM Installation planning activities gt Required documentation SAP notes SAP Service Marketplace SAP Library Integration of LDAP Directory Services System configuration Hardware and software requirements Multiple SAP systems on a single System i server vvvy Installation preparations activities gt Required installation CDs or DVDs Preparing the installation CDs or DVDs Using the CD browser dialog gt Command Line Shell Interpreters on the System i server Qp2Term Qp2Shell and the OS 400 Portable Application Solution Environment PASE Installing the Qshell Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 155 Checking and adjusting i5 OS system values Setting the time zone environment variable Adjusting the startup program QSTRUP Distribution of the libraries on ASPs Adding a user ASP Configuring the TCP IP Adjusting the relational database name Preparing the active directory Installing English as a secondary language Setting Up the transport directory Preparing the Windows host for the SAP system installation Preparing a Windows user account and i5 OS user profile Installing TMKSVR and creating an installation share Choosing an SAP System ID vvvvvvvyvvvvvvviy Installation process activities gt Running SAPinst gt Input for the installation Post installation activities Granting authorizations for Operating System Collector Programs Starting and
124. a landscape as well as all the business processes running on them gt Communicate with SAP Support Back Office The SAP Solution Manager has a connection to the SAPNet R 3 Front end and the SAP Service Marketplace Note The SAP Solution Manager does not connect directly to the SAP Service Marketplace but uses Internet Explorer to display items from the SAP Service Marketplace on the user s desktop gt Document an entire solution landscape in one central system Before you begin the installation collect and read the relevant SAP notes They contain the latest or upgraded information regarding installation as well as corrections to the installation documentation You find these SAP notes in the SAP SolMan installation guides in the SAP Marketplace under the topics SAP Components SAP Solution Manager at http servce sap com instguides gt SAP Solution Manager Master Guide gt SAP Solution Manager Component Installation Guide Part Planning and Preparation gt SAP Solution Manager Component Installation Guide Part II Installation and Post Installation 4 8 4 SAP SolMan installation planning activities 1 Choose your basic system variant and decide how you want to distribute the SAP system instances There is only an ABAP System as a basic system variant of the SAP SolMan There is no J2EE Engine So you have only a ABAP installation You can install all mandatory SAP system components on a single host central
125. a special password With this S User you can enter the SAP Service Marketplace and order more S User free of charge Attention For the SAP Service Marketplace there is a special authority concept for the S User You can manage your S User and more at http service sap com user admin Order the installation pack in advance It takes approximately three to five days to get the package from the SAP Software Logistics Center Ensure that you have detailed the correct address to receive the installation pack Perhaps you want it to be sent to your installation partner Only the customers themselves can order the SAP installation software pack with their SAP S User based on the licence agreement with SAP Ensure that your SAP S User has the necessary authority to order the SAP software for the desired installation number from the SAP software catalogue gt SAP service connection Ensure you have a direct SAP service connection OSS either via Internet via Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN or some other method For SAP customers it is mandatory to have such a direct connection to SAP It is not only necessary to have a physical connection you must also have a valid S User for the SAP Marketplace You get this S User with the first delivery of the SAP installation software This connection provides you remote support from SAP in case of installation problems Furthermore you can order an EARLY Watch Check from SAP to obtain a
126. ab Saw one an Soha eae SO 40 3 2 Installation steps for the SAP Web Application Server 6 40 2 05 41 3 2 1 Preparing a Windows user account and a System i user profile 42 3 2 2 Preparing the Windows PC for SAPINST 0 000 cece eee eee eee 43 3 2 3 Copying CDs and DVDs to System i directories 0 00 e eee 44 3 2 4 Updating the SAPINST CD 000 cece 45 3 2 5 Installing the TMK server 0 cee eee 46 3 2 6 Install the ABAP database cece tee 49 3 2 7 Install the ABAP central instance 000 0 56 3 2 8 Post installation steps for ABAP 0 0 00 cee eee 66 3 2 9 Client copy to production client 0 00 00 cee 66 3 2 10 Copy Toolbox JDBC driver 0 0 00 eee 66 3 2 11 Install cryptographic software and policies 202000 eee eee 66 3 2 12 Create users SAPJSF J2EE_ADM 0 0000 e eee ee 67 Copyright IBM Corp 2006 All rights reserved iii iv 3 2 13 Install Java Add inis sts red ag be See ha a e Delle bee a a head 67 3 2 14 Remove SAPinst installation files 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 67 Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 69 4 1 General aspects of mySAP NetWeaver 04 0000 0c cee eee 70 4 2 mySAP NetWeaver overview 0 0000 e ete 71 4 3 Installation of SAP Business Information Warehouse BW 0 05 77 4 3 1 SAP BW business overview
127. action SM59 Create a list of the released jobs on the TARGET SID System for re scheduling after the copy Transaction SM37 6 Make a hardcopy of the operation modes Transaction RZ04 The TMS import queue of the TARGET SID must be empty so Import all transport requests that are in the import queue of the TARGET SID into the system TARGET SID Transaction STMS By importing them they are added in the follow up import queue In most cases this is the queue of the SOURCE SID Get a list of the users especially if they are locked with their authorizations and their assignment to the clients Infosystem in the Transaction SU01 Get a list of the printers in the TARGET SID especially check which printers are locked Transaction SPAD If you want to keep them put them in a transport request that can be re imported after the system copy Prepare the target system To prepare the target system follow these steps on the target system named TARGET SID 1 Shutdown the system TARGET SID on the evening before you want to start the copy procedure Save and then delete the database of the TARGET SID SQL Packages Libraries R3TARGET SIDDATA and R8TARGET SIDJRN Note Save and delete a database in the background not in dialog mode Use the i5 OS command SBMJOB The system copy is done as described in the SAP Guideline for System Copy of Systems based on WEB AS 6 20 226 An Overview of Installing SAP Applic
128. age 01 6 Installation of SAP Catalog Content Management For information about the installation see SAP note 835170 7 Installation of Search and Classification TREX Use the following parameters during the installation for more information see the documentation Installation Guide Search and Classification TREX 180 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Perform the installation steps to set up an RFC connection Automatic language recognition is not required You can adopt the default settings for document languages during the installation of Search and Classification TREX No Python extensions are required Refer to the nstallation Guide Search and Classification TREX 6 1 8 Installation of SRM Server for SAP SUS Refer to the Installation Guide SRM Server on lt Platform gt lt Database gt You can either install a separate SRM Server for SUS or use the SRM Server that you have installed in step 3 for this purpose Installation of SAP IPC for SAP Supplier Self Services SUS Refer to the Installation Guide SAP IPC Server and Installation Guide SAP IPC Web Applications 9 Installation of SAP BW optional a Install SAP Web AS ABAP 6 40 which includes SAP BW 3 5 PI_BASIS 6 40 2004_1 and SAP IGS 6 40 Refer to the Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server ABAP on lt Platform gt lt Database gt b Configure the database of your SAP Web AS f
129. ailable on Windows 2000 or higher and on 64 Bit UNIX as of SAP APO 3 0A This means liveCache can run in a Linux partition of the System i server mySAP SCM components This section gives an overview of mySAP SCM and the components of its business scenarios see Table 5 11 Note that there are software requirements for each component listed in Table 5 11 which are not explicitly mentioned in this documentation They are documented in the relevant installation guides in the SAP Marketplace at http service sap com instguides See the SAP note 657465 Master Guide mySAP SCM 4 1 for the latest component version requirements Table 5 11 mySAP SCM scenario software component matrix M mandatory O optional Software component Business scenario Eeesee seme jae ie eae E ee ae ee ee Cee E eee araroa ee fe a See eee FC ce A 2 xI XI Contentor SCM 44 for SCM 4 1 SAP Solution Manager 3 1 with content ST ICO a yo pepe pe 120 a F amp R Forecasting amp Replenishment b PM Project Manufacturing c RR Responsive Replenishment d RP Release Processing e SMI Supplier Managed Inventory Note Read this matrix vertically That is check which business scenario you want to implement and then verify which software components are mandatory M mandatory and which are optional O optional for your installation Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 159 Table 5 12 mySAP
130. allation Another reason to set up a Homogeneous system copy is if you want an exact copy of an SAP system Often you want to have this when you set up or renew your Quality Assurance QAS or another Test System TST or a Sandbox for example from your Production System PRD The homogeneous system copy is also the SAP implementation method to rename an SAP system ID because there is no tool for renaming an SAP system ID Note An SAP system copy is made when you do a homogeneous system copy All clients all data and the same repository exists afterwards in the target system than in the source system Be aware that all data is copied from the source to the target even data that you do not want to have in target system Also consider that you do not add but instead replace the information at your target system This means when you want to refresh your QAS system then you have to delete the QAS database in advance On non System i platforms homogeneous system copies are done with the SAP tool R3LOAD as described in the installation guides mentioned above You can also do the homogeneous system copy on the System i server with the R3LOAD method Homogeneous system copies on the System i server with Web AS ABAP are system installations that use the i5 OS SAVLIB and RSTLIB commands to load the database instead of R8LOAD from installation CDs or DVDs This method is faster than the R3LOAD method For more information see SAP note 585277 F
131. allation but can be used when EBCDIC data needs to be accessed from the Windows server The shares are created during the installation by the command CRTSAPSHR in the kernel library The other directories are much the same as on a System i application server except that the kernel executables are now taken from the run_nt subdirectory Data from remote hosts is accessed by accessing a share sapmnt on these remote hosts sharing their usr sap directory Also UNIX hosts that are part of such a heterogeneous system environment need to provide a share of usr sap by means of tools like Samba Be sure that the sapmnt share on the System i host points to the directory usr sap and not to sapmnit as in earlier releases If you intend to install an application server on Windows connecting to System i servers read SAP note 667233 The SAP file system for a system containing a UNIX host e g Linux The setup of the SAP file system between an System i configuration and a UNIX type host looks similar to a standard distributed installation Refer to The SAP file system for a system distributed to multiple System i hosts on page 189 One major difference is that NFS mounts are used instead of QFileSvr 400 The System i central instance exports its sapmnt SID directory via NFS On the UNIX type host the special directories global profile jdbc j2ee are mounted into the local sapmnt SID You need the sub directories jdbc and j2ee toget
132. alling SAP Applications on System i Models Space type Space for journal receivers This depends on your strategy for the backup and cleanup of the journal receivers We recommend that you save every journal receiver twice before deleting it Therefore you should plan for approximately 20 GB to 50 GB of space for production systems Maybe much more in large installations or ASPs with more than one SAP system Space needed in the IFS The main part of the space necessary in the IFS from the SAP system is the DIR_GLOBAL where the joblogs for the batch jobs optionally the SAP spool else in database tables and SAP Batch Input protocols of each SAP instance are stored A big impact has the transport directory DIR_TRANS where the transport requests with their data and log files also the data for the installation of additional languages and all the support packages are placed before they are installed This also needs between 5 GB and 20 GB and more disk space and of course a backup or cleanup concept Total for one central system At least 100 GB to 120 GB Then you can start filling the system with data We recommend that you do not start an installation when you have less than 80 GB DASD free space for an SAP ERP ECC Central System For additional sizing aspects refer to 2 2 1 Sizing requirements on page 17 where you find all necessary references Further sizings must be done for additional ASPs and for iASPs for example for clus
133. an also run when the SAP system is up You can reset and repeat the program as often as you necessary before you start the actual upgrade The successful execution of PREPARE is a prerequisite for starting the upgrade gt f you are upgrading a modified system where changes have been made to the standard system you must start by upgrading a development or quality assurance system that has the same SAP system release including support package level and contains the same modifications The adjustments you perform manually for the new standard in this system can be automatically exported to the global transport directory and are integrated into the production system upgrade from there This procedure eliminates the need for time consuming adjustments to the production system 234 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models gt Check the prerequisite for an i5 OS operating system or database upgrade for the designated SAP release you want to upgrade to If it is technically possible we recommend that you upgrade the operating and database system and your SAP system at different times unless it is otherwise specified gt Before you start the upgrade check the upgrade strategy of the add on producer for the add ons that exist for your source release You must do this to ensure that the installed add ons are compatible with your upgrade Note Upgrades using the SCROLL mode should be submitted to batch for performance re
134. anaging data consistency and secure project control Change Request Management as part of SAP Solution Manager integrates Service Desk functionality for managing change requests and extends project control by integrating project planning with the cProjects application into a transport workflow control The processes supported by Change Request Management include urgent corrections for implementing fast and direct changes in the production environment and maintenance cycle activities such as regular releases and implementation upgrade or template projects Cross system and cross component changes are supported Change Request Management offers you the following benefits Increased maintenance and project efficiency Minimized costs for project management and IT Reduced risk of correction and project failure Shorter correction implementation and going live phase Efficient maintenance of customer developments and implementations YYYY Y Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 99 Solution Monitoring The Solution Monitoring scenario provides support for functionalities such as Service Level Reporting EarlyWatch Alert Business Process Monitoring System Monitoring Central System Administration System Landscape Reporting as well as user defined alerts The Monitoring functionality allows you to gt Monitor multiple solution landscapes You can use the SAP Solution Manager to monitor the satellite systems in
135. and 2b of the 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 If you want to install an SAP Web Application Server Java on a separate Windows machine you can find the appropriate documentation in Installation guides of SAP Web Application Server on System i models on page 186 The SAP notes have priority over the installation guides The Planning Guide 2a shown in 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 familiarizes you with the basic concepts as mentioned above The detailed preparation steps as well as the hardware and software requirements of the Windows installation host are also introduced in the guide The installation activities in 2b shown in 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 explain step by step the single activities After the installation you have to execute the post installation activities In the following section we highlight these steps and explain the most important features and activities for Planning activities for installing a Windows application server see page 201 Preparation activities for installing a Windows application server see page 203 Installation activities for installing a Windows application server see page 206 Post installation activities for installing a Windows application server see page 207 vvvy The steps shown in this Redpaper are no substitute for the official SAP installation
136. and software requirements Check the specific installation guide Ready DVD drive and enough temporary disk space for each DVD copied to disk Ensure that you have installed the TMKSVR Check that the i5 OS release is compatible for your SAP release Check that you have installed the required i5 OS license programs Check that you have installed all PTFs from the IBM SAP info APAR 116 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Check that you have enough disk space available Check that you have a valid front end Check the correct DB name and TCP IP host name 3 Check Qp2Term Qp2Shell and the OS 400 Portable Application Solution Environment PASE The OS 400 PASE delivers the similar UNIX command line flexibility as the Qshell interpreter It is more than just a shell interpreter it is also an entire programming environment based on the AIX Application Binary Interface The Qp2Term program runs an interactive terminal application on the System i server similar to the Qshell command line The Qp2Shell programs allow a non interactive shell script or application to be executed in OS 400 PASE Qshell accomplished these features by a command wrapper which either starts the Qshell command line or executes scripts non interactively Call the OS 400 Qp2Term and Qp2Shell programs using the OS 400 CALL mechanism We recommend that you use the OS 400 Qp2Term instead of QShell If no
137. arted and if it is necessary The SAP software is stored in directory GSAPGLOBALHOST sapmnt and contains global and local instance specific data on a global host sapmni trans In an SAP system landscape there must be a global directory for the transport of objects between SAP systems This directory is created on one SAP instance host in the SAP system landscape the transport host This typically resides on the central instance of your System i server It must be accessible for every host on which an SAP instance is installed and which belongs to this SAP system landscape The path on every host must be SAPTRANSHOST sapmnt trans SAP enables you to make a transport host known to the Domain Name Server for all Windows systems For more information about the file system structure on the System i central instance see SAP note 705962 gt Check the users and groups On the System i server and the Windows application server there must be appropriate users and groups Check for their names and specifications the installation guide 2a see 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 Preparation activities for installing a Windows application server Follow these steps to prepare for the installation of a Windows application server 1 Check the requirements checklist for a dialog instance In the installation guide you find a detailed checklist for the following relative to a Windows applic
138. as ter CD IM15_0S400_64 SAPINST 0S400 AS400 TMKSVR Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 47 48 You are presented the dialog as illustrated in Figure 3 8 SAP Installation SAPinst Start Dialog Drive letter of rootbin share for example l asOO030 rootbin SAPinst TMKSVF Session Paramets Port number Host 4so030 saa 58975 must match TMK server Installation port see Drive previous SAPINST User Profile sarinsT slide user profile gt IV Remember Password and Password E password Cancel Figure 3 8 TMKSVR installation box 2 This is the first window that you get when you start installing the TMK Server If you created an SAPINST user profile for both Windows and System i configurations you should specify that profile and its password here You should also select the box to create a TMKSVR instance The instance number of the TMK server is not related to the instance number of your SAP instance so you can pick any number here However if you run multiple installations perhaps in different SAP releases on the same system be careful when selecting the TMKSVR instance number so that you get unique instances and ports for each installation Then the library TMKSVR and if you did not change default for the TMKSVR instance number TMKSVROO are created on the System i server and the content filled from a SAVF that is transferred via FTP from the Installatio
139. ased platforms in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com platforms With SAP Web Application Server 6 20 and 6 40 a J2EE standards based Application Engine is shipped and supported by SAP as a runtime environment for the Java based components of mySAP com As an integral part of the SAP Web Application Server 6 20 and 6 40 the J2EE Engine delivers a proven e business environment with native Java support for easy deployment straightforward installation and administration coupled with full life cycle support for Java based e business components The homogeneous infrastructure for J2EE and ABAP environments of SAP Web Application Server 6 20 and 6 40 guarantees centralized and unified installation configuration monitoring security and load balancing for both programming environments With the new integration features it is now possible to link the SAP Web Application Server to the Exchange Infrastructure These features also help to make the direct connection between applications easier In particular the cross component process management through WebFlow has been enhanced Further developments include new functions for document processing and business communication for better support of business applications Improvements in life cycle An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models management and enhanced security features reduce the complexity and cost of solution management Internet Pricing and Configu
140. asons as described in SAP note 86557 Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 235 236 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Related publications The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this Redpaper IBM Redbooks For information on ordering these publications see How to get IBM Redbooks on page 240 Note that some of the documents referenced here may be available in softcopy only gt Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 Other publications These publications are also relevant as further information sources gt OS 400 Backup and Recovery V5R4 SC41 5304 gt TCP IP Configuration and Reference SC41 5420 Online resources These Web sites and URLs are also relevant as further information sources gt Informational APARs http www 03 ibm com servers eserver iseries service erp support htm gt JCE policy files in the IBM Web site http www ibm com devel operworks java jdk security index html gt System i Information Center http publib boulder ibm com infocenter iseries v5r4 index jsp gt IBM Solutions development for IBM Systems http www ibm com servers enable site porting iseries pase gt IBM Whitepaper http www grupointercompany com br itg_sap pdf gt IBM knowledge base article Schowler Routes on the IBM System i http www 912 ibm com s_dir slkbase nsf 1ac66549a2
141. atform for those solutions For customers looking to implement mySAP NetWeaver during 2005 in the course of integration or development projects or in the context of an ESA roadmap strategy we recommend an implementation of mySAP NetWeaver 2004 because this is the current default release Also we recommend an implementation of mySAP NetWeaver 2004s only where new capabilities made available with mySAP NetWeaver 2004s are absolutely required There is no essential difference in handling these two releases concerning SAP on System i models so we focus on the mySAP NetWeaver 04 4 2 mySAP NetWeaver overview The mySAP NetWeaver technology platform is a comprehensive integration and application platform that helps reduce the total cost of ownership TCO It facilitates the integration and alignment of people information and business processes across organizational and technological boundaries mySAP NetWeaver easily integrates information and applications from virtually any source It interoperates with and can be extended using the primary market technologies NET Sun s J2EE and IBM WebSphere mySAP NetWeaver is the technical foundation for mySAP Business Suite and SAP xApps solutions and ensures maximum reliability security and scalability so that mission critical business processes run smoothly By providing pre configured business content it helps reduce the need for custom integration and lowers TCO The following reports
142. ation 2 1 1 Checklist for preparing an SAP installation A practical approach for the preparation for an SAP installation an SAP upgrade or an SAP system copy is the following checklist gt SAP installation guides Refer to the required installation guides from the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com instguides Based on Web Application Server Release 6 40 almost all SAP installations have guidelines that are split into Part I Planning and Preparing Part ll Installation and Post Installation Some components such as CRM also have a master guide that points to several other guidelines gt SAP planning and preparation guide Most but not all of the new SAP guidelines have a chapter Installation Step by Step that helps to organize and plan the installation process Some guidelines help in the installation process with checklists for the required and optional components depending on the different installation scenarios that you select for your requirements such as the SolMan or the CRM installation guide For example see 2 1 2 Example mySAP ERP 2004 SR1 Planning and Preparation Guide on page 9 gt SAP installation notes Refer to the SAP installation notes that are listed in the installation guides This is an very important task Errors in the installation guides are not corrected in the guide themselves but in the appropriate SAP notes So it is essential to have all the relevant SAP notes
143. ation see the installation guide In this case prepare both the local and the remote host for the SAPinst GUI Prepare the system for the SAPinst GUI As part of preparing the system for SAPinst you need to prepare for the SAPinst GUI This includes the installation of the Java Runtime Environment JRE Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 205 For more information for preparing the System for SAPinst see the installation guide 2a and 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 Installation activities for installing a Windows application server Follow these steps to install a Windows application server 1 Prepare the installation DVDs For information about how to prepare the installation DVDs see the installation guide 2b and 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 2 Execute SAPinst Installing an SAP instance using SAPinst is described in detail in the installation guide 2b Refer to 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 The installation guide tells you how to run SAPinst to install one or more SAP instances It describes an installation where SAPinst GUI and SAPinst server are running on the same host Follow the instructions in this guide and in the appropriate SAP notes Each SAP instance requires a separate installation directory Do not delete any of the installation directories until the system is complete
144. ation activities vvvy From the Table of Contents of the SAP NetWeaver 04 Installation Guide SAP Supply Chain Management Server 4 1 ABAP IBM server iSeries we show you the considerations planning and preparation activities before the installation and the post installation steps In this guide there are also special checklists for gt SAP SCM Central System gt SAP SCM Distributed System gt Dialog Instance Implementation considerations gt Basic system variants gt Installation components gt Distribution of installation components for SAP SCM ABAP SAP SCM ABAP Java SAP Web AS Java for SAP SCM Installation planning activities gt Required documentation SAP notes SAP Service Marketplace SAP Library Integration of LDAP Directory Services System configuration Hardware and software requirements Multiple SAP systems on a single System i server vvvy Installation preparations activities gt Required installation CDs or DVDs Preparing the installation CDs or DVDs Using the CD Browser Dialog gt Command Line Shell Interpreters on the System i server Qp2Term Qp2Shell and the OS 400 Portable Application Solution Environment Installing the Qshell gt Checking and adjusting i5 OS system values Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 163 Setting the time zone environment variable Adjusting startup program QSTRUP Distribution of libraries
145. ation server Hardware requirements Software requirements and Other Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 203 2 Check for the Windows file system Check that you are using the Windows File System NTFS on hosts where you want to install the SAP system and database NTFS supports full Windows security and long file names Do not install the SAP directories on a FAT partition 3 Check the Windows domain structure You do not need this step for a local installation In Windows you can implement either of the following domain models for the SAP system Extra domain In this model the SAP system is embedded in its own domain which is specially defined for SAP A second domain exists for the user accounts In Windows the SAP domain and user domain must be incorporated in a domain tree In this tree the user accounts must form the root domain and the SAP domain must be a child domain of this Single domain In this model the SAP system and the user accounts are included in a single domain You cannot create local users and groups on the host that is used as domain controller Therefore SAP does not support running an SAP instance including the database instance on the host where the DNS service is installed For a domain installation we recommend that you check that all SAP system and database hosts are members of a single Windows domain This is recommended for all SAP system setups 4 Prepare System i u
146. ations on System i Models Special instructions for the system copy include gt Make a temporary change to the instance profile of the TARGET SID and set rdisp wp_no_btc 0 on operating system level in the IFS Remember the old value gt During the system copy when SAPinst starts the system and waits for the confirmation All Jobs on SELW or SEMW gt Login to the TARGET SID SAP system and call report BTCTRNS1 gt Change back rdisp wp_no_btc in the instance profile on operating system level in the IFS Homogeneous system copy activities Following the installation login with TARGET SIDOFR and follow these steps 1 Set the system to delete the journal receivers automatically WRKJRNA R3TARGET SIDDATA QSQURN If delete receivers is not set to YES then call CHGJRN JRN R3TARGET SIDDATA QSQUJRN DLTRCV YES Note With DLTRCV YES you delete each journal receiver every time when a new journal receiver is attached to the journal Remember that a homogeneous system copy produces a large amount of journal receiver entries If your journal receivers are located in a separate ASP make sure that the ASPs do not overflow With the setting DLTRCV YES and the missing journal receiver there is no change to do a roll forward or to do a roll backward for the time period where no journal receiver exists So do this set DLTRCV YES only if you are quite sure that you no longer need the deleted journal receiver Do not set DL
147. b AS Java system as described in the documentation Installation Guide SAP Exchange Infrastructure 3 Install SAP Partner Connectivity Kit on the business partner system landscape Regarding the installation prerequisites gt You must not use an SAP Web AS 6 40 derived from an upgrade gt Do not use any business system for example SAP CRM or SAP SCM with a Unicode SAP Web AS 6 40 basis as installation host for SAP Exchange Infrastructure gt During the installation of the J2EE Engine you should choose the XI specific installation option for the J2EE Engine in UME User Group management Use SAPGUI Transaction PFCG 4 5 3 SAP XI documentation reference 90 The following documentation is available for SAP Exchange Infrastructure gt Technical Infrastructure Guide SAP Exchange Infrastructure available on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic Planning at http service sap com instguidesnw04 gt Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server ABAP on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt gt Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server Java on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt gt SAP Front End Installation Guide gt Installation Guide SAP Exchange Infrastructure gt Installation Guide SAP Partner Connectivity Kit gt Configuration Guide SAP Exchange Infrastructure available on the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com ibc An Overview of Installing
148. bution for information about how to set up raw devices on Linux 9 Exporting and mounting directories Exporting and mounting directories is an essential feature on Linux systems to share directories that is often used in SAP environments for example for the transport and management system TMS For more information about exporting and mounting directories see the installation guide 3a and refer to 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 10 Export Directories via NFS for System i servers To export directories via NFS perform the following steps on your System i host The following steps assume that the central instance host is the NFS server a Log on as user QSECOFR to the NFS server b On System i models enter STRNFSSVR ALL After an IPL of the System i host the NFS server has to be started again to reactivate the mounted directories on the Linux application server c To export a directory from a local file system make the following configuration changes i Add a line to the local file etc exports etc exports sapmnt ANON 1 ROOT Linux host ANON 1 ensures that no requests from unknown users are allowed ROOT permits users from Linux host to access the exported directory on the System i host with QSECOFR rights ii To activate the changes that is inform the NFS daemon about the changes performed in etc exports enter CHGNFSEXP A d Log on as user root to the
149. cape or integrating the business systems of your 84 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models business partners Theoretically you can integrate all kind of business systems by using SAP XI components Integration Server Integration Builder and Adapter Environment In addition business partners can connect to your business systems by using SAP Partner Connectivity Kit SAP Exchange Infrastructure provides multiple communication options that take into account the capability of involved business systems to exchange content amongst them Business systems are determined by the existing system landscape that you want to integrate taking into account both SAP business systems and non SAP business systems We define the following parameters to determine a communication option gt Type of business system Since the communication occurs using the XML messaging service of the Integration Engine the capability of sending or receiving XML messages is crucial for involved business systems gt Type of messaging concept middleware technology to be used for exchanging content Different messaging concepts are used such as Intermediate Documents IDocs Remote Function Call RFC Files from to file system or FTP server Java Messaging Service JMS JDBC Data Access SOAP RNIF Plain HTTP Mail SAP BC protocol Marketplace Access Proxy based messaging There are so cal
150. cated host You can find both topics in the SAP Library at SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver Technical Operations Manual Management of the SAP Web Application Server Java Management of the SAP Web Application Server Java Note You can perform this step after step 1 at any stage Configure a cluster to increase portal performance and ensure availability To install the J2EE Engine in a cluster on several physical machines make sure that The time on the different machines is synchronized The language locale settings are equal on all machines Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 83 Note Be aware that time synchronization on i5 OS depends on the i5 OS level In i5 OS V5R3 you synchronize the system time on System i configurations with the system value QTIMZON and QUTCOFFSET For more details search the System i Information Center http publib boulder ibm com infocenter iseries v5r4 index jsp with the keyword Time synchronization The different locale settings result in severe database inconsistencies This is because when the deployed applications store information in the database they expect one and the same locale settings on all cluster nodes Both time and locale differences lead to reduced supportability of the system as the mapping between the events on different machines is not obvious and this increases the resolution time for any problems that can occur Optional Move the
151. ce only exists if you installed J2EE Add In then the central instance and finally all dialog instances e To check whether your SAP system started successfully for every installed instance enter the following command WRKACTJOB SBS R3_nn Every instance runs in its own subsystem R3_nn where nn is the instance number To stop the SAP system a Log on your System i server as SIDOFR or SIDOPR b To stop an SAP system enter the STOPSAP command and choose F4 c Enter the SAP system ID for example C11 and instance number for example 90 Repeat this for each instance that you want to stop We recommend that you retain the default value ENV for the SAP system ID ENV is replaced by the correct value for the SAP system ID Make sure that you stop the instances in the correct order First all dialog instances then the central instance and finally the central services instance only exists if you installed J2EE Add In For each stopped instance the user you used to shut down the system receives a message from the operating system 3 Log on to the SAP system You need to check that you can log on to the SAP system using the standard users There are two standard users in the SAP system after the installation Table 5 3 Initial SAP user and standard passwords after a standard installation 130 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Prerequisites You have already started the SAP system and installed a fr
152. ce is a tool for indexing many types of documents that can be handled in the SAP or CRM environment Documents can subsequently be found by means of different search strategies In order to use this service you must install a search engine that fulfills the SAP IMS Server API specification for example the TREX search engine The IMS installation is part of the Text Retrieval amp Information Extraction installation TREX search engine The TREX search engine included in the Text Retrieval amp Information Extraction installation offers the same functions as those of a standard text retrieval engine It fulfills the SAP IMS Server API specification and must be used in combination with the SAP Index Management Service SAP IMS The TREX search engine is used as a special purpose search engine in the R 3 and E Commerce environment It provides advanced features for error tolerant and similarity searching It is optimized for indexing mass data such as in catalog scenarios or in an R 3 extended help environment The SAP search engine is able to index and search plain text and HTML documents in the form of a file destination or text from memory Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 147 SAPconnect SAPconnect enables external communication components to be connected to the SAP system As the standard interface for external communication SAPconnect supports telecommunication services such as faxing paging the Internet and X 4
153. cedure with an SAP InstGUI client The SAP installation on System i servers consists of a client that is running on a Windows PC and a server so called TMK server on System i models If multiple installations are running in parallel there can be multiple instances of the TMK server each represented by a subsystem TMKSVRnn where nn is the instance number of the TMK server When the TMK server is started the subsystem TMKSVRnn is started along with a job named DISPATCH If an SAPinst client connects to the server a job SAPINST is started It spawns multiple jobs to perform the different tasks that are necessary during an installation The TMK server is installed as the first part of the installation that handles the communication for the installation SAP Installation Client Server Concept for iSeries SAPinsUTMKSVR User Profile SAPINST TCP IP Sockets Password L Ce WV SAPAPBLO Database ino ha jusr sap SAPinst era oe Windows tmp lt SiD gt CD CBOs Copy SAP WebaS Installation Client Perform OS operations User dialogs Unpack kernel XML script execution Load database Figure 2 23 The Client Server concept for an SAP installation on System i servers The installation client is responsible for the user dialogs Based on XML scripts and the user input it drives the installation and requests different operations from the TMK server These include certain checks executing ope
154. ch is somewhat slower than a local connection You can spot such incorrect configurations in the developer trace If the fields named dbjobname mostly QXDARECVR SAP database shadow job and wpjobname contain different values on a DB server instance then you have an example of the situation described above This is the normal situation from Release 6 10 onward if the following profile parameter has been set dbs db4 allow_cancel 1 gt If in spite of the correct implementation of the points given above the system performance is still unsatisfactory then check the sizing of the whole system The database server in particular can be too small if a central instance is installed on the same server Contact your IBM account manager in order to arrange for a sizing check Meanwhile you can reduce the load on the database server by shifting some other processes to the application server for example batch jobs or updates 6 1 5 The System i file system of a 3 tier landscape There are two important SAP directory trees in a 3 tier system landscape gt sapmnt gt usr sap The sapmnt directory tree is a specific feature for SAP on UNIX type operating systems including System i models It is the location where shared file systems of other hosts that belong to the SAP system landscape should be mounted In most UNIX cases this is accomplished by Network File System NFS mounts The i5 OS mechanism to share Integrated File System I
155. cial SAP installations 217 G tmp KernelQDs CD51019656_SAPINST_470SR1i_ASCII SAPINST AS400 Gos E 7KB Befehlsscript von W g Dieser Ordner ist online Typ Befehlsscript von windows NT Gr e 6 82 KB SETUP CMD Befehisscript von Windows NT Ge ndert 18 02 2003 09 51 Gr e 6 82 KB Attribute Schreibgeschatzt Figure 6 7 Starting SAPINST 470SR1_ASCII 6 Choose Custom specific Installation Type as shown in Figure 6 8 SAPinst Installation Default Parameters Figure 6 8 Custom specific installation type of the SAPInst 218 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models m Welcome iS 15 x Welcome SAP Welcome to the System Landscape Implementation Manager SAPinst SAP Ri3 Enterprise 4 71 for DB2 UDB for iSeries Default Export SAP R 3 Enterprise 4 71 for DB2 UDB for iSeries Figure 6 9 Start installation process 470_ASCII 7 For a standalone gateway select Cancel for the installation process after the step for the kernel installation has finished successfully 6 2 3 Installing an SAP Gateway instance Release 4 6D The prerequisites for an SAP Gateway instance are described at this site http service sap com instguides Then go to SAP Components gt SAP R 3 gt Release 4 6C SR2 SAP R 3 Installation IBM AS 400 The installation assumes that Your are signed on as user QSECOFR The objects required for installation are
156. ckage It is very useful to have all the software patches ready even on disk when you start the installation procedure You can get all the SAP patches from the SAP Software Distribution Center at http service sap com SWDC Again take care to download all the right patches To download all the SAP patches that are not available on the CDs or DVDs of the installation pack takes a lot of time sometimes more than the SAP installation itself You can save a lot of time if these patches are downloaded and ready at the time when you or your SAP installation partner starts the SAP installation process The Copy CDs and DVDs to hard disk topic Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 details different ways of copying CDs and DVDs to hard disk devices gt Create your own installation roadmap Take time to set up your own installation roadmap Ensure that you meet all the runtime requirements of the installation procedures which can take some hours Consider all the things that have to be done especially for your installation You can also contact an experienced project and basis consultant Note It is important that your hardware server provider and your SAP basis installer work together in advance of the SAP installation 2 1 2 Example mySAP ERP 2004 SR1 Planning and Preparation Guide SAP installation guides discuss the installation preparation Here is a typical example from mySAP ERP 2004 SR1 Planning and
157. cklist Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation on page 5 through Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite on page 107 discuss the concepts preparation and installation of SAP applications Chapter 6 Special SAP installations on page 183 focuses on the techniques about how to use and how to perform special installation scenarios within an SAP system For more detailed information about planning and installation steps and other considerations when installing an SAP application refer to the formal SAP documentation The SAP planning and installation manuals and configuration guides are found in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com instguides The SAP Service Marketplace Web sites require you to use the user ID and password supplied to you by SAP Note This Redpaper is not a single documentation source for guidelines for an SAP installation Information in this paper may or may not be relevant for releases after NetWeaver 2004 Always refer to the official SAP installation guides and the SAP notes for the SAP component you are installing to obtain the most current information Copyright IBM Corp 2006 All rights reserved ix Refer to Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 for information about the activities involved in maintaining and operating an SAP system such as Configuration options Setting up two or three tier installation Installing and upgrad
158. completely 3 Go back to the Installation Guide and continue reading it 4 When you come across a reference to SAP note B put aside the Installation Guide and O ON O start reading SAP note B While reading SAP note B you find a reference to two other SAP notes C and D Put aside SAP note B and read SAP note C completely Then read SAP note D completely Return to SAP note B and continue reading it As advised in the Installation Guide go to SAP note E and complete reading it Return to the Installation Guide and finish reading it 0 Return to the Master Guide and finish reading it Note For a successful installation of an SAP solution application follow the SAP installation guides precisely Even if you are an experienced installer do not make the mistake of performing the installation steps without referring to the installation guides Study and follow SAP notes and other documentation mentioned in the SAP master and installation guides You can find all the necessary documentation in the SAP Marketplace at http service sap com instguides Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 15 Figure 2 6 shows you the entry point to this Web page Here you also see the SAP application areas where SAP installation guides are available including gt Industry Solutions gt mySAP Business Suite Solutions gt SAP NetWeaver gt SAP Components gt SAP xApps gt Other documentation Installat
159. component is partially described here in the book Always you find the installation guides for any of these software components in the SAP Marketplace at http service sap com instguides gt For your SAP software component gt For your platform gt For that the activities you want to perform Overview master guide Planning and preparation Installation and post installation Note Not all of these guides are always available in the SAP Marketplace for all of the software components Overall installation sequence Figure 5 13 on page 175 contains the overall installation sequence of mySAP SRM containing the components of all mySAP SRM business scenarios Depending on the business scenarios of mySAP SRM that you want to implement your installation sequence can only contain a subset of these software components For more information concerning the installation sequence of each business scenario see section Business Scenario Implementation Sequence in the SRM Master Guide 174 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models You can install software components on the same level in parallel for example different project groups can install SAP R 3 and SAP XI in parallel This information is especially valuable if you want to implement more than one mySAP SRM business scenario at a time Installation Sequence of mySAP SRM Remark Some of these software components may be optional for some all bus
160. components There are a lot of SAP components and applications that we cannot describe in this document because their installation steps are beyond the scope of this book However we want to mention them and advise where you can find more details gt Planning an SAP upgrade After explaining the numerous SAP installations we provide a short extract about how to plan an SAP upgrade 6 1 Installation of a 3 tier landscape In this section we explain a 3 tier SAP system landscape especially in respect to an installation on IBM System i models Before we describe the installation aspects we give you definitions of a 3 tier system landscape and show you where you find more and detailed information and the official installation guides In this section we also mention the installation of a 3 tier landscape together with Windows and Linux application servers 6 1 1 Definition of a 3 tier landscape This section discusses how you can distribute the SAP instances for the different SAP system variants You can install all mandatory SAP system components on either one of the following options gt Asingle host 2 tier gt Separate hosts 3 tier In contrast to a 2 tier installation 3 tier systems require additional tasks in order to ensure problem free operations Typical problems are described along with their solutions and parameter settings If system problems or performance bottlenecks occur then the points listed here should be check
161. cts as soon as they are saved in the application system The SAP Event Manager can automatically inform the decision maker in critical situations that action is required for example automatic re scheduling of the subsequent process step when a delay has occurred gt Exchange and query information between partners for example e mail or Internet liveCache for SAP SCM liveCache is based on SAP DB technology and ensures the highest mySAP SCM performance liveCache is SAP s state of the art memory based computing technology for real time high speed processing of very large data volumes The main capabilities of SAP s new memory resident object oriented technology are the following gt Application logic execution right where the data is stored in order to avoid network load 158 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models gt Aggregation of relational data structures retrieved from the database into application specific optimized data representations in main memory As a result you can perform optimization and planning tasks in minutes or seconds gt Built in business functionality in the form of C object methods gt Semantic synchronization with the SAP database gt Ready to exploit 64 Bit technology For more information concerning liveCache technology infrastructure requirements and performance recommendations see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com scm liveCache is av
162. d on Back end systems 1 Optional SAP Business Information Warehouse a Install SAP BW b Install BI Content Add On c Install R 3 Plug In 2 Optional SAP R 3 a Install SAP R 3 4 6C SP47 4 70 SP20 or 5 00 SPOO b Install SAP Content Server on R 3 System Host c Install R 3 Plug In Optional Internet Transaction Server ITS Optional Host B 1 Install SAP Web Application Server Installing the required languages Install Plug In PI BASIS Install SAP cProject Suite 3 10 Install SAP Content Server on WebAS Host PON 5 5 8 Scenario mySAP PLM Design Collaboration with cFolders This is the implementation scenario of PLM with cProjects and cFolders Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 169 Technical Infrastructure Figure 5 12 provides an overview of the recommended technical infrastructure of the Design Collaboration scenario Optional cFolders C Optional Ba j HTTP External SAP Web Application HTTP Optional Partners Server pun i HostA ve cFolders SAP Web Application RFC Part of Server RF SN rai c maaana cProject Suite 3 10 pe4 neon C Technical SAP J2EE Engine cPrelectoultes 10 documents drawings SAP ABAP Engine SAP J2EE Engine structure information SAP Java Connector SAP ABAP Engine SAP Content Server SAP Java Connector RFC SNC R 3 DMS documents material BOM Figure 5 12 mySAP PLM Design Collaboration with cFolders
163. d order processing systems you can link your procurement processes to a plan driven strategy that gets you the materials you need for core business processes exactly when you need them Plan Driven Procurement integrates seamlessly with back end systems such as enterprise planning and production systems The scenario allows you to integrate operational procurement with your existing supply chain management solution gt Service Procurement E procurement has produced great opportunities for saving costs in the purchasing process However companies generally fail to extend cost saving measures to services even though services amount to more than 50 of annual purchasing volumes The Service Procurement business scenario within mySAP SRM covers a wide range of services such as temporary labor consulting maintenance and facility management gt Catalog Content Management The Catalog Content Management business scenario provides a solution for creating maintaining and managing content within your e procurement application gt Strategic Sourcing The sourcing application in SAP Enterprise Buyer provides professional purchasers with a wide range of actions and information to help them source their requirements As a purchaser you can use the interface to process the requirements and determine the best source of supply After you have done this you can create a purchase order or contract 172 An Overview of Installing SAP Application
164. d to end business processes gt Flexible and process based deployment options gt An open adaptable technology platform powered by SAP NetWeaver 138 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models mySAP CRM belongs to the family of solutions included in the mySAP Business Suite Figure 5 4 shows the mySAP CRM release strategy and the classification of the CRM documentation SAP CRM 3 1 Post Ramp Up June 03 Documentation Development News Release Notes e Business Scenarios Application Help Installation and Upgrade Guides Education Ramp Up Knowledge Transfer RKT SAP Solutions Training SAP CRM 3 0 SAP Solution Academy Courses SAP CRM 3 0 SAP CRM 4 0 Ramp Up SAP CRM 3 1 SAP CRM 4 0 Post Ramp Up Edition 2004 Nov 03 Oct 05 SAP CRM 4 0 incl Edition 2004 Documentation Statement of Direction Detailed overview of new and enhanced functionality The book can be ordered for customers through their SAP account manager e Release Notes e Application Help e Solution Manager Installation and Upgrade Guides Education e Ramp Up Knowledge Transfer RKT RKT Workshops SAP Solutions Training SAP CRM 5 0 Ramp Up SAP CRM 5 0 Post Ramp Up June 06 SAP CRM 5 0 Documentation Statement of Direction Release Notes Application Notes Application Help Solution Manager e Installation and Upg
165. dapter Engine J2SE Installation X Figure 3 16 Start installing the NetWeaver ABAP stack Figure 3 17 on page 54 shows you the paths to these variants especially to the Java stack Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 53 i SAPinst SAPINST IBAS03 BASYCS COM Welcome Welcome to Net Veaver Installation T E SAP NetWeaver 04 Support Release 1 Y GIABAP System Y IBM DB UDB for iSeries D Unicode D Non Unicode 2 Java Add In for ABAP Y IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries S Central System Java System Finalization Dialog Instance Finalization Distributed System Java Database Schema Installation r Central Instance Finalization re Dialog Instance Finalization S E Java System IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries Z Central System Custom Installation Java System Dialog Instance Installation Y Distributed System amp Central Instance Host Preparation eI Java Database Installation Java Central Instance Installation Dialog Instance Installation D C Netweaver Components Running on Java ees ENE Figure 3 17 Start installing the NetWeaver Java stack 3 Provide some parameters for the installation Input Phase see Figure 3 18 on page 55 SAP System ID SID In our example ERX 54 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models I SAPinst SAPINST IBASO3 SAP ERP 2004 SR1 gt ABAP System gt IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries gt
166. defined in accordance with SAP note 428855 Because of the higher database response times the SAP buffers have more significance in a 3 tier system than in a 2 tier system For this reason avoid nightly system restarts on 3 tier systems SAP note 202593 describes how an online backup can be used to avoid stopping the system in order to take a backup If TCP IP is used on a 3 tier system then the CHKXDA tool described in SAP note 450351 should also be installed and permanently activated on System i models Refer to the CHKXDA SAP Tool topic in Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 for information about the CHKXDA tool The database monitor causes an additional load on the database server If you do not analyze the statistical information about SQL commands for example in transaction ST04 then you can switch off the database monitor with the following profile parameter setting as4 dbmon enab1e 0 Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 187 If the database monitor is to be activated then ensure that all the latest PTFs are installed for example Informational APAR 1113868 for i5 OS V5R3 See SAP note 135369 and SAP note 321729 for more information gt If the database server can be addressed via different host names then configure the local instances in such a way that the host name matches that found with CFGTCP Option 12 case sensitive Otherwise the work processes run via Unix Domain Sockets or TCP IP whi
167. depending on the SAP components you install IDES systems are installed complete with example data in several SAP clients so they need approximately 80 GB Every empty client that only Approximately 300 MB Production Systems only have the three contains SAP customizing and clients delivered by SAP 000 001 and 066 and the production some users and no master data client Development Systems sometimes need up to five additional customer clients customizing development data migration production preparation or module roll out and so on Additional space that is partially Between 20 GB and 50 GB and more temporary used space allocated when an SAP instance strongly depending on the workload and the SAP memory is started and partially allocated especially for user authorizations table buffer sort areas and during operation internal tables of ABAP reports and transaction The Extended memory profile parameter em initial_size_MB is pre allocated most other memory used by the SAP system is dynamically allocated and limited by other profile parameters SQL packages automatically Approximately 5 GB 10 GB or more Old invalid and overflowed generated from the SAP system SQL Packages are deleted during the start of the central instance After installing database PTFs or applying a LIB_DBSL kernel patch delete all SQL Packages of the SAP systems using the command DLTR38PKG 20 An Overview of Inst
168. der the topics Solution Life Cycle Management gt Software Change Management Change and Transport System Client Copy and Transport If you intend to install the SAP Exchange Infrastructure on your SAP NetWeaver Application Server make sure that you use the profile SAP_UCSV Do not use the profile SAP_CUST as stated in the SAP Library documentation For more information see the documentation Installation Guide SAP Exchange Infrastructure on SAP Service Marketplace under the topics SAP Components SAP Exchange Infrastructure at http service sap com Check the RFC destination In a system configuration where the central and database instance run on different hosts you have to test whether the database host has been correctly set up as a remote function call RFC destination The database host is defined as an RFC destination to enable the system to access monitoring data that is collected for the database and operating system 2 a Choose Tools gt Administration Network RFC destinations or call transaction SM59 The initial window of the transaction displays the different RFC connection types b Expand TCP IP connections and double click SAPOSCOL_DB_hostname A window displaying information about the selected destination opens c Choose Test Connection If you find that the destination has not been set up correctly you have to maintain it For more information see the topics in the SAP Library
169. ding SAP notes to succeed with a correct and stable SAP installation 1 Plan your installation and prepare the system requisites 2 Actualize the Installation Master CD also called the SAPInst CD Prepare the System i server and the Windows Installation server PC for the Installation Tool TMKSVR Install the SAP Installation Tool TMKSVR Start SAPinst from the TMKSVR as the general SAP installation environment w Select the SAP component you want to install Start the SAP installation Follow the instructions you are guided to from the SAPInst Perform all the post installation steps O ON DOO Ff 0 Finish the installation For information about steps 1 to 3 listed previously refer to gt SAP Component Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server ABAP 6 40 SR1 IBM server iSeries Part Planning and Preparation For information about steps 4 to 10 listed previously refer to the gt SAP Component Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server ABAP 6 40 SR1 IBM server iSeries Part II Installation and Post Installation In the following chapters we provide an overview of Steps 1 to 5 Then we highlight the main topics for the installation of selected mySAP application Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 37 38 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Installation of the SAP Web Application Server This chapter describes the installation of the SAP Web A
170. dows kernel DVD SAP Java DVD includes IGS folder IGS_SOFT for the installation of IGS Database instance SAP Installation Master DVD SAP Export DVD For the installation of a Unicode SAP system the Unicode SAP kernel DVD is required For the installation of a non Unicode SAP system the non Unicode SAP kernel DVD is required Use one of the following methods to make DVDs available in parallel Before the installation e Have sufficient DVD drives e Copy DVDs manually to the local hard disks Do not use network drives for your DVDs During the installation Use the SAPinst CD Browser dialog that is you can check the entered location and then copy the entire DVD to the path you entered in column Copy Package to 2 Install an SAP instance using SAPinst In this section we describe some of the prerequisites before starting SAPinst for all instance Make sure that your operating system does not delete the temporary directory TEMP TMP TMPDIR or tmp and its subdirectories when the system is rebooted SAPinst normally creates the installation directory sapinst_instdir directly below the temporary directory SAPinst finds the temporary directory by checking the value of the environment variables TEMP TMP or TMPDIR If no value is set for these variables SAPinst uses tmp as default installation directory The SAPinst Self Extractor extracts the SAPinst executables to the temporary directory TEMP TMP TMPDIR or t
171. dware requirements Do not mix the hardware requirements with the requirements for a running production system with your user data The hardware requirements mentioned in this section are only for the pure installation procedure gt DVD drive on System i servers or on the Windows SAPinst GUI host gt 4 3 GB of temporary disk space for every required installation DVD that you copy to a local hard disk There are approximately five to ten DVDs that you have to copy to hard disk gt Before installing an SAP system on System i configurations you must obtain detailed sizing information from IBM or a competent IBM Business Partner Your installation crashes if you have not efficiently or correctly configured your hardware requirements 2 2 3 Operating system and licensed program requirements 18 This section provides details about the operating system requirements SAP Web Application Server 6 40 Service Release 1 SR 1 is the basis for nearly all SAP applications This Web AS 6 40 SR1 is released for OS 400 V5R2 and i5 OS V5R3 and V5R4 For information about which i5 OS versions have been released for SAP on System i servers see SAP note 410783 For known problems gt i5 OS V5R4 see SAP note 853564 gt OS 400 V5R1 and V5R2 see SAP note 392165 gt i5 OS V5R3 see SAP note 743113 For each SAP installation on a System i model with an ABAP and Java stack you have to install the following IBM licensed products and options
172. e 12 Install additional languages 13 Set up the transport directory 14 Prepare a Windows user account and i5 OS user profile 15 Install TMKSVR and create an installation share 16 Install the SAP front end software 17 Check the general information about preparing the system for SAPinst 18 Prepare the system for the SAPinst GUI ONDARON Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 101 Optionally you can decide to use LDAP for SAP Logon or Microsoft Management Console MMC Then you have to prepare the active directory for use with the SAP system Note For all these SAP SolMan preparation activities points 1 through 18 see the corresponding considerations and procedures as described in the 5 2 3 mySAP ERP installation preparation activities on page 116 4 8 6 SAP SolMan installation activities 1 Prepare the installation DVDs We recommend that you make all required DVDs available in parallel Using Media Information for mySAP NetWeaver 04 SR1 identify the required DVDs for your installation and keep them separate from the remaining DVDs This avoids mistakes between DVDs with similar names so that you use the correct DVDs for your installation Table 4 3 shows the required DVDs for an dialog instance installation on a Windows application server Table 4 3 Requested DVDs for an SAP SolMan installation Installation option Required DVD SAP Solution Manager 3 2 Master DVD Dialog instance SAP Win
173. e 789188 SAP Web AS 6 40 SR1 on IBM server iSeries SAP note 707805 iSeries Patches for SAPinst installation kits Note Do not hesitate to switch off your firewall software if it troubles you too much Figure 3 5 shows you a screen from extracting the ISERPACK with SAPCAR i C WINNT system32 cmd exe oy x SAPCAR could not open for writing SAPINST 0 460 NS460 JAR ingmyxml jar Cerror 2 8 Zugriff verweigert K tmp CDsND51031149_ECC5 _SRi_InstMasterNIM15_08400_64 gt sapcar xuf K tmp CDs D 51631149_ECC5 _SR1i_InstMaster IM15_084066_64 ISERPACK _4 26660186 SAR SAPCAR processing archive tmp CDs D51631149_ECC5 _SR1i_InstMaster IM15_08 466 64 ISERPACK _4 26666186 SAR SAPINST SAPINST 0S 408 SAPINST 0S 406 AS 406 SAPINST 0S466 AS466 JAR SAPINST 0S8466 NS406 JAR ingmyxml jar SAPINST 0S406 AS406 JAR instgui jar SAPINST 0S460 NS466 messages dtd SAPINST 0S466 AS460 messages xml SAPINST 0S466 NS466 sapinst exe SAPINST 0S466 AS466 startinstgui hbat SAPINST 0S406 AS 40G TMKSUR SAPINST 0S 40G AS 40G TMKSUR SAPCAR EXE SAPINST 0S8406 AS 466 TMKSUR SETUP EXE SAPINST 0S8466 AS 46G TMKSUR TMKSUR SAR PCAR 14 file lt s gt extracted X tmp CDs D51631149_ECC5 _SRi_InstMaster IM15_0 406_64 gt _ Figure 3 5 SAPCAR the ISERPACK XXXXXXXXXXXXX x SA 3 2 5 Installing the TMK server First install the installation tool TMKSVR that handles the communication for the Installation Aft
174. e ENTER e The Add Environment Variable ADDENVVAR window opens In the Initial value field enter the required time zone environment variable For the complicated format and value of the time zone environment variable refer to i5 OS online help e SAP note 697353 7 Modify the startup program QSTRUP a Retrieve the default QSTRUP start program with the command RTVCLPGM normally in QGPL QCLSRC b Adapt Edit the QSTRUP start program normally with EDTF c Create the CL Program with CRTCLPGM normally in QGPL QSTRUP 118 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models d Adapt the i5 OS system value QSTRUPPGM before the next IPL Example 5 2 shows a QSTRUP program Example 5 2 Example of a QSTRUP program L START ADDITIONAL PROGRAM FS STARTTCP INSERT QSYS STRSBS SBSD QSERVER MONMSG MSGID CPF0000 STRTCPSVR SERVER EDRSQL INSERT MONMSG MSGID CPF0000 INSERT START DDM AND HOST SERVERS FOR TOOLBOX JDBC DRIVER STRTCPSVR SERVER DDM INSERT MONMSG MSGID CPF0000 INSERT STRHOSTSVR SERVER ALL INSERT MONMSG MSGID CPF0000 INSERT CREATE QFILESVR 400 SUBDIRECTORIES MKDIR DIR QFileSvr 400 lt system host gt INSERT MONMSG MSGID CPF0000 INSERT LA E Note Starting with i5 OS V5R3 the time zone is controlled by system value QTIMZON and the environment variable is set automatically by the initial program You
175. e Java based graphical user interface SAPinst GUI regardless of your system variant Therefore you always need a Java runtime environment JRE on the host where SAPinst is to run The JRE is included in the JDK 3 2 3 Copying CDs and DVDs to System i directories 44 After the rootbin share is available you must copy the CD or DVD data that is necessary for your installation to the directories on the System i server so that they can be accessed on both the PC and the System i server We recommend that you copy the data into subdirectories under tmp sid where sid is the designated system ID for the system to be installed Note The path names must not contain spaces Figure 3 4 on page 45 shows you an example after the mySAP ECC 5 0 SR 1 Master CD is copied to the rootbin share An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models EN Neng C DSDS 031149 ECC50_SR1 _InstMaster IM15_ 0S400 _64 SAPINST GS400 AS 400 ECCOA au O eee laj x naicht Favoriten Extras 2 Ea H Zur ck E B Suchen Borcher KE SE amp a Adresse C x tmp CDs D51031149_ECC50_SA1_InstMaster IM15_0S4001_64 SAPINST 0S 400 AS 400 ECCO4SR WEBAS ABAP DB4 v Wechseln zu Bea r Ordner Dateiname OO BOI WNT 0ti C S aH nuc Dateiordner 04 05 2006 14 21 E wuTemp uc Dateiordner 04 05 2006 14 21 amp D51031149 D H rootbin auf Ibas03 G B tootbin auf Ibas03 K
176. e Portal platform The Knowledge Management platform whose major functional areas are Content Management Search and Classification Collaboration Predefined content and tools for creating content With SAP Enterprise Portal you receive the portal Knowledge Management and Collaboration The Portal Platform provides you with the tools to build portals for your target users while the Knowledge Management platform makes it possible to provide access to Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 81 documents and multimedia objects that are stored in an organization s distributed document repositories Collaboration enables virtual teams to work together in synchronous and asynchronous ways directly within SAP Enterprise Portal You can customize the portal for the various users by creating targeted interfaces for the various roles Dedicated interfaces help the users to complete both their general tasks as well as those specific to their professional roles To speed up the process of customizing the portal for each user SAP provides predefined content that is packaged tested and certified by SAP This content is bundled in business packages In addition to these business packages SAP provides a number of tools that customers can use to enhance and customize content including tools for end users for content administrators for business users with no coding experience and for professional programmers 4 4 2 SAP EP
177. e and how to perform special installations on an SAP system We discuss the following topics gt Installation of a 3 tier landscape Homogeneous System i 3 tier landscape Heterogeneous 3 tier landscape with e A Windows application server e A Linux application server With an additional application server you run what is known as a 3 tier landscape In this chapter we describe how to prepare and install an additional application server for both Windows and Linux gt Standalone SAP gateway based on A Web Application Server 6 xx SAP Basis 4 6D With a standalone gateway you can connect a remote database This is an important consideration when exchanging data between an SAP and non SAP system gt Setup an SAP system by system copy The steps to set up an identical SAP system are described for a homogeneous SAP system copy Additionally we mention the function of a heterogeneous system copy gt Installation of SAP systems before Web Application Server Here we give you short note how the installation of an SAP system was done before SAP Web Application Server This might be necessary because already there exists some SAP systems based on previous SAP releases and which could and sometimes must be connected to the current SAP systems For example the extended maintenance of R 3 Release 4 6C is in effect until the year 2009 Copyright IBM Corp 2006 All rights reserved 183 gt Installation of other SAP
178. e applications components with SAP ECC 5 0 for example mySAP CRM mySAP SCM and so on provided that you have the required license The R 3 Plug in enables this integration R 3 Plug in releases are downward compatible with all releases of the SAP components still in mainstream maintenance Therefore you can also integrate lower releases of these components which means that existing business scenarios are still available after upgrading to SAP ECC 5 0 For more information refer to the topics Integration of SAP R 3 Enterprise and SAP Components SAP ERP Central Component at http service sap com r3 plug in mySAP ERP system landscape The mySAP ERP solution consists of ABAP and non ABAP components With certain constraints you can install many of these components on a single host provided you fulfill certain prerequisites This section provides information about how to set up a minimal landscape in which all of the key functional areas can be deployed Several possibilities exist to distribute these components among various hosts The distribution depends on many factors such as sizing security hardware and so on In principle you can choose almost any distribution of components to hosts between the minimal system landscape described in this section and a maximum distributed landscape where every component runs on its own or even multiple hosts If you plan to implement a minimal landscape you must know which business proc
179. e for Basis Release 6 10 for further information 6 2 2 Manually install a gateway instance for a Web Application Server 6 20 For Web Application Server 6 xx the INSTKIT that is delivered with the Installation Master CD does not contain the menu item for the gateway installation Therefore the installation is done manually The installation normally is run with SAPINST Java Runtime 1 3 or higher must be installed on your local PC Windows Installation Host and the environment variables JAVA_HOME and PATH must be set correctly First you install the TMKSVR Follow these steps to install the server 1 Look for the TMKSVR on the SAPINST CD as illustrated in Figure 6 5 on page 217 216 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models N G tmp Kernel Ds CD51019656_SAPINST_4705R1_ASCII SAPINST AS400 TMKS R Dateiname Bins tace por m Dieser Ordner ist online SETUP EXE Anwendung Ge ndert 13 02 2003 13 10 Gr e 64 0 KB Attribute Schreibgeschistzt Figure 6 6 Start Execution of the TMKSVR 470SR1_ASCIlI 3 Create the user SAPINST if it does not yet exist CRTUSRPRF USRPRF SAPINST PASSWORD password USRCLS SECOFR TEXT TestUser for SAP Installation SPCAUT USRCLS 4 Create a local user SAPINST on your Windows Installation Host with ADMIN rights with the same password as on a System i server 5 Invoke SAPINST See Figure 6 7 on page 218 for an illustration Chapter 6 Spe
180. e prerequisites You have completed the SAP system installation The SAP system is up and running On System i configurations a Get the required environment CALL R3SID400 R3INLPGM b Remove the installation DVDs by entering RRM tmp SID c Remove the installation share by entering ADDLIBLE TMKSVR DLTSHARE ROOTBIN RMVLIBLE TMKSVR d Stop and delete TMKSVR by entering ADDLIBLE TMKSVR ENDTMKSVR 0 DLTTMKSVR 0 RMVLIBLE TMKSVR DLTLIB TMKSVR On Windows a If you want to remove the SAPinst installation directory enter the following commands del F S Mapped Drive usr sap sapinst INSTALL DIR rmdir F S Mapped _Drive usr sap sapinst INSTALL DIR Ensure that there is no hanging sapinst process from a former interrupted installation on Windows A hanging sapinst process prevents the file sapinst exe in the installation path from being deleted b To disconnect the installation share enter the following command net use Mapped Drive DELETE c To remove temporary TMKSVR log files enter the following commana del TEMP tmksvr d To remove temporary SAPINST files enter the following command del TEMP sapinst_exe To check whether your environment variable TEMP is set perform the following command echo TEMP If TEMP is not set check TMP and TMPDIR You have chosen one of the three variables TEMP TMP or TMPDIR for your temporary directory If you do not know where the temporary TMKSVR and SAPI
181. e sample programs in any form without payment to IBM for the purposes of developing using marketing or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions IBM therefore cannot guarantee or imply reliability serviceability or function of these programs Copyright IBM Corp 2006 All rights reserved vii Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States other countries or both eServer Cross Site NetServer Redbooks logo God TM CUA Operating System 400 iSeries Domino OS 400 i5 OS DB2 Universal Database Redbooks AIX 5L DB2 System i AIX IBM System i5 AS 400e IMS AS 400 Lotus The following terms are trademarks of other companies Java JDBC JDK JSP JVM J2EE J2SE Sun and all Java based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States other countries or both Microsoft Visual Basic Windows server Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States other countries or both UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States other countries or both Other company
182. e the SAP Library and choose Application Platform SAP Web Application Server ABAP Technology UI Technology Web UI Technology gt ITS SAP Web Studio SAP ITS in the SAP Web Application Server Also refer to SAP note 798532 for enhancements to this documentation This provides the necessary information if you do not want to use the integrated ITS 17 Apply the latest kernel and support packages You use this procedure to apply the latest kernel and support packages for your SAP system from the SAP Service Marketplace a Apply the latest kernel You must always replace the installed kernel with the latest kernel from the SAP Service Marketplace In particular you must replace the installed kernel in the following cases e f you installed the kernel executables locally on every host e f your central instance host runs on a different operating system than your dialog instance host or your gateway instance host For more information about how to download a kernel see SAP note 19466 b Apply the support packages For up to date information about currently recommended combinations of support packages and patches and how to download them see SP Stack gt SAP ERP 2004 on the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com sp stacks See also SAP note 760874 for current support package stack release information Alternatively you can download the support packages from the SAP Service Marketplace at http ser
183. each host from which you want to connect to an SAP BW server using an SAP GUI d Install SAP BW Business Content Add On BI_CONT on the SAP Web AS ABAP system according to SAP notes 774933 and 153967 e Optional For SAP BW Staging with external system as data source install SAP BW Java Components on the SAP Web AS Java system SAP BW Java Components consist of e SAP BI Universal Data Integration e SAP BI Meta Model Repository 3 Optional Installation of Search and Classification TREX Use the following installation parameters for the Search and Classification TREX installation For more information see the documentation Installation Guide Search and Classification TREX Perform the installation steps to set up an RFC connection Automatic language recognition is not required You can adopt the default settings for document languages during the installation of Search and Classification TREX No Python extensions are required After the installation of Search and Classification TREX you have to create a search server relation as described in the Installation Guide Search and Classification TREX After the installation of Search and Classification TREX you must run the report RSTIRIDX in your SAP BW system as stated in the Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server ABAP on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt This component is optional for SAP BW Reporting with Business Ex
184. eb ASABAP Additi ABAP Stack faunas Figure 4 11 SAP Knowledge Warehouse technical system landscape SAP Gateway is required if you use Search and Classification TREX within your scenario It is also required if you run SAP Content Server on a separate host In this case SAP Gateway is used for the import of content updates and for the creation of separate transports If you do not use Search and Classification TREX and have installed SAP Content Server on the SAP Web AS host you do not have to install SAP Gateway For test and demonstration purposes only the SAP KW component that is SAP Web AS SAP Gateway the Web server and SAP Content Server shown in Figure 4 11 can be installed on one host For performance scalability high availability and security reasons we recommend that you do not use this installation on one host as your production landscape For this single host installation of SAP KW you must provide a sufficiently sized server For information about sizing see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com sizing 4 7 2 SAP KW installation steps overview 1 Installation of SAP Web AS 6 40 If you want to run SAP Web AS ABAP and SAP Web AS Java on different hosts Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 95 96 Install the SAP Web AS ABAP system on the first host Install the SAP Web AS Java system on the second host Otherwise install an SAP Web AS ABAP Java
185. ecision making support within a company These tools include query reporting and OLAP functions With the Business Explorer you can evaluate old and current data to varying degrees of detail and from different perspectives on the Web and also in Microsoft Excel It gives a large spectrum of users access to information in SAP BW using the Enterprise Portal the intranet Web application design or mobile technologies mobile telephones with WAP or I mode capabilities and personal digital assistants As an analysis and presentation tool the Business Explorer is responsible for the whole Reporting As part of the mySAP NetWeaver architecture SAP BW draws from and utilizes the capabilities of the other components for business intelligence usage The sum of the functionality of SAP BW and the contribution of other components of mySAP NetWeaver form a platform that represents the next major step in the evolution of business intelligence Depending on what extra components you use and how you configure your SAP BW system you can use SAP BW for different business purposes In general there are staging and reporting scenarios For the staging scenario you can use SAP systems or external databases as data source The reporting scenarios are based on the staging scenario with SAP systems as data source 4 3 2 SAP BW technical system landscape Figure 4 5 on page 78 shows the technical system landscape of SAP BW Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP
186. eck using the SAPinst GUI The installation guide describes the buttons of the SAPINST GUI dialogs input windows installation progress windows message boxes 6 Check interrupted installation with SAPinst Refer to the installation guide 7 Change the SAPinst GUI host You can run the SAPinst GUI in stand alone mode This enables you to change the monitoring host the GUI runs on during installation The Windows host you started sapinst exe from is called sapinst_exe_host The Windows host where you want to run the SAPinst GUI in stand alone mode is called sapinst GUI_ host Prepare the sapinst_GUI_host for the SAP system installation Prepare a Windows user account on the sapinst_GUI_host as described in the Preparing a Windows User Account and iSeries User Profile section in the SAP Solution Manager installation guide Part Planning and Preparation Both computers are in the same network and can ping each other To test this e Log on to the host where you started sapinst exe and enter the command ping sapinst_GUI_ host e Log on to the host where you want to run the SAPinst GUI in stand alone mode and enter the command ping sapinst_exe host The process flow is as follows i Run SAPinst exe on the sapinst_exe_host ii Log off from the SAPinst GUI by selecting the Logoff button iii Run startinstgui bat on the SAPinst_GUI_host 104 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models
187. ectory depending on your specific system landscapes The most straightforward scenario is the use of a single SLD However depending on organizational operational or security reasons it is also possible to have more than one SLD distributed over the system landscape Automatic message forwarding as well as sophisticated data export and import functions are provided to support the operation of multiple SLDs Central Organization One Single Central SLD The best and easiest scenario is the central SLD All data is collected and maintained in a single SLD All requests are routed to this single SLD which contains information about the whole system landscape All clients must be enabled to access the central SLD The use of DNS aliases to address SLD makes it possible to switch SLD hosts very easily This may be necessary for maintenance updates Figure 2 19 on page 31 shows you the System Landscape Directory SLD in a central organization An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Extranet Figure 2 19 System Landscape Directory SLD Central Organization Central SLD for all applications Simplicity is often the key to robust and easy to handle system landscapes The use of only one central SLD for an entire system landscape is shown below Possible SLD clients are the SAP Exchange Infrastructure SAP XI SAP Solution Manager Web Dynpro applications and the SAP NetWeaver Development Infra
188. ects 3 10 Use SAP transaction SAINT in client 000 to install and upgrade to CPROJECTS 310 5 5 7 Scenario mySAP PLM Collaboration Projects Figure 5 11 on page 168 provides an overview of the recommended technical infrastructure of the Collaboration Projects scenario Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 167 External Partners Technical documents drawings structure information Optional cFolders Optional 4 p Optional Host B SAP Web Application Server Firewall cFolders RFC SAP Web Application Part of SNC Server CProject Suite 3 10 jesssspessspenrssesssesees SAP J2EE Engine SAP ABAP Engine cProject Suite 3 10 SAP J2EE Engine SAP Java Connector SAP ABAP Engine SAP Content Server SAP Java Connector RFC SNC R 3 DMS documents material BOM Figure 5 11 mySAP PLM Collaboration Projects technical landscape Mandatory components gt SAP Web Application Server 6 40 SAP cProject Suite is installed as an add on on SAP Web Application Server 6 40 gt SAP cProject Suite 3 10 SAP cProject Suite 3 10 is an add on that you must install on the SAP Web Application Server SAP cProject Suite 3 10 includes two applications cProjects A project management application cFolders A collaboration platform Optional components gt SAP BW You can use SAP BW 3 50 with the BI Content 3 52 Add On for additional evaluations BI Content 3 5 2
189. ed Internet Transaction Server ITS if necessary 9 Apply the latest kernel and Support Packages with the objective of having a Unix kernel 10 Perform file and directory adjustments 11 Change the permissions of the global transport directory 12 Perform a full backup of the installation The following is a backup procedure of a Linux application server Perform a full offline backup at the end of the installation This procedure also describes how to use the backed up data for a restore If you install an SAP Web AS ABAP Java system you could perform the full installation backup after the installation of the J2EE Engine Make sure that you fully back up your database so that you can recover it later if necessary Back up the following directories and files gt All SAP specific directories usr sap SAPSID usr sap trans sapmnt SAPSID Home directory of the user sapsidadm gt The root file system This saves the structure of the system and all configuration files such as file system size logical volume manager configuration and database configuration data This list is only valid for a standard installation The directory usr sap trans is only required for SAP systems that have the ABAP engine installed Log on as user sidadm and stop the SAP dialog instance For more information about operating system specific backup procedures see the operating system documentation Backing up the Installation
190. ed and if necessary corrections made This section discusses the following landscape setups gt A 3 tier landscape in a homogeneous System i landscape In this setup the database and application servers are on System i configurations gt A 3 tier landscape with a database server on a System i server and an application server on Windows gt A 3 tier landscape with a database server on a System i server and an application server on Linux Setting up a 3 tier system a distributed system involves first installing a 2 tier system Then by installing one or more additional application instances you switch to a distributed system also called a 3 tier system The setup of a 2 tier system follows the preparation concept and installation sequence that are described in earlier chapters of this Redpaper 6 1 2 Documentation and installation guides for 3 tier installations SAP 3 tier installation means besides other technical definitions the installation of an additional SAP Web application server So mainly you will want to find out where to find more information about the installation of an SAP Web application server 184 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models The necessary documentation including planning and installation manuals and the following configuration guides are found in the SAP Service Marketplace http service sap com instguides There is no alias or quick link to a special 3 tier area You
191. efer to the CRM Monitoring Installation Guide for instructions about activating the monitoring features of the software components in your CRM landscape The monitoring features allow you to capture important version configuration performance and problem data using a single monitoring system in your CRM landscape Activating the monitoring according to the CRM Monitoring Installation Guide is a prerequisite for efficient and problem free operation and delivery of support Refer to the CRM Monitoring Installation Guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com crm inst SAP Solution Manager SAP provides you with the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently support the implementation of your mySAP CRM solution All information necessary to set up the scenario is delivered exclusively through the SAP Solution Manager content See also the installation guide for the SAP Solution Manager in the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic installation guides at http service sap com solutionmanager Customizing Scout The Customizing Scout is part of the Solution Manager 3 1 that is no additional installation is required The Customizing Scout compares and updates Customizing settings as shown in Figure 5 6 on page 144 Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 143 ECC Dev ECC QA ECC Prod Initial load Customizing Delta load Transport CRM Dev CRM QA CRM Prod Structu
192. em Landscape Directory SLD comes into play SLD is the central directory of system landscape information relevant for the management of your software life cycle It contains a description of your system landscape that is the software components that are currently installed and a repository of software components Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 29 that can theoretically be installed in your landscape such as the software components available from SAP Since this data gets updated automatically SLD provides reliable and up to date system landscape information with as little effort for you as possible In this way SLD acts as a central information provider for SAP and third party tools that use this data to deliver the services you need to keep your landscape up and running The SAP System Landscape Directory SLD is the central information provider for your system landscape You can use SAP Web AS for SLD in the following ways gt Asan SLD server which means that SAP Web AS is the system where the central SLD is located For this you need a Java or an ABAP Java system You have to configure and activate the SLD server after installation gt Asan SLD client which means that you connect SAP Web AS to an existing SLD An SLD client can be either an ABAP Java or ABAP Java system 2 4 2 Multiple landscape scenarios 30 Figure 2 19 on page 31 shows you some examples about how to set up a System Landscape Dir
193. entral SAP Solution Manager system 4 8 2 Software and hardware requirements In this section we provide some hints for the software and hardware for the SAP SolMan The information given is based on the SAP Solution Manager Release 3 2 Software components SAP note 770200 Upgrade Solution Manager 3 1 to 3 2 includes an overview of software components and support package levels that must be installed in your SAP Solution Manager system For information about new releases delta upgrades and support packages see the SAP Software Distribution Center http service sap com swdc Hardware requirements Hardware requirements such as network bandwidth physical memory CPU power and I O capacity are influenced by both business and technological requirements You have to take into account the number of users using the various application components and the load balance in the network To determine the hardware requirements of your SAP Solution Manager system go to the SAP Service Marketplace http service sap com sizing 4 8 3 Scenarios The SAP Solution Manager supports the following scenarios gt Service Desk 98 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Implementation and Distribution Upgrading SAP Solutions Change Request Management Solution Monitoring vvvy These scenarios are described in the following sections Service Desk The Service Desk allows you to create support messages send them
194. equired to generate the SAP Solution Manager key for the installation of mySAP ERP 2004 Without this key the installation process cannot continue Installation sequence ERP Host 1 Install the SAP ECC 5 0 system which includes PI 2004 1 SAP HR and the Enterprise Extensions as shown in Figure 5 2 on page 114 The installation also includes the SAP NetWeaver components SAP_BASIS 640 SAP_ABA 640 SAP_BW 350 and PI BASIS 2004_1_640 For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics mySAP ERP 2004 SAP ECC 5 0 at http service sap com erp inst 2 Install the ABAP Add ons including BI CONT 3 52 or 3 53 FINBASIS 300 ERECRUIT 300 SEM BW 400 LSOFE 300 CPROJECTS 310 and WFMCORE 110_640 Note that FINBASIS is a technical prerequisite for SEM BW WFMCORE requires a separate license For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics mySAP ERP 2004 gt ERP ABAP Add On Components at http service sap com erp inst 3 Install SAP Web AS Java 6 40 If required install the J2EE in add in mode see the following Set heap size to 1024 MB and PermSize to 256 MB If you plan to operate your SAP Exchange Infrastructure on the SAP ERP Central Component host or if you plan to install your Java Web Applications on this server you should install SAP J2EE in the add in mode For production use however you should operate a separate SAP XI system and depending on your requirements a se
195. er Refer to the official SAP documentation for example in the SAP Help Portal or SAP Library where you find online documentation for all SAP application at http help sap com 5 Check that the SAP system services are present You need to check that the SAP system services are correctly installed This helps you to solve problems that you might experience when trying to log on or run the system for the first time a Log on to the SAP system If you have trouble logging on or subsequently experience problems trying to run the system check the following files developer traces located in the directory usr sap SAPSID DVEBMGSno WORK e dev_ms e dev_disp e dev_w0 Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 131 e dev_rd b Call transaction SM50 to check services The system displays a list of services available for the instance that is dialog update enqueue batch and spool If you cannot see the services you can find more information by looking at the files listed previously in the first step c Call transaction SM51 to check all available instances and their services The system displays a list of all available instances If the display is okay double click one instance to display the services available for that instance If the display is empty you can find more information by looking at the files listed previously in the first step d Call transaction SM21 to check the system log 6 Install the S
196. er applying the ISERPACK to your local copy of the CD or DVD you must install the TMK server even if you have already installed it in step 2 This is necessary so that the client and server code match The installation server is running in an i5 OS subsystem an instance of the TMKSVR and the JnstGui runs on a Windows front end that reads its configuration and programs from the System i IFS in the path usr sap sapinst and connects to the TMKSVR All components of the WEB AS and all other SAP applications based on the Web AS on System i server are installed using the InstGUI Prerequisites for installing the TMKSVR To install and run the TMKSVR on a System i server you require the following gt AnFTP server running on the System i server gt Administrator rights that is user name and password similar to QSECOFR Starting the installation of the TMKSVR 1 Run SETUP EXE from the TMKSVR path of the Installation Master CD From the SAP NetWeaver Installation Master CD the path to the TMKSVR is shown in Figure 3 6 on page 47 46 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models CD51031148_InstMaster_NW04_SR1 E Im15_05400_64 SAPINST E as400 COMMON 05400 E E 45400 JAR 5 NWO4SR1 omar TRANS Figure 3 6 Path for the SETUP EXE from the TMKSVR on the Installation Master CD From the mySAP ECC50_SR1 Master CD the path to the TMKSVR is shown i
197. er if you find that journal receiver switches are taking place too frequently or your user ASP is being filled up too quickly This issue is discussed in more detail in the Disk chapter of Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 Note The statement that database library and journal receivers should be in separate ASP s is not quite accurate for development or test systems Also when using high availability solutions it is not really necessary to have separate ASP s Having too few disk arms in the receiver ASP can result in a bottleneck so a separate ASP for receivers should only be configured if it is required and if sufficient disk arms can be provided An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models To check the status of a user ASP perform the following steps e295 D Enter STRSST Start System Service Tools Enter option 3 Work with disk units Enter option 2 Work with disk configuration Enter option 1 Display disk configuration Enter option 2 Display disk configuration capacity You can see whether a user ASP exists and if so make sure that it still contains enough space see the recommended values given previously Note You can encounter problems during installation if you have an existing user ASP that contains journal receivers or save files belonging to libraries that are located in another ASP In this case you cannot create additional libraries in this user
198. er key You have to generate the Solution Manager key because SAPinst prompts for it during the input phase of the installation process a In your SAP Solution Manager call the System Landscape Solution Manager with the transaction SMSY Choose Other object Set the indicator System From the input help choose the system on which you want to install your SAP system Choose Generate Installation Upgrade Key Enter the requested information If necessary change the default values Choose Generate Key are oaos The system displays the key For more information see also SAP note 805390 20 Check the general information about preparing the system for SAPINST The Java based SAPinst graphical user interface GUI called SAPinst GUI requires a Java Development Kit Java 2 SDK Standard Edition with graphical capabilities AWT Swing Since System i models do not provide a GUI you must install the JDK ona Windows host to perform the installation with SAPinst You have to prepare your system for the SAPinst GUI The installation tool SAPinst uses the Java based graphical user interface SAPinst GUI regardless of your system variant 124 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Therefore you always need a JRE on the host where SAPinst is to run The JRE is included in the JDK 21 Prepare the system for the SAPinst GUI As part of preparing the system for SAPinst you need to prepare for the SAPinst GUI
199. ere SAPinst GUI and SAPinst server are running on the same host Closely follow the instructions in this guide and in the appropriate SAP notes Each SAP instance requires a separate installation directory Do not delete any of the installation directories until the system is completely and correctly installed If you are installing a second or subsequent SAP system into an existing database make sure that the database is up and running before starting the installation Also consider the following How to use the SAPinst GUI In the installation guide the buttons of the SAPINST GUI dialogs input screens installation progress screen message boxes are described What to do if there is an interrupted installation with SAPinst Refer to the installation guide for re starting an installation General information about the remote installation with SAPinst optional Run the SAPinst GUI in standalone mode to perform a remote installation This enables you to install an SAP system on another host the remote host while monitoring the installation with the SAPinst GUI on your local Windows or UNIX computer the local host The procedure describing how to do this is in the installation guide Start the SAPinst GUI on the Remote Host optional Use this procedure to run SAPinst on the remote host when you want to run SAPinst as a remote installation The remote host is the host where you want to install the SAP system The procedure d
200. ernet Pricing and Configurator IPC and an MS SQL Server database A mobile client also includes the CRM IPC Sales Configuration Engine IPC SCE and the CRM IPC Sales Pricing Engine IPC SPE applications in a typical mobile client installation With the CRM Mobile Application Studio formerly known as Workbench you can customize your mobile client environment 5 3 5 Communication and Development Station These stations are data transfer tools connecting the SAP CRM Server and the Mobile Clients CRM Communication Station Mobile Client users carry a PC application and a local database on their laptops They connect to the CRM system from time to time either by phone or network to exchange data accumulated and stored in queues at both ends This connection is established using a CRM Communication Station where DCOM calls from the mobile clients are transformed into RFC calls that go to the CRM Server The CRM Communication Station acts primarily as a communication server This data distribution follows a flexible set of replication rules where business objects are assigned to mobile clients CRM Development Station The Development Station includes several data exchange tools The number of installation tools has decreased from CRM Release 2 0C to CRM 4 0 as some of these functions are now available within the CRM Server For more information see the section Field Sales 5 3 6 R 3 Standalone Gateway This is an SAP system that co
201. ers Nevertheless a 3 tier system provides a significant reduction of the database server load so that more users are able to work in parallel on the system Set the following parameters in a 3 tier landscape in either the default profile or in all instance profiles rdisp bufrefmode sendon exeauto rdisp bufreftime 120 SAP note 14754 contains detailed information about this The majority of instance parameters must have the same setting in all instances There are a few instance specific exceptions for example INSTANCE_NAME SAPSYSTEM rdisp wp_no_xxx Pay special attention to this point when additional instances are added to an existing system In contrast to the point above all memory parameters of the instance profiles are highly server dependent If you intend to use logon load balancing then implement it as described in SAP note 26317 Ensure that host names are correctly defined everywhere as SAP note 60252 describes for example upper and lower case characters Make sure that the EDRSQL server is active on the database server and on all System i application servers If required start the EDRSQL server with the following command STRTCPSVR SERVER EDRSQL The TCP IP send and receive buffers on System i servers must be at least 1 MB 1048576 bytes in size as described in SAP note 92589 Restart TCP IP afterwards in order to activate any changes Make sure that the system values on all System i servers are
202. erver1 RMTLOCNAME appserverl IP RMTUSER A46ADM RMTPWD SAPOFR 3 From the System i server to stop a Windows application server follow the instructions given On the System i command prompt run the following command as Example 6 3 on page 199 shows where D means the drive your application server is installed on on your Windows Server 198 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Example 6 3 RUNRMTCMD CMD D usr sap SID DINST exe stopsap exe NAME SID NR INST SAPDIAHOST insthost RMTLOCNAME insthost IP RMTUSER SIDADM RMTPWD xxxxxxxx The results of this action are in the System i print spooler Use the WRKSPLF command to display the report For details about how to start and stop a Windows application instance of an SAP system from the System i central host see SAP note 682281 Start and stop all instances together with a Linux application server Check that you can start and stop the SAP system after the installation using the scripts startsap and stopsap in the exe directory This process requires that gt You have signed on to the SAP system host as user sapsidadm gt If you want to use startsap or stopsap for example in a script and require the fully qualified name of these SAP scripts create a link to startsap or stopsap in the home directory of the corresponding user To start the SAP Instance 1 Make sure the central instance is up and running on the System i host 2
203. es or patches continue to be produced mySAP NetWeaver Software components The main constituents of mySAP NetWeaver are grouped in the ABAP and Java stacks The additional components shown in Figure 4 4 on page 76 are optional that is you install them depending on your specific requirements Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 75 SAP NetWeaver 04 Software Components BI Content Add on Enterprise Portal BW Java Components BW ANALYZER PRECALC BI CONT 3 5 2 CM BW UDI 350 COLLABORATION 6 0_640 XI Components TREX 6 1 6 0_640 XI CONTENT BAP_BASIS 6 40 SAP Content KW IKS XI TOOLS 3 0 Server 6 30 SAP_IKS_100 XI ADAPTER SAP MI Client 2 5 FRAMEWORK 3 0 Adobe Doc Services XI ADAPTER FRAMEWORK ADOBE DOC CORE 3 0 XI Adapter Engine J2SE SAP RED AS ABAP SERVIE SO XI CONNECTIVITY i SE 3 0 XI CONNECTIVITY SAP BW 3 50 SE 3 0 a JDI 6 40 NW S tudio F E R a JDI BUILD TOOL XI Adapter Engine 6 40 NW DEVELOPER STUDIO 2 0 XI ADAPTER SAP BASIS 6 40 JDI OFFLINE 6 40 FRAMEWORK 3 0 SAP IGS 6 40 XI ADAPTER SAP Web AS Java FRAMEWORK SAP KERNEL 6 40 CORE 3 0 SAP IGS 6 40 oe Additional ABAP Stack Java Stack Components SERVICE 350 Figure 4 4 mySAP NetWeaver 04 software components 76 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 4 3 Installation of SAP Business Information Warehouse BW In this section we provide the following gt An introduction to t
204. escribing how to do this is in the installation guide Start SAPinst GUI on the local host optional Use this procedure to run SAPinst GUI on the local host when you want to run SAPinst as a remote installation The local host is the host where you want to control the installation with the SAPinst GUI In the installation guide there is a detailed description about how to start the SAPinst GUI on the local host There is a differentiation when e Your local host runs on a Windows platform or e Your local host runs on a UNIX platform Follow each step described in the installation guide Do not delete any of the installation directories until you are sure that the system is completely and correctly installed There is also a section on some aspects of troubleshooting Post installation activities for installing a Linux application server Follow these steps after installing a Linux application server 1 For production operation replace the installed kernel with the current version from SAP Service Marketplace For more information see SAP note 19466 2 Start and stop the SAP instance Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 213 Log on to the SAP system Install the SAP online documentation Configure SAProuter and SAPNet for remote connection to SAP Support Perform basic operations like described in the installation guide 3b Check and configure the number of work processes oN ons w Activate the integrat
205. esses you want to run and then install the components you require for those business processes only Therefore it may not be necessary to install all the components described in this section We strongly recommend that you use a minimal system landscape for test and demonstration purposes only To ensure performance scalability high availability and security do not use a minimal system landscape as your production landscape For further information about setting up production system landscapes see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com ti Establishing your system landscape In order to establish your system landscape consider the following points gt You must provide sufficiently sized servers Technically speaking with sufficiently sized hardware it is possible to install all components on a single server However because of performance requirements we recommend that you use a minimum of three servers For information about hardware sizing see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com sizing gt The XI installation requires an add in installation of SAP J2EE 6 40 In addition the system must be Unicode gt The components ADOBE DOCUMENT SERVICES 1 0 ADS Enterprise Portal 6 0 Exchange Infrastructure 3 0 and Search and Classification TREX 6 1 require a large amount of memory and make substantial demands on the host performance of the CPU If An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on Sy
206. eway instance for a Web Application Server 6 20 216 6 2 3 Installing an SAP Gateway instance Release 4 6D 00 5 219 6 3 Set up an SAP system by system copy 000 c eee eee 222 6 3 1 Homogeneous system COpy 1 tee eee 224 6 3 2 Heterogeneous system COpy 0 ec eee 231 6 3 3 System copy and migration procedures 0 0 cece 231 6 4 Installation of SAP systems before Web Application Server 232 6 5 Installation of other SAP components 000 cece eee eee eee 233 6 6 Planning an SAP upgrade 0 00 c eee 233 Related publications 0 0 ccc tees 237 IBM REdDOOKS i eee th ota Rees e haat ace be heen ee ane Se 237 Other publications 2 2 0 237 Online resources 0 cette 237 How to get IBM Redbooks 0c eee tetas 240 Help frome IBM 3 4 once eaten Bae a a ha aa ata Sa ead Ghana hans arte Pe 240 INGOX ssl acy ee ee eke wie me Rte 2 Qe ae ee od ey ean 241 Contents v vi An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U S A IBM may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to sta
207. f an homogeneous system copy is the copying an SAP system or to say it more precisely the copying of the SAP database with a specific SAPSystem ID to another SAP database with the following characteristics gt The source and the target operating system is from the same type The release and patch level of the source and the target operating system can differ gt The source and the target database is the from the same type The release and patch level of the source and the target database can differ If one or two of these two characteristics are disregarded then SAP customers refer to a Heterogeneous system copy Migration is synonymous for a heterogeneous system copy The SAPSYSTEM ID can remain the same or be changed when you do a homogeneous or a heterogeneous system copy 222 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models The official SAP installation guides for both the homogeneous and the heterogeneous system copy for ABAP as well for Java are found in the SAP Marketplace at http service sap com instguides Then select SAP NetWeaver Release 04 Installation gt SAP Web AS SAP Web AS 6 40 SR1 and Related Documentation At this site you find the information illustrated in Figure 6 10 SAP Web AS 6 40 SR1 Installation and Related Documentation Here you can find the installation guides for SAP Web Application Server SAP Web AS 6 40 and related documentation SAP Web Application Se
208. f the installation opens Continue the installation from the sapinst_GUI_host Note To connect the SAPinst GUI from another host the SAPinst server must still be running on the sapinst_exe_host If the SAPinst server is stopped no GUI can connect to it If you decided to use a generic LDAP directory and you did the necessary preparatory steps as described in Part Planning and Preparation you have to create a user for LDAP directory access 4 8 7 SAP SolMan post installation activities After installing SAP SolMan perform the following functions ON DOA FR WN Grant authorizations for operating system collector programs Start and stop the SAP system Log on to the SAP system Check that the SAP system services are present Install the SAP online documentation Install the SAP license Remove the SAPinst installation files Access a remote database Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 105 106 9 Configure SAProuter for Remote Connection to SAP Support 10 If you installed a unicode system run unicode specific reports 11 Configure the transport management system TMS 12 Perform the basic operations 13 Check the configured number of work processes 14 Install additional languages 15 Activate the integrated Internet Transaction Server optional 16 Apply the latest kernel patches and support packages 17 If you install SAP Web AS as basis for an SAP componen
209. fa catalog dtd 2KB DTD Datei 02 07 2004 18 31 control dtd 8KB DTD Datei 29 10 2004 18 31 control 4 360 KB XML Document 20 06 2005 19 03 Markieren Sie ein Objekt um 8 9 bin seine Beschreibung anzuzeigen fa dialog 783KB XML Document 03 01 2005 21 56 MO dev Siehe auch a doc dtd 4KB DTD Datei 02 07 2004 18 31 E etc Eigene Dateien fa keydb dtd 2KB DTD Datei 02 07 2004 18 31 H O home Netzwerkumgebung 2 keydb 3 647 KB XML Document 03 01 2005 21 56 gt CD ib Arbeitsplatz a messages dtd 2KB DTD Datei 30 06 2004 18 30 0 DLs 2 messages 435KB XML Document 03 01 2005 21 55 2 OF ileSvr 400 a packages dtd 1KB DTD Datei 02 07 2004 18 31 9 aiem a resources dtd 2KB DTD Datei 25 08 2004 20 08 e O antc fa sapinstgui dtd SKB DTD Datei 09 07 2004 18 31 EI QOpenSys m o QOPT G Winzip Unregistered nw04sr1 control zip H A ASR ile Actions Options Help J asys LIB H O QTCPTMM 8 tmp amp brms eIVuGeas New Open Favorites Extract View CheckOut Wizard EHO cds Modified Size Ratio Packed Path EH D51031143_ECC50_SR1_InstMaster 15 02 2005 14 785 097 90 81 458 sapinsthasd00 asd J pocu 16 03 2006 15 4 460 399 83 738 556 sapinst osd00 as4 S IM15_os400_64 17 03 2006 12 4 452 068 83 737 043 sapinst asd00 as4 S E SAPINST J COMMON 05400 3 AS400 a hike ECCOASAI Selected 3 files 9 471KB 14 4 Obieki e Ficer rA 205 GB j gu 03
210. from your System i host in this example IBASO3 to a PC drive in this example Y see Figure 3 3 Map Network Drive Se x Windows can help you connect to a shared network folder and assign a drive letter to the connection so that you can access the Folder using My Computer Specify the drive letter for the connection and the Folder that you want to connect to Drive Iv x Folder IBASO3 roatbin z Browse Example server share Connect using a different user name Create a shortcut to a Web folder or ETP site Figure 3 3 Mapping the Rootbin share to a PC drive Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 43 Instead of creating the share manually you can also install the TMK server by loading the installation CD onto your PC and running the SETUP EXE in subdirectory SAPINST OS400 AS400 TMKSVR See the next step You must install the Java Development Kit JDK on your Windows front end to perform the installation with SAPinst You need to prepare your PC for the SAPinst GUI 1 If not yet done download and install the Java Development Kit JDK 1 4 or newer or Java Runtime 1 4 2 or higher from http java sun com To check if this is on the PC select Start Settings gt System control gt Software 2 Set the environment variable JAVA_HOME on your Windows host 3 Include the directory JAVA_HOME bin in the PATH variable The SAPinst installation tool uses th
211. g instance Enter the same IDs on a dialog instance as on the central instance host As a general requirement the user IDs UID and the group IDs GID must be the same on all hosts The UID and GID of SAP users and groups must be identical for all servers belonging to any SAP system This does not mean that all users and groups have to be installed on all SAP servers 7 Check the creation of Linux groups and users 210 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models The users and groups created by the SAP installation procedure listed correspond to each other on the System i host and the Linux application server and therefore need to have matching UIDs and GIDs For more information about the Linux user and groups created by the SAP installation procedure see the installation guide 3a refer to 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 For more information about how to change the UIDs and GIDs of users on the System i host see SAP note 818091 8 Set up file systems and raw devices For more information about setting up the file system and raw devices see the installation guide 3a refer to 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 Note We do not recommend using raw devices to perform the installation of an SAP system For more information see SAP note 405827 If you want to use raw devices all the same contact the support of your Linux distri
212. ger Release 3 1 SP20 or SAP Solution Manager Release 3 2 SP4 Ensure that an SAP Solution Manager is available for your SAP ECC system If required you can install the SAP Solution Manager as described in the documentation Installation Guide SAP Solution Manager 3 2 on OS Database on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics SAP Components gt SAP Solution Manager Release 3 2 at http service sap com instguides Identify the basic SAP system parameters SAP System ID SAPSID Database ID DBSID On System i models the DBS D SAPSID Instance Number Instance Host Message Port 36nn where nn is the instance number ABAP RFC user password Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 115 Password of DDIC or SAP SAP Solution Manager key RFC user password of the System Landscape Directory SLD if using SLD Gateway Host on which the gateway instance of the SLD is running if using SLD SAP system client in which the ABAP RFC user exists if using SLD ASP for the SAP database ASP for the journal receiver of the SAP database Decide whether you want to use SAP SLD The SAP SLD is the central information provider for your system landscape You can use SAP Web AS for SLD in the following ways AsanSLD server that is SAP Web AS is the system where the central SLD is located For this you need a Java or an ABAP Java system You have to configure and
213. gt 5722SS1 option BASE Operating System 400 gt 5722SS1 option 1 OS 400 Extended Base Support gt 5722SS1 option 2 OS 400 Online Information gt 5722SS1 option 3 OS 400 Extended Base Directory Support gt 5722SS1 option 12 OS 400 Host Servers gt 5722SS1 option 13 OS 400 System Openness Includes Unicode only gt 5722SS1 option 21 Extended NLS Support gt 5722SS1 option 30 OS 400 Qshell Interpreter gt 5722SS1 option 33 OS 400 Portable Application Solutions Environment PASE gt 5722SS1 option 39 OS 400 International Components for Unicode gt 5722AC3 option BASE Crypto Access Provider 128 bit for AS 400 mandatory for JDK 1 4 gt 5722JC1 option BASE IBM Toolbox for Java gt 5722JV1 option BASE IBM Developer Kit for Java 5722JV1 option 5 Java Developer Kit 1 3 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models You can find more details and related additional software products in the specific sections of this Redpaper and of course in the related official SAP installation guides Note Ensure that English is installed as the primary or secondary language on your System i model This is asked by the installation procedure of Web Application Server 6 xx to get appropriate assistance from IBM SAP or both The SAP installers often miss this feature library QSYS2924 when they start the SAP installation 2 2 4 Memory requirements For an SAP system installation on a System i server the
214. guides but they should help and illustrate you the installation process Planning activities for installing a Windows application server Consider the following when planning for the installation of your Windows application server gt Choose your basic system variant and distribution of SAP system instances Plan the basic system variants e ABAP system e Java system e ABAP Java system Plan how to distribute all mandatory SAP system components e On a single host central system or e On separate hosts distributed system gt Check the SAP components When you set up an SAP system you need to install the main components that enable the system to operate Consider in advance on what machine you want to install each of the following instances or applications Central system Central services instance Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 201 202 Database instance Dialog instances Gateway instance Front ends Identify basic SAP system parameters Your SAP system parameters are probably already defined when you installed your central SAP system such as the SAP System ID Instance number for each instance Message port Windows domain RFC user with passwords Plan your system configuration Plan and check with your IBM hardware service provider for The distribution of the SAP components The sizing and configuration of the single host Whether to perfo
215. h is not your primary language you must install an English secondary language library on your iSeries host This is necessary for SAP to provide support Install this library before you continue the installation Enter the library name in this dialog Back C Cancel Log of Figure 3 25 SAPINST The English secondary language library installation window In this window you see the SAP code page 1100 for an ASCII Code page If you install a Unicode code page you have the SAP code page 4102 for a Unicode Code page If you specify the name of a secondary language library the installation makes sure that this library is in the first position in the library list of all SAP work processes This ensures that messages in the joblog are all in English Attention If you have a secondary language installed and upgrade your operating system to a higher release level you must also upgrade your secondary language to the same release Otherwise you can encounter a variety of errors when trying to start your SAP system see SAP note 805447 The SAP database library and SAP journal receiver library ASPs As part of the installation preparation configure your disk units into one or multiple Auxiliary Storage Pools ASPs by using the System Service Tools SST During the SAP installation you must specify the ASP numbers where the database library and the journal receiver library are going to be installed see Figure 3 26 on page 63 62 An Over
216. he SAP BW business overview gt An overview of the technical system landscape of a full BW installation and its components gt An overview of the installation steps necessary for multiple SAP BW scenarios gt References to the installation guides and other information about BW 4 3 1 SAP BW business overview SAP Business Information Warehouse SAP BW provides data warehousing functionality a business intelligence platform and a suite of business intelligence tools that enable businesses to attain these goals It allows you to analyze data from operative SAP applications as well as all other business applications and external data sources such as databases online services and the Internet SAP BW enables Online Analytical Processing OLAP which processes information from large amounts of operative and historical data OLAP technology enables multidimensional analyses from various business perspectives The Business Information Warehouse Server for core areas and processes pre configured with Business Content ensures that you can look at information within the entire enterprise The Administrator Workbench is the tool for controlling monitoring and maintaining all of the processes connected with data staging and processing in the SAP BW system The term Data Staging includes all data retrieval processes The Business Explorer is the SAP BW component that provides flexible reporting and analysis tools for strategic analyses and d
217. he SAP notes are versioned documents Take care to always use the most recent SAP note Moreover the SAP notes mentioned in the SAP installation guides may refer to additional SAP notes therefore you have to study your documents in a hierarchical way For an example see Table 2 2 Table 2 2 Example about how to read the SAP installation documents Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3 Hierarchy 4 Master Guide Installation Guide SAP note cont d SAP note Installation Guide cont d As a further explanation to Table 2 2 see Figure 2 5 on page 15 and the accompanying scenario about how to read the documentation 14 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Master Guide s 8 a Installation Read SAP Read SAP 1 Guide p 4 oy note B lt note E 2 3 5 7 y 7 Read SAP Read SAP Read SAP note A note C note D p Figure 2 5 Example about how to read the SAP installation documents To read the SAP installation documents as shown in Figure 2 5 do the following 1 Start reading the Master Guide While reading the Master Guide you come across a reference to the Installation Guide Put aside the Master Guide and start reading the Installation Guide While reading the Installation Guide you come across a reference to an SAP note A Put aside the Installation Guide and read SAP note A
218. he SAP system a Transaction RZ10 Tools gt Import profiles gt Of active servers see Figure 6 12 Utilities gi Check all profiles HG 25 5 A REIT Import profiles Of active servers Edit Profiles Figure 6 12 Homogeneous system copy Import profiles b Transaction RZ04 Inst Operation Modes Settings Based on current status gt New instances gt Generate see Figure 6 13 settings Based on current status Existing instances New instances Generate CCMS Maintain Operation Modes and i amp 0 Consistency check Profile view Figure 6 13 Homogeneous system copy Generate instances c Transaction RZ12 define one RFC Logon group identical to the Central Instance and delete the old entries 12 Adapt the instance profile It is not normally needed for repeated system copies but this is a good chance to compare with the changes in the profiles of the production system 13 Check the SAP system log Transaction SM21 14 Perform a server check Transaction SM51 Are all instances available with all the needed services 15 Check delete or create RFC Destinations Transaction SM59 Compare with the printed or saved list as outputted from the old TARGET SID 16 Check and process Logical Unit of Works LUWs Delete the entries in the transaction RFC Transaction SM58 17 Copy adapt and delete jobs in the TARGET SID for the new system For example the report va
219. he following elements YYYY Y SAP NetWeaver Administrator SLD System Landscape Directory SLM Software Lifecycle Manager CUA Central User Administration CPH Central Performance History 32 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models CRM SAP Web AS Support Infrastructure and Central Administration and Monitoring SAP Web AS SAP Web AS HA Cluster Optional enhancements of Solution Manager Infrastructure SAP SAP NetWeaver Solution Administrator Manager Refresh of System Landscape Information Diagnostics Solution Manager SAP Web AS SAP Web AS SAP Web AS Figure 2 21 Support Infrastructure and Central administration and monitoring Summary of all SLD Connections The following Figure 2 22 on page 34 gives you an overview of all communication paths to and from the SLD On the right side bullets 1 to 3 it shows data suppliers They simply send actual system landscape data to SLD SLD clients on the left side are capable of interacting with the SLD This means they can retrieve send and update system landscape data with SLD The following sections give a short explanation of all communication paths depicted below see bullet points Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 33 J2EE sldreg System not Application SLD Server en ee SLD Client j SLD Client HTTP s Program SAP Web AS LCRAPAB API LCRAPAB API i SLD Bridge g JCO RFC HTTP S Applicati A
220. her distributed systems Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 25 26 Central System Distributed System Central Database Central Instance Host Instance Host Central Instance Central Instance J2EE J2EE Engine Engine Central Services Central Services Instance Instance mal Database Instance Host Figure 2 14 Distribution of a Java system SAP Web AS ABAP Java system or SAP Web AS ABAP system SAP Web AS Java system With the variant shown in Figure 2 15 you can operate both the ABAP Engine and the J2EE Engine in one system that is one SAP system with one SAPSID Web AS ABAP Web AS Java lt Database D Figure 2 15 SAP Web AS ABAP Java system With the variant shown in Figure 2 16 on page 27 you can also operate both the ABAP Engine and the J2EE Engine But in contrast to an SAP Web AS ABAP Java system the two engines run separately in two systems that is two SAP systems each with a different SAPSID An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Web AS ABAP C Database gt ABAP Schema Figure 2 16 SAP Web AS ABAP system SAP Web AS Java system Web AS Java C Darana gt Note On System i servers the ABAP and Java schema of a combined ABAP Java installation are always in the same database So the variant of Figure 2 16 is not implemented on the System i with DB2 UDB for iSeries Mandatory insta
221. her with a Java Web AS Also the usr sap trans directory has to be set up which mostly uses the same mechanism Setting up the file system before starting a new installation For installations based on 6 xx which still use the usr sap trans config directory set up usr sap trans as described in the previous sections If you install anything on a non central instance host for example dialog instances it is necessary to have usr sap trans set up beforehand even if a central instance does not yet exist For installations on a Windows host read and apply the recommendations in SAP note 667233 For installations on a Unix host it is necessary to set up the NFS mounts to the special directories global profile j2ee and jdbc in sapmnt SID before you start with the installation For more details refer to SAP note 667233 and SAP note 705962 6 1 6 Homogeneous System i 3 tier landscapes In this section we discuss gt The set up of a 3 tier landscape in a homogeneous System i landscape gt The installation of an additional application server on a separate System i server gt Starting and stopping all instances in a homogeneous System i landscape at the same time Setup of a 3 tier landscape in a homogeneous System i landscape This section discusses the setup of a 3 tier landscape in a homogeneous System i landscape In this setup the database and application servers are on a System i server Consider the following Chapter 6
222. host enter the following command CHGR3SHLOC NEWHOST hostname 16 Prepare a Windows user account and System i user profile We have already described this task in the SAP NetWeaver installation steps see 3 2 1 Preparing a Windows user account and a System i user profile on page 42 17 Install TMKSVR and create an installation share We have already described this task in the SAP NetWeaver installation steps see 3 2 2 Preparing the Windows PC for SAPINST on page 43 18 Install the SAP front end software For the installation make sure that you have installed the front end software on at least one host machine in your system environment To simplify administration of your SAP system we recommend that you do this on the central instance host With the SAP front end installation software SAPSetup you can optimize the deployment of SAP GUI to thousands of clients You can easily tailor installation packages to match your requirements distribute patches and set up automatic update processes for your clients For more information about installing the front end software see the documentation on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics SAP Web AS SAP Web AS 6 40 SR1 and Related Documentation SAP Front End Installation at http service sap com nw04installation SAP Front End Installation Guide English version SAP Frontend Installationsleitfaden German version 19 Generate the SAP Solution Manag
223. ial set up of an SAP system infrastructure The client copy procedure is not handled in this documentation gt Export and import of a database with the installation tools for reorganization purposes is not described in this documentation and is not supported by SAP Use the appropriate tools for database reorganization Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 223 gt If you have made modifications in your development system and want to copy your quality assurance or production system onto the development system see SAP note 130906 gt f you want to convert a non Unicode systems to a Unicode systems or perform system copy of a Unicode systems see SAP note 548016 For Java system copies check the official SAP installation guides mentioned above 6 3 1 Homogeneous system copy This section describes gt General information about the homogeneous system copy gt A short description of where and how to use the Web AS 6 40 homogeneous system copy gt A detailed checklist about how to do a homogeneous system copy based on Web AS ABAP 6 20 General information about the homogeneous system copy The installation of a new SAP system typically takes one or two days A lot of time can be required to actualize the SAP system after it is installed from CDs DVDs with the outstanding patches for example kernel patches but especially support packages So you can spare time if you set up a new SAP system by a system copy instead by a new inst
224. ien fa messages dtd 2KB DTD Datei 06 03 2006 20 01 SAPINST I Netzwerkumaebung 2 messages 654KB XML Document 06 03 2006 20 01 H COMMON Arbeitsplatz g a product catalog 36KB CATALOG Datei 14 12 2004 21 11 s 05400 a product_cp catalog SKB CATALOG Datei 11 11 2004 21 25 as400 a resources dtd 2KB DTD Datei 25 08 2004 21 08 S ECCO4SR1 sapinst 21 620KB Anwendung 07 03 2006 00 44 6 0 WEBAS j 2 startinstgui 3KB Stapelverarbeitungs 05 11 2004 10 44 S ABAP DB4 enue au j B C JAVA JAR C nwossrht H SRMO4SRI C TMKSVR C TRANS i C TRANS ao Export m KAN S E LANG i ao Ta tmksvr144_spawn_temporary_names Ej usr HD var i E www a Systemsteuerung 4 amp Netzwerkumgebung j EA Papierkorb xf 14 Objektfe Freier Speicherplatz 205 GB 22 0 MB amp Lokales Intranet Figure 3 12 Path from SAP ECC 5 0 to the SAPINST 2 Call SAPINST EXE from the directory OS400 AS400 and you see the following SAP NetWeaver installation window as shown in Figure 3 13 on page 51 50 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver Installation SAPinst Version 642 Copyright 2002 2004 SAP AG All Rights Reserved Figure 3 13 Starting the SAPINST EXE 3 When you execute the SAPINST executable you have to connect to the TMK server first The SAPINST procedure asks for the connection parameters to the TMKSVR You can use the default port unless you changed the po
225. iew 0 000 e eee eee 95 4 8 Installation of SAP Solution Manager 000 c cee eee 97 4 8 1 Technical system infrastructure 0 2 ssaa aaaea naaa 97 4 8 2 Software and hardware requirements 000 00 e cece e eee eee 98 4 8 3 Scenaro Sn ichcna dete bad woke da watideeh odes od pan adele Abeba eels 98 4 8 4 SAP SolMan installation planning activities 0 000 e eee eee 100 4 8 5 SAP SolMan installation preparation activities 00000 c eee 101 4 8 6 SAP SolMan installation activities 00 0 00 eee 102 4 8 7 SAP SolMan post installation activities nuna 000 cee eee 105 Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 107 5 1 General aspects of the mySAP Business Suite applications 108 5 2 Installation of mySAP Enterprise Resource Planning 00000eeeee 110 5 2 1 mySAP ERP components 000 02 ccc eee e eens 110 5 2 2 mySAP ERP installation planning activities 0 0000 cee 115 5 2 3 mySAP ERP installation preparation activities 000000 116 5 2 4 mySAP ERP installation activities 00 0000 cee 125 5 2 5 mySAP ERP post installation activities 0 00 000 e eee eee 129 5 3 Installation of mySAP Customer Relationship Management 138 5 3 1 CRM documentation and installation guides 0000 cee eee 139 5 3 2 Technical comp
226. iew of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 1 Check that you have met the hardware and software requirements 2 Check if Qo2Term Qp2Shell and the OS 400 Portable Application Solution Environment is available option 33 of the licence program 5722 SS1 Install the Qshell Check and adjust i5 OS system values Set the time zone environment system variable Customize the QSTRUP startup program Check the distribution of libraries on ASPs Add a user ASP 9 Configure TCP IP 10 Adjust the relational database name on oan w 11 Install English as a secondary language 12 Install additional languages 13 Set up the transport directory 14 Prepare a Windows user account and i5 OS user profile 15 Install TMKSVR and create an installation share 16 Install the SAP front end software 17 Check the general information about preparing the system for SAPinst 18 Prepare the system for the SAPinst GUI Note If you decide to use LDAP for SAP Logon or Microsoft Management Console MMC you have to prepare the active directory for use with the SAP system Installation activities for installing a System i application server Prepare to perform the following tasks when planning for the installation of a System i application server 1 Prepare the installation DVDs 2 Install an SAP instance using SAPinst 3 Check prerequisites before starting SAPinst All Instances 4 Run SAPinst to install the instances
227. ified in Figure 3 28 on page 65 three parallel jobs although he could configure four parallel jobs 64 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models E SAPinst SAPINST IBASO3 SAP ERP 2004 SR1 gt ABAP System gt IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries gt Non Unicode gt Databa Pi E3 ABAP System gt Load Import Enter the general load import parameters General Load Settings Load Strategy O Load in Alphabetical Order Load by Data File Size Largest First O Load in Custom Order 1100 Number of Parallel Jobs 3 Advanced Configuration of Packages Individual Configuration for Task File Generation Individual Configuration for Data Load Oo _Back Cr Cancel Logor Figure 3 28 SAPINST Number of parallel R3LOAD jobs The installation log files If you choose defaults for log file generation SAPinst writes log files into subdirectories of usr sap SAPinst The log files that are created during the database load phase are coded and tagged as EBCDIC files Therefore when you try to read them over your rootbin share you only see non meaningful information displayed The rootbin share is created as binary share therefore no text conversion is performed In order to read the log files from your PC use a second share that performs text conversion Alternatively you can use the EDTF or DSPF commands from a System i 5250 emulation session Figure 3 29 on page 66 shows you exemplary the
228. ile devices in the field and can make various client settings such as modem class path state of the battery and certain server settings such as load balancing handling of synchronization errors centrally gt SAP MI ABAP Server This server is an integral part of SAP Web AS ABAP It is responsible for Queuing and acknowledgement of synchronized data containers Calling the application logic The application logic can be called synchronously or asynchronously depending on the application Data replication Data replication defines data packages for individual mobile devices data allocation computes the data to be newly replicated on the device delta comparison finds and solves conflicts between the mobile device and the server application conflict management and provides a number of monitoring tools 92 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Deployment of the mobile applications to the mobile devices Mobile applications are automatically deployed to a mobile device when the mobile device is synchronized This process is controlled centrally by the Deployment Console It permits the system administrator to assign application versions based on users or roles and thus gives an overview of the mobile devices error logs and so on in the field 4 6 3 SAP Mobile Infrastructure installation steps overview To install SAP MI perform these high level steps listed in the following list 1 Installati
229. includes the components required for building a portal and the Knowledge Management platform provides access to an organization s unstructured documents From CRM 4 0 onwards the Enterprise Portal is used for people centric CRM Figure 5 8 on page 146 illustrates the technical infrastructure Ensure that you install the suitable software Refer to the CRM Master Guide For comprehensive information about the SAP Mobile Infrastructure see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com nw ep Alternatively refer to 4 4 Installation of SAP Enterprise Portal on page 81 Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 145 146 CRM Server Host CRM SAP Business Sever Warehouse Enterprise Portal BW Host Knowledge Management Portal Server Text Retrieval amp Web Information Extraction Server PageBuilder iView Server Figure 5 8 mySAP Portal technical landscape for mySAP CRM CRM Server 4 0 The CRM Server is the central SAP system within CRM system landscapes Mostly all business scenarios run on this system some business applications can also run within Java applications Additional functions can be provided by integrating back end systems such as APO BW or an OLTP R 3 system With CRM Release 4 0 the CRM Server is based on the SAP Web Application Server SAP WebAS 6 20 As of CRM 4 0 SP1 it is based on SAP Web AS 6 40 You can find detailed information about the rele
230. iness scenarios or not part of some business scenarios at all See the Software Component Matrix for more information Figure 5 13 SRM overall installation sequence Installation of the mySAP SRM Server mySAP SRM is part of the mySAP Business Suite Therefore the installation is based on the SAP NetWeaver 04 and of the Web Application Server 04 We described the concepts the planning and preparation activities and the single steps of the installation procedure of the SAP Web Application Server previously in this chapter The following is the list of the activities of the mySAP SRM server installation gt Planning activities gt Preparation activities gt Installation activities gt Post installation activities mySAP SRM Installation planning activities gt Choose your basic system variant and decide how you want to distribute the SAP system instances gt Check the SAP system components gt Before you install your SAP system you have to know how you are going to manage your user data gt Identify the basic SAP system parameter gt Decide whether you want to use the SAP System Landscape Directory The following planning activities are optional and only apply if you want to perform one of the following Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 175 gt Installation of multiple SAP systems on a single System i server gt Using the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP for SAP L
231. ing the kernel Housekeeping activities Options and tools available to optimize the performance of an SAP system Determining the availability options for your SAP installation vvvvvy The team that wrote this Redpaper This Redpaper was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working with the International Technical Support Organization Poughkeepsie Center Dieter Huber is an SAP IBM Solution Architect and Senior IT Consultant from basycs GmbH Germany He started his company as CEO in 2002 with the intention to increase the SAP on System i market His areas of expertise include 11 years development implementation and consultancy with SAP on iSeries and also on UNIX and Windows with different databases Dieter holds a degree of Computer Science and Economics from the University of Karlsruhe in Germany and combines theoretical knowledge with practical experience Susan Powers is a Consulting IT Specialist at the ITSO Rochester Center Prior to joining the ITSO in 1997 she was an AS 400 Technical Advocate in the IBM Support Center with a variety of communications performance and work management assignments Her IBM career began as a Program Support Representative and Systems Engineer in Des Moines lowa She holds a degree in Mathematics with an emphasis in Education from St Mary s College of Notre Dame She is the Project Manager for the iSeries Handbook and System Builder suite of IBM Redbooks
232. interface specification as defined by SAP If data is stored on different servers cache servers are used to facilitate access to the documents contents for example if a document is to be displayed in a Web browser The cache server creates auxiliary copies of documents from the content server This enables faster read access to the required documents Network load is reduced as no remote content servers need to be located While cache servers fulfill a similar function to content servers the amount of administrative work involved is small and access protection is preserved The central document administration function in an SAP system ensures that out of date documents in the cache can no longer be accessed and that these documents are eventually deleted CRM mobile clients Mobile clients are usually laptops running the mobile sales or mobile service application client They connect temporarily to the middleware of the CRM Server to exchange data This connection is established through the CRM Communication Station where DCOM calls from the mobile clients are transformed into RFC calls that go to the CRM Middleware The mobile client includes all the software necessary for offline data entry and processing as well as separate middleware functions transaction layer required for data exchange and 148 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models communication with the CRM Server The mobile client software includes an Int
233. ion And Upgrade Documentation Here you can find comprehensive technical documentation for example Master Guides installation and upgrade guides For the Following areas Area Available Documentation Example of Documentation Industry Solutions Master installation and upgrade guides for Industry Solutions Master Guide SAP Severage 4 k f Master installation and upgrade guides for mySAP Business Suite All guides required to implement mySAP SRM for example Master Guide mySAP SRM and Instalation Guide mySAP Business Suite Solutions Solutions SAP SRM Server on UNIX MaxD8 2 i r All guides required to upgrade to SAP NetWeaver 04 for example Upgrade Master Guide SAP NetWeaver 04 SAP NetWeaver Master installation and upgrade guides for SAP NetWeaver and Upgrade Guide SAP Web AS 6 40 on UDANE 7 SAP Components Installation and upgrade guides for SAP Components Jnstalation Guide SAP R Enterprise 4 70 Extension Set 2 00 on Windows Oracle SAP Apps Master installation and upgrade quides and other documentation SAP xRPM Master Guide for SAP xApps Other Documentation Spe eles that is relevant For the installation or Database upgrade guides or information about SAP One Server Figure 2 6 SAP installation and upgrade documentation Installation amp Implementation Documentation Center SAP NetWeaver 04 Get an Overview of the documentation structure for installation Find the guides required For specific task Find out what s new o
234. ions for the adapter environment gt XI Adapter Engine that is to be installed on an SAP Web AS Java system Central installation on the SAP Exchange Infrastructure host Non central installation on a separate host gt XI Plain J2SE Adapter Engine that can be installed in a non SAP Java environment In general use the XI Adapter Engine in any of the described installation options It is the strategic adapter engine of SAP and is therefore continuously improved The XI Adapter Engine J2SE including the contained adapters is only supported for compatibility reasons and is not developed any further Use it therefore only in cases where it is inevitable Adapter Engine versus Plain J2SE Adapter Engine The following table Table 4 1 describes the advantages and disadvantages of using those adapters in the different flavors Adapter Engine or Plain J2SE Adapter Engine Table 4 1 Advantages and disadvantages of Adapter Engine and Plain J2SE Adapter Engine Installation option Advantage Disadvantage Adapter Engine Provides complete integration into the More resources needed for SAP XI environment installing the SAP Web AS Java Central Monitoring available 6 40 SR1 Central Configuration available Plain J2SE Adapter Less resources needed when Less integration into the SAP XI Engine running in a Java environment environment due to lack of central only configuration and monitoring Supports non SAP Web AS 6 40 services SR1 platfo
235. irectory on the other host and not to a symbolic link This can lead to confusion since links are resolved locally The special directories inside usr sap SID SYS are always linked to the local sapmnt SID This is true for any host The SAP file system for a system containing a Windows host The i5 OS technique where a symbolic link from usr sap points to the physical directory sapmnt does not exist on Windows systems Windows systems only have the usr sap SID directory tree with usr sap SID SYS as the place for global data When running a Windows application server it shares the executables profiles and the transport directory with the central instance or the central transport system See Figure 6 3 IFS Structures Windows Dialog Instance e ABAP path System i DB Host physical symbolic Java path physical symbolic Win share Converting share gt Link target Binary share samm eee eonvahostsopnmt s0 evs Zoro ran nt profile saptranshost sapmnt Windows Dialo i 00a Figure 6 3 IFS structures with a Windows dialog instance application server 190 On System i configurations there are two shares for directory usr sap gt sapmnt is a binary share that does not convert data gt saptext is a share that converts text data from EBCDIC to ASCII An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models The saptext share is not used in a default inst
236. ironment JRE 44 Java Server Pages JSP 92 Java stack 23 installing 54 JDBC Data Access 85 JDBC driver 79 JDBC Toolbox driver 66 JDK 44 JFC 91 JMS 85 job QXDAEDRSQL 134 R3RMTDB 134 spawned 134 journal receiver SAP 62 JRE 44 JSP 92 jt400 jar 66 K kernel library 57 key generate SAP SolMan key 124 key business 152 key function area 14 key SolMan 115 Knowledge Provider KPRO 136 Knowledge Warehouse 72 KPRO 136 KW 72 93 Installation 93 single host installation 95 L landscape System Landscape 29 LDAP 101 library kernel 57 R3SID 119 R3SIDDATA 119 SAPSIDJRN 120 library SAP 11 life cycle collaboration 165 life cycle data management 165 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP 101 Linux application server 199 208 installation activities 212 perform a full backup 214 planning activities 209 post installation activities 213 preparation activities 209 liveCache 158 load balancing 131 local installation 202 LSO Content Player 127 M Make to Order for OEM 157 MapBox MBX 154 Master Data Management 72 MBX 154 MDM 72 memory requirements 19 Metamodel Repository MMR 126 MI 72 91 Client 92 installation 91 Server 92 MI Client Component MI client component 91 Microsoft NET 22 Microsoft Management Console MMC 101 middleware components 109 MMC 101 MMR 126 mobile device 93 Mobile Infrastructure 72 Mobile Infrastructure ABAP Server 92 mySAP 107 mySAP All in One 1 mySAP Business Suite 1 40
237. is described in 1a and 1b of the installation guides shown in 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 In the installation guide 1a you see the planning and preparation activities for the installation of an Web Application ABAP server The activities are the same if you have a single or an additional Web AS Planning activities for installing a System i application server Perform the following steps when planning to install a System i application server 1 Choose your basic system variant and decide how you want to distribute the SAP system instances 2 Check SAP system components 3 Understand how you are going to manage your user data before you install your SAP system 4 Identify basic SAP system parameters 5 Decide whether you want to use SAP System Landscape Directory The following planning activities are optional and only apply if you want to perform one of the following activities gt Install multiple SAP systems on a single System i server gt Use the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP for SAP Logon for the Microsoft Management Console MMC LDAP can also be used for other purposes for example the LDAP Connector If you do not want to use LDAP for SAP Logon or MMC no LDAP specific installation steps are required Preparing to install an System i application server When planning for installing a System i application server follow these steps 192 An Overv
238. is the technology foundation that powers SAP applications NetWeaver includes a comprehensive set of components and tools as follows Copyright IBM Corp 2006 All rights reserved gt Components SAP NetWeaver Application Server Supports platform independent Web services business applications and standards based development enabling you to leverage existing technology assets for Web services oriented solutions SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence Enables you to integrate data from across the enterprise and transform it into practical timely business information to drive sound decision making SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure Delivers open integration technologies that support process centric collaboration across the extended value chain SAP NetWeaver Master Data Management Ensures cross system data consistency and helps integrate business processes across the extended value chain SAP NetWeaver Mobile Provides a future proof mobile run time environment based on open and flexible technology standards and a powerful development environment for building integrated mobile solutions with native or browser based user interfaces SAP NetWeaver Portal Unifies critical information and applications to give users role based views that span the enterprise enabling you to take full advantage of your information resources SAP Auto ID Infrastructure Gives you all the capabilities you need to integrate all automated sen
239. ith the SAPinst GUI In the installation guide there is a detailed description about how to start the SAPinst GUI on the local host There is a differentiation when either of the following takes place e Your Local Host Runs on a Windows Platform e Your Local Host Runs on a UNIX Platform Follow each step described in the installation guide 206 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Post installation activities for installing a Windows application server After an SAP installation follow these steps to install a Windows application server 1 Start and stop the SAP instance as user sidadm Use this procedure to check that you can start and stop the SAP system after the installation Use the Microsoft Management Console MMC to start and stop the SAP system The newly installed MMC only allows you to start or stop the SAP system locally on the host that you are logged on to Later you can configure the MMC to enable central management of all hosts For more information about how to Start and Stop the Windows SAP instance refer to the installation guide 2b and the 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 Check that you can log on to the SAP system using the standard user profiles There are two standard users in the SAP system after the installation 2 Execute the following post installation steps For more information about how to execute the post installation
240. ive CPI C connections You can call up all the other monitor functions via a menu You can monitor the gateway from the SAP System transaction SMGW or from the operating system Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 215 It is possible to install an SAP instance of an SAP system exclusively as a standalone gateway if required This type of instance does not contain normal work process types dialog background update enqueue or spool Only the gateway process gwrd is started Note Is it not necessary to install an SAP gateway in order for the SAP system to communicate via RFC with outside applications The remote RFC programs can attach the internal gateway with a so called registration mode For more details see the SAP Help Portal at http help sap com Use the keyword SAP Gateway See the Data Exchange Overview topic in Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 for examples of REFC programs that you can use in a registering mode 6 2 1 Gateway instance for 6 xx technology You cannot install a gateway instance for SAP systems based on 6 xx technology on System i servers using SAPinst If a standalone gateway Instance is required you must install it manually Choose a SID and an instance number that are not used yet gt ADDLIBLE LIB 640krniib gt CRTR8SYS SID SID KRNLIB 640krnlib gt CRTRSINST SID SID INST instno ROLE GATEWAY See SAP note 547227 titled Installation of a Gateway Instanc
241. k size requirements 19 disp work 58 distribution SAP Web AS ABAP system 24 SAP Web AS Java system 25 distribution of SAP system instances 24 documentation Implementation Guide IMG 12 Info APAR 13 Installation Guides 13 Security Guide 12 documentation SAP 10 11 Component installation guide 12 Component upgrade guide 13 Configuration 12 Release notes 13 Upgrade master guide 13 Domain installation 202 DSPF 65 Duet 1 E EBCDIC 65 EDTF 65 118 English as secondary language 123 English secondary library 61 Enterprise Portal 72 Enterprise Services Architecture ESA 70 Environment Health and Safety EH amp S 165 EP 72 81 Epic Editor 96 ERP 110 installation 110 ERP Installation Activities 125 ERP Planning Activities 115 ERP Post Installation Activities 129 ERP Preparation Activities 116 ESA 70 EWA 9 Exchange Infrastructure 72 84 expert cache 19 exporting and mounting directories 211 242 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Exporting _and_Mounting_Directories 211 external data source 78 extra domain 204 F F amp R 157 file installation log 65 File_System_multiple_System_i 189 Forecasting and Replenishment F amp R 157 framework services 92 frontend 29 FSCM Biller Direct 127 G gateway 215 gateway monitor 215 gateway read 215 gateway read process 215 GID 210 GO LICPGM 123 gwmon 215 gwmon exe 215 gwrd 216 gwrd exe 215 H hardware requirements 18 heterogeneous
242. l the SAP license Remove the SAPinst installation files Access a remote database Configure SAProuter for Remote Connection to SAP Support If you installed a unicode system run unicode specific reports Configure the transport management system TMS Perform the basic operations Check the configured number of work processes Install additional languages Activate the integrated Internet Transaction Server optional Apply the latest kernel and support packages If you install SAP Web AS as basis for an SAP component that uses the Knowledge Provider KPRO component for example SAP BW or SAP KW schedule asynchronous indexing and de indexing If you want to use KPRO check for problems in IMS monitoring Perform the client copy Check the RFC Destination You can change the passwords of created System i users Change passwords of created user Perform a full backup Prepare the SAP system for business application Note For all these mySAP SRM post installation activities point 1 to 25 see the corresponding considerations and procedures as described in the 5 2 5 mySAP ERP post installation activities on page 129 and the following 5 6 2 Scenario mySAP SRM Self Service Procurement an example As an example for a business scenario we show you the installation of the mySAP CRM Self service business scenario Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 177 mySAP CRM Self service Procurement business
243. lation Guide and the latest version of the relevant SAP notes Note If you install an SAP Web Application Server ABAP on a separate Linux machine or partition verify that you have gt Current installation guides from the SAP Service Marketplace for the applicable SAP release gt All current SAP notes mentioned in the installation guides Refer to the applicable installation guides in 3a and 3b of the 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 If you want to install an SAP Web Application Server Java on a separate Windows machine refer to the appropriate documentations in Installation guides of SAP Web Application Server on System i models on page 186 The SAP notes have priority over the installation guides The planning guide 3a familiarizes you with the basic concepts as mentioned above The detailed preparation steps as well as the hardware and software requirements of the Windows installation host are also introduced in the guide 208 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models The installation activities in 8b outline the steps for each activity Execute the post installation activities after the installation Note In the following section we highlight these steps and explain the most important features and activities for gt Planning activities for installing a Linux application server See page 209 gt Preparation activities for installing a Linu
244. le Output Planning 157 Plan Driven Procurement 172 PLM Collaboration Project 167 PLM Design Collaboration with cFolders 169 Project Manufacturing 157 Release Processing 157 Responsive Replenishment 157 SAPphone 148 scenario 166 Self Service Procurement 172 Service Procurement 172 software component 173 SolMan 98 Spend Analysis 173 SRM Business 173 SRM Self Service Procurement 177 Strategic Sourcing 172 Supplier Managed Inventory 157 Schowler Routes 197 SCM 157 components 159 server 157 SCROLL mode 235 SE01 226 SE38 228 Search and Classification 95 Search and Classification TREX 80 109 Self Service Procurement 177 Selling Via Ebay SVE 154 server Content 148 content 95 CRM 146 installation 5 integration 87 Index 247 Linux application 199 Linux application server 208 MI 92 MI ABAP 92 mySAP Supply Chain Management 157 NetWeaver Application 2 SCM 157 SLD 34 TMK 36 share sapmnt 190 saptext 190 Share Pools 19 SICK 228 SlDnn 137 SIDOFR 56 137 SIDOPR 137 single domain 204 sizing 17 disk size requirements 19 hardware requirements 18 memory 19 operating system requirements 18 SLD 29 202 Data Bridge 35 Data Supplier 35 server 34 SLG2 230 SLM 32 SM13 225 228 SM21 229 SM30 230 SM35 228 SM37 226 SM51 229 SM58 229 SM59 226 229 SMLG 135 SNOTE 9 SOAP 85 Software Agent Framework SAF 154 software catalog SAP 8 Software Distribution Center 9 Software Lifecycle Manager SLM 32 SolMan Change Request Ma
245. led main options based on the required connectivity named by option A to Q For a detailed description of these main options see the SAP Library under SAP NetWeaver Process Integration gt SAP Exchange Infrastructure Overview gt Connectivity 4 5 1 SAP XI technical system landscape To realize the communication options described in the previous section the following specific SAP Exchange Infrastructure components are necessary SAP Exchange Infrastructure XI Adapter Engine XI Adapter Engine J2SE SAP Partner Connectivity Kit vvvy Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 85 86 Figure 4 8 shows the underlying technical system landscape of SAP XI Front End BW Functionality Additional Components 00w80 Key Supported Basic System Variants SAP Web AS ABAP Java Non SAP Component Mandatory Component Optional Component Business System Business System Figure 4 8 SAP Exchange Infrastructure technical system landscape Figure 4 9 on page 87 provides an overview of the relevant software components Figure 4 9 on page 87 only applies to a minimum system landscape and does not represent the integration logic of the SAP Exchange Infrastructure 3 0 SR1 It only shows the components that can be installed for SAP Exchange Infrastructure 3 0 SR1 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models
246. levels Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 161 mySAP SCM Project Manufacturing Technical system landscape Figure 5 10 shows an exemplary technical infrastructure of Project Manufacturing including its components and the communication between them For the sake of simplicity and clearness Figure 5 10 contains icons for whole SAP systems not for single hosts Note that every SAP system can consist of several hosts with different tasks Intranet Clients Project Manufacturing Backend Core System OLTP SAP R 3 4 6C SAP SCM or Higher System 4 1 Plug in 2004 1 liveCache Memory Figure 5 10 mySAP SCM Project Manufacturing technical landscape SAP GUI Optimization Server OPTIONAL mySAP SCM Project Manufacturing Implementation sequence overview This section lists the sequence of steps installation technical configuration application configuration required to implement the business scenario See the SAP note 431502 mySAP SCM Master Guide for the latest component version requirements 1 Installation or integration of an R 3 OLTP SAP R 3 4 6C or higher Refer to the Installation Guide SAP R 3 Enterprise on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt Using SAP R 3 Enterprise Core 4 70 SAP R 3 Enterprise Extension lt Release gt or R 3 Installation on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt Release lt Release gt available at http service sap com instguides 2 I
247. llation follow these steps 1 On each Windows Server start the service iSeries Access for Windows Remote Command then a Go to Start Run and type services msc This brings up a new window with the list of services available b Find the service iSeries Access for Windows Remote Command c Double click it to get the property sheet Change Startup type to Automatic This opens the Windows server to rexec connections from remote hosts which enables you to start your Windows application server from the System i central instance Attention This exposes your Windows server to the risks associated with an rexec daemon running on the server for example the ability for any user with password to run commands on that machine 2 From the System i server to start a Windows application server a On the System i command prompt central instance host run the following command where D means the drive your application server is installed on your Windows server as Example 6 1 shows Example 6 1 System i command prompt RUNRMTCMD CMD D usr sap SID DINST exe startsap exe NAME SID NR INST SAPDIAHOST insthost RMTLOCNAME insthost IP RMTUSER SIDADM RMTPWD xxxxxxxx b The results of this action are in the System i print spooler Use the WRKSPLF command to display the report This is shown in Example 6 2 Example 6 2 System i print spooler RUNRMTCMD CMD E usr sap A46 D64 exe startsap exe NAME A46 NR 64 SAPDIAHOST apps
248. loaded The command files are copied from CD Your current directory is the installation directory for example TMP SID INSTGUI is started if you are using it YYYY Y Follow this procedure if you want to install a remote gateway instance a gateway instance running on a System i server which is not the SAP system database 1 Create user on the database host Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 219 Create a user profile SIDinstance_number for the gateway instance on the database host as follows a On the database host log on as user QSECOFR b Enter the command ADDLIBLE kernel_library where kernel_library is the name of your SAP system kernel library c Enter the command CRTSAPUSR USER SIDINST SID SID INSTANCE instance_number where SID is your SAP system ID and instance_number is the number of your dialog instance 2 Install the remote gateway instance a Start R3SETUP with the desired command file option specifying one of the command files for installing a central dialog or gateway instance R3SETUP f gateway r3s Alternatively if you started INSTGUI enter R3SETUP f gateway r3s g instgui_hostname port The following combinations are not allowed as SAP system IDs SAP EPS COM ADD ALL AND ANY ASC FOR NOT UID SID KEY INT END RAW ROW SET OFF MON SGA SHG VAR DBA GID LOG BIN B20 OMS BCO B30 P30 b You are prompted to enter or confirm e Your SAP system ID for example C11 e The number of the
249. lop both ABAP and Java applications It is based on the mySAP NetWeaver component SAP Web Application Server SAP Web AS SAP Master Data Management SAP MDM For information about the alignment of SAP Master Data Management with mySAP NetWeaver 04 see the relevant master guide available on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Planning gt SAP MDM at http service sap com instguidesnw04 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models mySAP NetWeaver information from the SAP Marketplace For comprehensive information about the mySAP NetWeaver refer to the SAP Marketplace at http service sap com instguides See Figure 4 1 for an illustration to the entry point of this Web page Installation amp Implementation Documentation Center SAP NetWeaver 2004s About this Page Documentation Concept News and Updates Get an overview of the documentation structure for installation upgrade Find out what s new or what has changed from the previous release and implementation Installation Upgrade Installation Upgrade Everything you need to plan and install SAP NetWeaver IT scenarios Find all the documentation required to upgrade an SAP NetWeaver Implementation from older versions to SAP NetWeaver 2004s including planning information and upgrade guides both for SAP NetWeaver and the standalone engines Operations Maintenance Operations Maintenance Find guides on monitoring and configurati
250. ly and correctly installed If you install a second or subsequent SAP system into an existing database make sure that the database is up and running before starting the installation 3 Also consider the following Check using SAPinst GUI In the installation guide the buttons of the SAPINST GUI dialogs input screens installation progress screen message boxes are described Check interrupted installation with SAPinst Refer to the installation guide for re starting an installation Check for general information about the remote installation with SAPinst optional Run the SAPinst GUI in standalone mode to perform a remote installation This enables you to install an SAP system on another host the remote host while monitoring the installation with the SAPinst GUI on your local Windows or UNIX computer the local host The procedure describing how to do this is in the installation guide Start the SAPinst GUI on the Remote Host optional Use this procedure to run SAPinst on the remote host when you want to run SAPinst as a remote installation The remote host is the host where you want to install the SAP system The procedure describing how to do this is in the installation guide Start SAPinst GUI on the local host optional Use this procedure to run SAPinst GUI on the local host when you want to run SAPinst as a remote installation The local host is the host where you want to control the installation w
251. m which you want to connect to SAP Web AS using an SAP GUI Installation of the component SAP Exchange Infrastructure Integration Server Integration Builder Runtime Workbench XI Adapter Engine Optional Installation of a Unicode SAP Web AS Java system Optional Installation of XI Adapter Engine Perform these steps only if you need to install the XI Adapter Engine for using one of the communication options D F on a separate server Optional Installation of XI Adapter Engine J2SE Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 89 Perform this step only if you want to use one of the communication options D Gina non SAP Java environment 6 Download and install the most current System landscape directory SLD content updated weekly under the topics Download Support Packages and Patches Entry by Application Group gt Additional Components gt SAP MASTER DATA FOR SLD available in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com swdc Here you see the implementation steps if you want your business partner to connect to your existing SAP Exchange Infrastructure environment communication option O 1 Ensure that SAP Exchange Infrastructure is installed in your SAP landscape 2 Ensure that Unicode SAP Web AS Java 6 40 system is installed on the business partner system landscape The Unicode SAP Web AS Java system is a prerequisite for SAP Partner Connectivity Kit You must prepare the SAP We
252. mp These executables are deleted again after SAPinst has stopped running 102 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Ensure that you have at least 50 MB of free space in the installation directory for each ABAP installation service In addition you need 60 200 MB free space for the SAPinst executables If you cannot provide 200 MB free space in the temporary directory you can set one of the environment variables TEMP TMP or TMPDIR to another directory with 200 MB free space for the SAPinst executables Each SAP instance requires a separate installation directory You must have a valid java executable in your executable search path or you must set the SAPINST_JRE_HOME environment variable for the installation user to the valid JAVA_HOME directory If you have more than one Java Virtual Machine JVM installed on your system for example you have two JREs with different versions installed make sure that the SAPINST_JRE_HOME environment variable is set to the valid JAVA_HOME directory If required delete directories with the name sapinst_exe xxxxxx xxxx after SAPinst has finished Sometimes these remain in the temporary directory We recommend that you keep all the installation directories until you are sure that the system is completely and correctly installed Check prerequisites before starting SAPinst all instances See also point 2 Run SAPinst to install the instances of your SAP system
253. munication between work processes from different instances or SAP systems The SAP gateway carries out CPI C services within the SAP world services which are based on TCP IP These services enable SAP systems and external programs to communicate with one another CPI C services can be used either in the ABAP program or for the external programs via the interfaces As RFC is based on CPI C all RFC connections also pass through the SAP gateway In the SAP system an SAP gateway is started for each application server For certain configurations an SAP gateway is used as a separately installed SAP instance or used outside an SAP system as follows gt Starting external partner programs on remote systems which do not recognize any remote shells Windows gt Application specific decoupling of communication in certain cases Install the SAP gateway in the same way as you install all other SAP programs that is in the executable files directory of the corresponding system tree The SAP Gateway is made up of various processes including gt Gateway read process Gateway read gwrd gwrd exe is the main process in the gateway system It is started by the application server dispatcher and checked by it periodically The gateway reader receives and processes all CPI C requests gt Gateway monitor The gateway monitor gwmon gwmon exe is used to analyze and administer the SAP Gateway When you start it you initially get a list of act
254. must also be set up in a dedicated client gt Inaminimal landscape setup because a low number of users is assumed you can manage these users by defining a User Store or User Management Engine UME client in the ERP Central Component system This client makes all users known to J2EE the Enterprise Portal and the Exchange Infrastructure XI To this end users are created in the UME client and assigned the role SAP_J2EE_GUEST gt If you install IPC on the main server you should install an additional database for it This is a requirement of the Internet Sales scenario Figure 5 2 on page 114 shows an example of a minimal system landscape for mySAP ERP Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 113 ERP Host SRM Host SAP SRM Server 5 0 Catalog Content Management 1 0 ABAP Components Java Components SAP ECC Add ons based Java J2EE on NW ABAP Components SAP ECC 5 0 Learning Solution 3 0 XI Content Frontend XI Content for Applications BW Components XI Components Web AS Java 6 40 SAP Content Server 6 30 RDBMS IPC 4 0 Business Packages for Applications Web AS Java 6 40 Portal Platform 6 0 Web AS Java 6 40 RDBMS IPC 4 0 me Figure 5 2 Example of a minimal mySAP ERP system landscape As stated in 5 2 1 mySAP ERP components on page 110 you cannot install the constituent parts of SAP ECC 5 0 individually In contrast you can install all add ons displayed wi
255. n SAP GUI SAP SCM Server 4 1 Dialog Instance Work Processes i Native SQL liveCache liveCache Memory File System liveCache Server 1 per SAP SCM System Figure 5 9 mySAP SCM technical landscape exemplary 5 4 5 mySAP SCM Project Manufacturing overview and implementation As an example we show you the implementation of the Project Manufacturing overview and implementation because this business scenario uses the SAP liveCache and the SAP APO Optimizer mySAP SCM Project Manufacturing business overview Project Manufacturing in SAP SCM 4 1 enables companies following the engineer to order manufacturing model and companies using project planning in new product development to leverage the advanced planning and scheduling capabilities of SAP APO for gt gt gt gt gt Integrated project and production scheduling Constraint based project and production scheduling Backlog free scheduling resulting in feasible plans Interactive simulation of different planning scenarios Alerts for early detection of bottlenecks and missing parts Improved transparency for complete project and order context through dynamic matching of supply and demand pegging Interactive scheduling using the graphical planning board tool Reaching global project and production planning goals Thus using SAP APO for Project Manufacturing can help the customer to gt gt Deliver on time Reduce and control inventory
256. n Figure 3 7 NU G tmp CDs D51031149_ECC50_SR1_InstMaster IM15_0S400_64 SAPINST OS400 AS 400 TMKSVR Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras H Zur ck gt A Suchen Q4 Ordner lt 9 Ay GE X wy Eel Adresse ja G tmp CDs D51031149_ECC50_SR1_InstMaster IM15_05400_64 SAPINST OS400 4S 400 T MKSVR z E Nested Ordner OD b H mA apis OFileSwr 400 aie A ONTC B QOpenSys H QoPT a QSR QSY5S LIB E QTCPTMM BY tmp brms BO Cds S D51031143_ECC50_SR1_InstMaster a pocu S E IM15_05400_64 S O SAPINST H COMMON 2 05400 As400 E E ECCO4SR1 H O JAR E E Nwo4sA1 a SRMOASRI _ PC TRANS 1 TRANS SE usr H O var Ej WWW aa Systemsteuerung ics amp Netzwerkumgebung a Papierkorb i Internet Explorer a eConfig v 4 Objektte Freier Speicherplatz a 4 GB INSTAL 56KB Adobe Acrobat 7 0 15 10 2002 07 E SAPCAR 747KB Anwendung 09 05 2003 1 TMKSVR E7 SETUP 220KB Anwendung 16 09 2004 1 a TMKSVR SAR 937KB SAR Datei 12 10 2004 17 Markieren Sie ein Objekt um seine Beschreibung anzuzeigen Siehe auch Eigene Dateien Netzwerkumgebung Arbeitsplatz 4 pa 31 MB GE Lokales Intranet Figure 3 7 Path from SAP ECC 5 0 to the TMKSVR For a detailed description read INSTALL PDF from the directory TMKSVR Call SETUP EXE in the directory TMKSVR of the installation path for OS400 tmp CDs m
257. n SAP is developing all its business solutions based on this foundation For customers this means that every piece of modularized functionality provided as part of an SAP application third party solution or developed by a customer or partner can be made available as a Web service An important milestone on the way to an even tighter synchronization with the SAP integration and application platform is to provide a single installation process for all mySAP NetWeaver components followed by streamlined operations resulting in a significant reduction in the total cost of ownership TCO Because all SAP applications are consolidated on the SAP Web Application Server any dependencies between components are resolved before customers install them This alignment helps reduce the effort involved in setting up test and demonstration systems while ensuring a more efficient overall implementation and allowing for a consolidation of the system landscape In addition SAP s SQL to Java database capabilities can eliminate the need to create and maintain separate databases for various solutions In summary all of this adds up to simplified updates operations and maintenance which in turn means reduced effort greater savings better performance and practically unlimited scalability Note The mySAP NetWeaver 2004 or mySAP NetWeaver 04 is based on SAP basis Release 6 40 The mySAP NetWeaver 2004 SR1 SR support release is based on the same SAP basis
258. n Master CD If you are this far in the installation the TMKSVR is already installed and should run on the System i server As a last check the installation tries to connect to the currently running TMKSVR Onan System i telnet session or the console check whether the TMKSVR is actually running by using the following command WRKACTJOB SBS TMKSVROO or TMKSVRxx Here xx is the instance number An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models You should see a DISPATCH job running as shown in Figure 3 9 1 Sitzung A 24 x 80 lolx Work with Active Jobs AS00112 10 14 02 10 47 09 CPU 0 Elapsed time 00 00 00 Active jobs 337 Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Hold 4 End S dork with Release 7 Display message Work with spooled files 13 Discormect Opt Subsystem Job User Type CPU Function Status TMKSYROO gt 8 DEQU DISPATCH COFR 3CH 8 PGH THKSYRI4O TIMW Bottom lal or command F3 Exit FS Refresh FT Fixd F10 Restart statistics Fil Display elapsed dats F1Z Cancel F23 More options F24 Hore keys Mag a 06 619 Figure 3 9 DISPATCH job running in the System i subsystem TMKSVROO When the installation of the TMKSVR is successful you get a window as shown in Figure 3 10 ea lt gt Inetallation finished succasshuk Figure 3 10 Installing the TMKSVR successfully 3 2 6 Install the ABAP database To start the SAP installation follow these steps
259. n Table 5 7 for example if a user was copied as part of the client copy We recommend that you change the initial passwords even if SAPinst prompted for a new password during the installation procedure Table 5 7 SAP users after an SAP standard installation users ser comment _ poe verreissatiessin sar osonciens on aes OO eoma resanse enee sw poo S SS E a C a C a 24 Perform a full backup You can use this procedure to perform a full backup of your SAP system During the backup your SAP system is unavailable to other users a On the System i command line enter GO SAVE b Enter option 21 For detailed information see the IBM documentation OS 400 Backup and Recovery SC41 5304 or the related chapter of this Redpaper Note Refer to the Restoring a Backup topic in Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 25 Perform follow up activities for the SAP Solution Manager Refer to the installation guides 26 Prepare the SAP system for business application Refer to the installation guides 5 3 Installation of mySAP Customer Relationship Management mySAP Customer Relationship Management mySAP CRM is a complete multichannel suite supporting all customer facing lines of business across marketing sales and service as well as customer interaction channels such as the Interaction Center the Internet and mobile clients It provides you with gt Cross industry and industry specific en
260. n application servers The dialog instances of a Java system are called Java dialog instances Dialog instances are SAP instances that include only Dispatcher IGS and CCMS agents Java and Java Add In system Java server processes ABAP and Java Add In system Gateway and certain ABAP work processes dialog batch spool or update gt Gateway instance if required It is possible to install an SAP instance of an SAP system exclusively as a stand alone gateway This type of instance does not contain normal work process types dialog background update enqueue or spool Only the gateway process gwrd is started gt Front ends The installation of front ends for the SAP system is described separately in the documentation SAP Front End Installation Guide on the SAP Service Marketplace 2 4 SAP System Landscape Directory SLD This section gives you a short overview to the SAP System Landscape Directory SLD This is a platform independent feature so it is not explained in detail in this Redpaper 2 4 1 Introduction to the SLD Today s system landscapes consist of multiple distributed software components with different platform dependencies interfaces and requirements placed on installation and change management An overall concept is required that facilitates the implementation upgrade and maintenance of your system landscapes including the SAP NetWeaver system landscape you are installing This is where Syst
261. n these pages These guides are updated and enhanced on a regular basis Brief excerpt of mySAP CRM Edition 2004 from the SAP Marketplace Although there is no big bang version of mySAP CRM a series of extensions are provided as part of the mySAP CRM Edition 2004 that can be applied on top of SAP CRM 4 0 without the cost of a release upgrade These additions are fully upgradable to future releases of mySAP CRM and focus on key areas such as the further enhancement of industry specific business processes improved user experience lower TCO as well as adopting the latest technology innovations delivered with SAP NetWeaver 04 140 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Focus of the CRM release in this book In this IBM Redpaper we focus on the mySAP CRM Edition 2004 which is technically referred to as the SAP 4 0 SR1 release When we refer to CRM 4 0 or only mySAP CRM we mean this release mySAP CRM Edition 2004 otherwise we remark on this separately 5 3 2 Technical components of mySAP Customer Relationship Management Figure 5 5 shows a minimal system landscape for SAP Customer Relationship Management CRM 4 0 CRM Host Portal Host SAP CRM 3 Technology Component Solution Manager Portal Runtime L OEM CRM Technology Component iView Runtime Java SAP Application CM 9 0 Component Connector Third Party Component Solution Manager CRM 4 0 ST 310 Solman CRM 4 0 WFMCORE 1 00 WP_I
262. nagement 99 generate the SAP Solution Manager key 124 HW requirements 98 Implementation and Distribution 99 Installation SolMan 97 key 115 scenario 98 Service Desk 99 Solution Monitoring 100 SW requirements 98 Upgrading SAP Solutions 99 Solution Extensions 1 Solution Manager 2 Solution Manager SolMan 97 Solutions for Governance Risk and Compliance 1 SP01 228 SPAD 226 228 SPAM 136 spawned job 134 Spend Analysis 173 SRM 172 Business scenario 173 component 173 installation 172 Self Service Procurement 177 SRM Host 128 STARTSAP DB 134 STMS 226 230 Strategic Sourcing 172 STRUST 231 Support Package Manager SPAM 136 S User 8 SVE 154 system components SAP 28 System i user profile 42 System Landscape Directory 5 29 System Landscape Directory SLD 29 202 system value QACTJOB 117 QADLACTJ 117 QAUTOCFG 118 QBASACTLVL 118 QCTLSVBSD 117 QDATE 118 QJOBMSGQFL 118 QPFRADJ 118 QSECURITY 117 QSTRUPPGM 118 QTIME 118 QTIMZON 84 QTOTJOB 117 QUTCOFFSET 84 T Telecom Sales 154 Text Retrieval and Information Extraction TREX 147 TMK server 36 TMKSVR 5 36 37 installing 46 TMS 134 tool Abstract Window Toolkit 91 developer trace 131 Index Management Service 147 installation 37 Quick Sizer 17 R3SETUP 36 SAINT 111 SAP Partner Connectivity Kit 90 SPAM 136 TREX 147 Tracing and XML parsing SAP MI Server 92 transport management system TMS 134 TREX 80 82 83 95 109 147 248 An Overview of Installing SAP Applicati
263. nario mySAP PLM Collaboration Projects 00000e eee eee 167 5 5 8 Scenario mySAP PLM Design Collaboration with cFolders 169 5 6 Installation of mySAP Supplier Relationship Management 172 5 6 1 SAP SRM Business overview 00 00 cece 172 5 6 2 Scenario mySAP SRM Self Service Procurement an example 177 Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 00 00 00 cece ee 183 6 1 Installation of a 3 tier landscape 0 0 0 eee 184 6 1 1 Definition of a 3 tier landscape 0 0 eee 184 6 1 2 Documentation and installation guides for 3 tier installations 184 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP 5 186 6 1 4 Differences between 2 tier and 3 tier landscapes 00000 187 6 1 5 The System i file system of a 3 tier landscape 00 cee eee eee 188 6 1 6 Homogeneous System i 3 tier landscapes 0 0 c eee eee eee 191 6 1 7 Example Setup a 3 tier landscape in a homogeneous System i landscape 195 6 1 8 Heterogeneous 3 tier landscapeS nuanua 197 6 1 9 Database server on a System i server and application server on Windows 200 6 1 10 Database server on the System i and application server on Linux 208 6 2 Standalone SAP gateway 20 ete ee 215 6 2 1 Gateway instance for 6 xx technology 00 cee eee eee eee 216 6 2 2 Manually install a gat
264. ncepts of the installation process for all components of the mySAP Business Solutions gt Installation of mySAP Enterprise Resource Planning In this section we show you some concepts and procedures about how to install the mySAP Enterprise Resource Planning ERP solution as the main and most popular application of the mySAP Business Suite As the successor of SAP R 3 and R 3 Enterprise mySAP ERP is the main component of all SAP applications We demonstrate the installation of mySAP ERP within the scope of the following activities Planning activities Preparation activities Installation activities Post installation activities Additionally we provide an overview of the installation concepts and installation steps of the other mySAP Business Suite solutions nySAP CRM mySAP PLM mySAP SCM mySAP SRM This should give you a short impression of these modules It is not meant to be an actual guideline about how to run the specific installation procedures Always keep in mind to use the official SAP installation guides found at the SAP Marketplace when you install any of these SAP applications The SAP Marketplace can be found at http service sap com instguides Copyright IBM Corp 2006 All rights reserved 107 Installation of mySAP Customer Relationship Management Here we show you an overview to the mySAP Customer Relationship Management CRM installation on System i models You learn the versatile additional componen
265. nces of an ABAP Java system are the central instance the central services instance and the database instance Optionally you can install one or more dialog instances if required Finally in Figure 2 17 you see the possibilities about how to distribute an SAP system consisting of an ABAP and a Java system between a central and other distributed systems Central System Distributed System Central Database Central Central Central Services Instance Host Services Instance Host Central Instance Central Instance J2EE ABAP J2EE ABAP Engine Engine Engine Engine Central Services Central Services Instance Instance a SSS SSS SS ABAP Schema ABAP Schema Figure 2 17 Distribution of an ABAP Java system For some databases not for DB2 UDB for iSeries the two SAP systems also use two separate databases For DB2 UDB for iSeries you also have the option to share one database for both systems see Figure 2 18 on page 28 Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 27 Web AS ABAP Web AS Java C Database gt ABAP Java Schema Schema Figure 2 18 SAP Web AS ABAP system SAP Web AS Java system with one database For more information about the distribution of SAP system instances see the gt SAP note 654801 Database configuration for ABAP and Java gt SAP note 443925 MCOD on iSeries gt SAP note 744055 Common journal for ABAP and Java library 2 3 3 SAP system components
266. nclude customer data Depending on the amount of data involved the requirements may change For a more precise sizing definition that reflects your particular system load you can choose the following options gt You can use the SAP Quick Sizer tool available on the SAP Service Marketplace You enter information about your planned system and the tool calculates some requirements But very often the result is not really based on enough data of your project For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace at service sap com sizing gt Contact a hardware vendor The vendor analyzes the load and calculates the suitable hardware sizing for you If you have any questions contact the person in charge of installation your competence center or your local IBM representative For more information contact the IBM International SAP IBM Competence Center ISICC or another competent IBM Business Partner gt The SAP sizing considerations chapter in Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 provides sizing rules and rules of thumb for your configuration gt Check the network requirements For more information see the documentation Network Integration of SAP Servers in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com network Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 17 In the following sections we list the requirements for an SAP system installation on System i configurations 2 2 2 Har
267. nformation about the installation and configuration of SLD see SAP System Landscape Directory on SAP Web AS 6 40 on SAP Service Marketplace at the following Web site http service sap com instguidesnw04 Then go to Installation gt SAP Web AS Also see page 182 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models gt Check the SAP directories The following gives you some background information about the SAP directories that have been created during the installation Some definitions are The global host is the machine on which the SAP central instance is running on your System i server The local host is the current machine on which an SAP instance is running The DB host is the machine on which the database server is running on your System i server The base directories required for the SAP central instance are SAPGLOBALHOST sapmnrt created on the central instance of your System i server It contains general SAP software SAPTRANSHOST sapmni trans created on the transport host It contains SAP software for the transport of objects between SAP systems usr sap The installation program creates the directory usr sap on the local host and shares it as saploc On local hosts SGAPLOCALHOST saploc contains only instance specific data and copies of the SAP executables The executables on the local host are updated from those on the global host each time the local instance is st
268. nfrastructure Import the XI content for the following components SRM Server 5 0 SAP Catalog Content Management 2 0 SAP BI Content 3 5 2 Download and install the latest SLD Content from the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Download gt Support Packages and Patches Entry by Application Group gt Additional Components SAP Master Data for SLD at http service sap com swdc Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 179 2 Installation integration of SAP R 3 or SAP R 3 Enterprise SAP R 3 4 6C recommended Refer to the SAP R 3 Installation on lt Platform gt lt Database gt part of the corresponding installation package or Installation Guide SAP R 3 Enterprise on lt Platform gt lt Database gt part of the corresponding installation package SAP R 3 and SAP R 3 Enterprise are not part of this installation and are therefore also not contained in the installation package A separate SAP R 3 or SAP R 3 Enterprise installation package is therefore required Installation of SAP R 3 Plug In For the installation see SAP notes 704564 R 3 plug in PI 2004 1 installation delta upgrade and 708736 Release restrictions R 3 Plug in 2004 1 For more information about SAP R 3 Plug Ins see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com r3 plug in The installation of SAP R 3 Plug In is not required if local PO handling is performed exclusively or if no SAP R 3 system i
269. ng SAP Applications on System i Models E SAPinst SAPINST IBASO3 BASYCS COM SAP NetWeaver 04 Support Release 1 gt ABAP System gt IBM DB2 UDB f i E3 IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries gt PTF Level Check Specify whether you want the installation to check your current system PTF level PFT Check Ifyou select this option the installation checks your current PTF level against the IBM INFOAPAR INFOPAR must exist in dusisagtrans contig Execute PTF Check v INFOPAR Source Copy INFOAPAR from Kernel DVD O Keep Existing INFOAPAR Additional Information Checking against the IBM INFOAPAR delivered with the Kernel DYD indicates whether your system fulfils a minimum PTF level to successfully run the installation However the INFOAPAR on the Kernel CD could be outdated Therefore we strongly recommend that you get the latest IBM INFOAPAR from IBM and apply it before running the installation Back C Cancel Logor Figure 3 24 SAPINST PTF level check installation window On the kernel DVD SAP ships versions of the informational APARs that were current when the SAP release shipped ran through the final verification therefore the installation should run successfully at this level However you may have to check your PTF level against a newer version that you downloaded from IBM In this case you have to copy the informational APAR into the directory usr sap trans config manually The name must be INFOAPAR vrm where vrm i
270. ng and Replenishment F amp R Project Manufacturing PM Responsive Replenishment RPT Supplier Managed Inventory SMI Release Processing RP YYYY Y Additionally there are three other SAP SCM related scenarios concerning industrial business solutions gt Make to Order for OEM gt Maintenance and Service Planning gt Multiple Output Planning Note You can find the most current information about the technical implementation of mySAP SCM as well as the Master Guide SAP for Discrete Industries and SAP for Mill Products and the latest installation and configuration guides in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com instguides We recommend that you use the documents listed in this section These guides are updated and enhanced on a regular basis 5 4 1 mySAP SCM overview mySAP Supply Chain Management mySAP SCM offers a user friendly powerful and competitive solution which enables the modeling and optimization of the whole logistic chain In the middle of this solution we have the SAP Supply Chain management server SAP SCM server One of the big pillars on which the IT architecture of most business scenarios of the mySAP SCM solution is based is the secure scalable and reliable SAP client server architecture which consists of presentation client application server and database server mySAP Supply Chain Management server mySAP Supply Chain Management server SAP SCM server is part of the mySAP Su
271. no J2EE Engine Web AS Java Database gt Java Schema Figure 2 11 One SAP Web AS ABAP system Mandatory instances of an ABAP system are the central instance and the database instance Optionally you can install one or more dialog instances and gateway instances In Figure 2 12 on page 25 you see the possibilities about how to distribute an ABAP system between a central and other distributed systems An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Central System Central Database Instance Host Central Instance ABAP Engine gt S ABAP Schema Distributed System Central Instance Host Central Instance ABAP Engine Database Instance Host SS SSS SSS ABAP Schema Figure 2 12 Possible distribution of an ABAP system SAP Web AS Java system The variant shown in Figure 2 13 only consists of the J2EE Engine with auxiliary services There is no ABAP Engine Web AS Java Database gt Java Schema Figure 2 13 One SAP Web AS Java system Mandatory instances of a Java system are the central instance the central services instance SCS and the database instance The central instance and the central services instance run on the same host Optionally you can install one or more Java dialog instances In Figure 2 14 on page 26 you see the possibilities about how to distribute an Java system between a central and ot
272. nsaction Server optional 17 Apply the latest kernel and support packages 18 If you install SAP Web AS as the basis for an SAP component that uses the Knowledge Provider KPRO component for example SAP BW or SAP KW schedule asynchronous indexing and de indexing 19 If you want to use KPRO check for problems in IMS monitoring 20 Perform the client copy 21 Check the RFC destination 22 Change passwords of created i5 OS users 23 Change passwords of created users 24 Perform a full backup 25 Prepare the SAP system for business application Note If you install an SAP Web Application Server ABAP on a separate System i server verify that gt You have the all current installation guides from the SAP Service Marketplace for your SAP release available gt You have the all current SAP notes mentioned in the installation guides available The necessary installation guides are listed in Installation guides of SAP Web Application Server on System i models on page 186 SAP notes have priority over the installation guides An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Start and stop all instances together with a System i application server In order to start and stop all instances at the same time in a homogeneous 3 tier installation the job R3RMTDB up to Release 4 5B or QNDAEDRSQL as of Release 4 6A must already be active on all System i configurations before the start up In addition you must
273. nsiderations and procedures described in 5 2 2 mySAP ERP installation planning activities on page 115 and the following 5 5 Installation of mySAP Product Lifecycle Management mySAP Product Lifecyle Management PLM is part of the mySAP Business Suite Although it is not as well known as mySAP ERP or mySAP CRM there are increasing demands for this application We provide a short overview of this SAP application what it is about how is it handled and how it is installed 164 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 5 5 1 About mySAP PLM mySAP Product Lifecycle Management PLM is a comprehensive end to end solution that covers product innovation engineering and design new product introduction production ramp up and the management of ongoing engineering changes that are seamlessly communicated to mySAP SCM Additionally for plant operators mySAP PLM provides an integrated solution to improve their asset utilization from the investment decision to maintenance management and replacement The key functional areas of mySAP PLM include the following gt Life cycle data management Provides integrated product and process engineering capabilities for managing requirements bills of material routing and resource data recipes CAD models and related technical documentation It also provides sophisticated change management spanning from engineering to production to service which ensures consistency of product
274. nsists of the SAP Gateway only and can be operated and maintained independently of other SAP systems The SAP Gateway enables non SAP systems to act as a communication partner for SAP systems There are various reasons for installing a stand alone gateway For example in a system where the database instance and central instance are on different hosts a gateway instance on the database server host enables remote function calls Another reason for installing a gateway is to enable communication between systems network architecture SNA and SAP systems An SAP stand alone Gateway is used in CRM E Selling and Interaction Center mainly for the Index Management Server and the Internet Pricing and Configurator and also for the Computer Telephony Integration CTI feature 5 3 7 CRM software component matrix Table 5 9 on page 150 and Table 5 10 on page 152 provide an overview of the software components that are required for the implementation of a specific scenario Table 5 8 on page 150 lists the abbreviations that are used in Table 5 9 on page 150 and Table 5 10 on page 152 Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 149 Table 5 8 Abbreviations of the mySAP CRM key capabilities E Commerce ESELL E Selling gt CRM E Selling ESLR3 E Selling for R 3 gt CRM E Service ESERV E Service Channel Management gt Channel Management CHMGT Field Applications gt CRM Field Sales FSALES gt CRM Field Service FSERV Interac
275. nstallation of SAP R 3 Plug In 2004 1 or higher on the OLTP See SAP note 704564 R 3 Plug In Installation Delta Upgrade PI 2004 1 and the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com r3 plug in 3 Installation of SAP SCM server 4 1 Refer to the nstallation Guide SAP SCM server 4 1 on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt available under the topic mySAP Business Suite Solutions at http service sap com instguides 4 Installation of SAP liveCache 7 5 for SAP SCM Refer to the nstallation Guide SAP liveCache Server available under the topic mySAP Business Suite Solutions at http service sap com instguides 5 Optional Installation of SAP APO Optimizer 162 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Refer to the Installation Guide SAP APO Optimizer For SAP SCM 4 1 available under the topic mySAP Business Suite Solutions at http service sap com instguides Installation of the mySAP SCM Server mySAP SCM is part of the mySAP Business Suite Therefore the installation is based on the SAP NetWeaver 04 and on the SAP Web Application Server 04 We described the concepts the planning and preparation activities and the single steps of the installation procedure of the SAP Web Application Server previously in this chapter The following is the list of activities for the mySAP SCM server installation Planning activities Preparation activities Installation activities Post install
276. nstalling the SAP components are gt SAP Master Guide for the underlaying main components SAP NetWeaver mySAP ERP gt SAP Component Installation Guides which are usually divided in two parts see Figure 2 4 on page 14 Part Planning and Preparation Guide Part Il Installation and Post Installation Guide Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 13 Planning and Preparation Installation and Guide Post Installation Guide Post Installation Preparation Installation Figure 2 4 The two parts of the SAP Component Installation Guides The SAP Master Guides provide an overview of which SAP components you have to install for a particular SAP application An SAP application is also known as key function area or as scenario The Component Installation Guides describe in more detail the exact procedure about how to install the specific component For your planning and preparation refer to the Planning and Preparation guide before you start the real installation In the Installation and Post Installation guide you find the single steps you have to perform for the specific installation Each guide has links to special SAP notes You have to consider these notes as additional components to the installation guides While the installation guides are not updated when there are some optimizations or corrected errors in the installation guides the SAP notes correct these errors Therefore t
277. o the QXDAEDRSQL job the job spawns a second shadow job This shadow job is switched to run under the user profile running on the local system When SI DOO connects to the QXDAEDRSQL job the job spawns another job under user profile QUSER This new job is switched immediately to run under user profile SIDOO 10 Configure SAProuter for Remote Connection to SAP Support SAP offers its customers access to support and to a number of remote services such as the EarlyWatch Service or the GoingLive Service To establish the remote connection to SAP you need the SAProuter software which controls and monitors communication between your SAP system servers and the front end computers For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com remoteconnection 11 If you installed a unicode system run unicode specific reports Refer to the installation guides 12 Configure the transport management system TMS You configure the domain controller in the TMS by calling transactions SEO6 and STMS a In your SAP system call transaction STMS b Enter the required information to configure the domain controller Note If you are not sure how to configure the domain controller choose Save and configure the controller later or choose Information to display the TMS online documentation Attention It is no trivial task to configure the TMS 134 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 13 Perform the
278. og or Figure 3 19 SAPINST Database installation window Most dialogs are self explanatory Some System i specific dialogs are explained in the following sections 3 2 7 Install the ABAP central instance Directly included into the installation of the database is the installation of the SAP central instance Installing the ABAP central instance with SAPINST After installing the database you can install the ABAP central instance again by executing SAPINST EXE This also requires several entries before the installation starts for example gt Instance number In our example 00 gt Instance host In our example IBASO3 And later the following gt Password for the SIDOFR In our example for the ERXOFR Figure 3 20 on page 57 shows you the Central Instance installation window 56 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models E SAPinst SAPINST IBASO3 SAP ERP 2004 SR1 gt ABAP System gt IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries gt Non Unicode gt Databa I E3 ABAP System gt Central Instance Enter the central instance parameters SAP System Instance Identification ERX Instance Number 00 Instance Host ieaso O Additional Information The ABAP central instance requires an instance number as a technical identifier for internal processes This number must be unique for this installation host The instance specific port number is required as a unique communication channel Back C Cancel
279. ogon for the Microsoft Management Console MMC LDAP can also be used for other purposes for example the LDAP Connector If you do not want to use LDAP for SAP Logon or MMC no LDAP specific installation steps are required now Note For all these mySAP SRM planning activities point 1 to 5 see the corresponding considerations and procedures as described in the 5 2 2 mySAP ERP installation planning activities on page 115 and the following mySAP SRM Installation preparation activities Check the general information hardware and software requirements Check the hardware and software requirements Check Qp2Term Qp2Shell and the OS 400 Portable Application Solution Environment Install the Qshell Check and adjust the System i system values Set the time zone environment variable Adjust the startup program QSTRUP Check the distribution of libraries on ASPs Add a user ASP Configure the TCP IP Adjust the relational database name Install English as a secondary language Install additional languages Set up the transport directory Prepare a Windows user account and System i user profile Install TMKSVR and create an installation share Install the SAP front end software Check the general information about preparing the system for SAPinst Prepare the system for the SAPinst GUI vvvvvvvvvvvyvvrvvvvvv iy Optionally you have to prepare the active directory for use with the SAP system only if you decided to use
280. on ASPs Adding a user ASP Configuring the TCP IP Adjusting the relational database name Preparing the active directory Installing English as a secondary language Setting Up the transport directory Preparing the Windows host for the SAP system installation Preparing a Windows User Account and i5 OS user profile Installing TMKSVR and creating an installation share Choosing an SAP system ID vvvvvvvyvvyvrvvvviy Installation process activities gt Running SAPinst gt Input for the Installation Post Installation activities Granting authorizations for Operating System Collector Programs Starting and stopping the SAP system Logging on to the SAP system Installing the SAP online documentation Installing the SAP license Starting the SAP Presentation GUI Checking SAP system services Adjusting the menu and IMG structure Changing passwords of created users SAP system users System i users Removing the SAPinst installation files Accessing a remote database Configuring SAProuter and SAPNet R 3 Front End Configuring the Transport Management System Performing basic operations Configuring the number of work processes Installing additional languages Activating the Integrated Internet Transaction Server Performing the client copy Performing a full backup vvvvvvvvvvvvrvyvrvyvvvvvv vy Note For all these mySAP SCM concepts planning preparation installation and post installation activities see the corresponding co
281. on of an SAP Web AS ABAP Java system 2 Installation of SAP GUI on each host from which you want to connect to SAP Web AS using an SAP GUI 3 Installation of SAP Mobile Infrastructure Client 4 6 4 SAP Mobile Infrastructure documentation reference Refer to the following installation guides for more information about installing SAP Mobile Infrastructure gt Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server ABAP on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt gt Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server Java on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt gt SAP Front End Installation Guide gt Installation Guide SAP Mobile Infrastructure 4 7 Installation of SAP Knowledge Warehouse SAP Knowledge Warehouse SAP KW can be used for the following purposes gt Documentation DOC gt Training TRAIN gt Quality Management Manuals QMM To receive the initial shipment of documentation content including quality manual included in license training content which needs to be licensed separately or both go to the SAP Software Shop on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic SAP Knowledge Warehouse and register for the first content shipment at http service sap com softwarecatalog If in addition you want to receive the regular SAP content updates for SAP KW the SAP Software Shop is also the location to subscribe to them Subscription ensures that the updates are shipped to you automatically 4 7 1 SAP Kn
282. on of the SAP NetWeaver Keep your system up to date system landscape Use the documentation like Support Package Stack installation guides Supplementary Information SAP Notes High Availability Platform Availability Matrix Find the central notes related to SAP Find guidelines and tips on how to implement Find technical and release planning information NetWeaver 2004s high availability solutions in your system on SAP NetWeaver 2004s landscape How To Guides Sizing Best Practices Find information on how to perform Find guidelines and recommendations on Find information on pre packed easy to use specific tasks hardware requirements for your solutions for SAP NetWeaver implementation Figure 4 1 NetWeaver installation guides mySAP NetWeaver components on the Installation Master CD Figure 4 2 on page 74 shows you the mySAP NetWeaver 2004 SR1 components of the Installation Master CD Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 73 E SAPinst SAPINST dekois23 deko wella de 5 sap installation Master i Gi SAP NetWeaver 04 Support Release 1 Welcome Welcome to NetWeaver Installation 2 E ABAP System S IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries D Unicode A Non Unicode Database Instance Installation Central Instance Installation Dialog Instance Installation BG Internet Graphic Server Upgrade Installation U ABAP Database Content Export 7 Gi Java Add In for ABAP amp IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries S Central Sy
283. on on System i models Installation of SAP Mobile Infrastructure Overview of the SAP MI installation on System i models Installation of SAP Knowledge Warehouse Overview of the SAP KW installation on System i models Installation of SAP Solution Manager Overview of the SAP SolMan installation on System i models We emphasize this topic more than the previous SAP applications because the SAP SolMan will be mandatory for every SAP installation Copyright IBM Corp 2006 All rights reserved 69 We demonstrate the installation of the SAP SolMan as the central SAP application for watching controlling and managing the complete customer system landscape for the whole life cycle of the applications The SAP SolMan also works as a single point of contact SAP to the customer landscape In the section describing each of these applications we give you an overview of The business application The technical system landscape The components of the solution The implementation steps vvvy For more details refer to the SAP and IBM documentation available for each SAP NetWeaver component 4 1 General aspects of mySAP NetWeaver 04 70 Responding to a dramatic industry shift to a services based enterprise scale integrated business architecture SAP has introduced Enterprise Services Architecture ESA and its technical foundation mySAP NetWeaver which has as its basis component the SAP Web Application Server From this point o
284. on results improve with increasing CPU time gt User specific optimizers external optimizers External optimizers can be called from the SAP SCM server also as batch job You can use the SAP APO Optimizer for detailed production scheduling supply network planning transportation planning and vehicle scheduling sequencing It is an optional part of the SCM business scenarios SAP Event Manager The SAP Event Manager SAP EM is an integrated component of the SAP SCM system that offers the possibility to process application objects in various application systems and thereby to track events for individual objects processes or parts of these throughout the entire supply chain The SAP Event Manager can link update and evaluate the event messages with the application data from the supply chain network It allows you to gt Monitor measure and evaluate business processes The SAP Event Manager automatically monitors events that occur and those that have not been reported for example goods issue purchase order transfer production end or unreported proof of delivery The SAP Event Manager can automatically transfer data to a data warehouse system that uses key performance indicators to create performance data for the quality of execution and notification gt Employ checking processes and notify persons responsible to control events The SAP Event Manager checks the Supply Chain Event Management relevant obje
285. onents of mySAP Customer Relationship Management 141 5 3 3 Overall installation sequence 0 000 e eee 141 5 3 4 Additional tools technology components and activities 143 5 3 5 Communication and Development Station 00000 cee eee 149 5 3 6 R 3 Standalone Gateway 0 0 cee 149 5 3 7 CRM software component matrix a saaa 0000 149 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 5 3 8 General mySAP CRM installation issues 0 00000 eee 154 5 4 Installation of the mySAP Supply Chain Management 02 0005 157 5 4 1 mySAP SCM overview 0000 c cette eee 157 54 2 SAP APO Optimizer iaaa a Dees eet obama ee eee Pa Pea eed 158 5 4 3 System infrastructure 0 0 0 eee 160 5 4 4 Technical infrastructure of mySAP SCM exemplary 00000 160 5 4 5 mySAP SCM Project Manufacturing overview and implementation 161 5 5 Installation of mySAP Product Lifecycle Management 000 0005 164 5 5 1 About mySAP PLM prosese uiie ieia iie aa iaa tees 165 5 5 2 About SAP cProject Suite 3 10 for mySAP PLM 202200 00s 165 5 5 3 Integrated Business Content 0000 c cee 166 5 5 4 mySAP PLM Software component matrix 0 0 000 eee eee 166 5 5 5 Technical implementation 0 0 00 c ee eee 167 5 5 6 Installation of SAP cProjects Suite 3 10 and cFolders part of cProjects 167 5 5 7 Sce
286. ons on System i Models U UC 52 UDI 126 UID 210 UME 113 Unicode Code page 62 Unicode version UC 52 Universal Data Integration UDI 126 user S User 8 User Management Engine UME 113 user profile 137 Systemi 42 User Store 113 W WE21 231 Web Application Server basic system variants 23 Web service 70 WebSphere 22 WFM Core 111 Windows application server 198 installation activities 206 perform a backup 207 planning activities 201 post installation activities 207 preparation activities 203 Windows domain structure 204 Windows service iSeries Access for Windows Remote Command 198 Windows user account 42 WRKENVVAR 118 WRKLNK 123 WRKRDBDIRE 123 X xI 72 installation 84 XI Adapter Engine 85 XI Adapter Engine J2SE 85 XML messaging service 85 XSS 127 Index 249 250 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 0 5 spine 0 475 lt gt 0 873 Redbooks 250 lt gt 459 pages An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Preparations for installing SAP applications with IBM i5 0S Comprehensive checklist of installation tasks Understanding special installation scenarios Systems Applications and Products in Data Processing SAP offers software applications for business These offerings include a comprehensive set of business applications that are supported on the Sys
287. ont end During the installation SAPinst prompts you to change the passwords for these standard users in client 000 If for any reason the SAP and DDIC users still have initial passwords you must change their passwords Otherwise there is a serious security risk because it is possible for anyone to log on to your SAP system using the initial passwords a Start SAP logon on the central instance host e SAP GUI for Windows On the machine where you have installed the front end choose Start gt Programs gt SAP Front EndRelease gt SAPlogon e SAP GUI for Java Enter the guilogon command from the GUI installation directory The SAP logon dialog box appears b Create a logon entry for the newly installed system Table 5 4 Logon entry fields of the SAPGUI Fea Yoweny oS Description Give a meaningful description for example the host name of the central instance or the SAP system ID Specify the name of the central instance host System ID Specify the SAP system ID Specify the number you entered for the central instance during the installation For more information choose F1 When you choose OK the SAP logon dialog box reappears and now includes an entry for the new system c Double click the new system entry The logon window for the SAP system appears d Log on as user SAP or DDIC 4 Set up load balancing This is a procedure to balance the user logon between the central instance and the application serv
288. or SAP BW according to SAP note 567745 c Install SAP BW Business Content Add On BI_CONT 3 5 2 on the SAP Web AS ABAP system according to SAP note 717812 For a minimal system landscape you can install SAP BW on your SAP SRM Server Install the SAP BW Business Content Add On on the SRM Server as described in SAP note 717812 For more information see also the documentation Master Guide SAP NetWeaver 04 section SAP BW The use of the SAP BW is optional See the description of this component in the section Software Components Overview to decide if it is required for your business scenario 10 Installation of SAP Enterprise Portal optional Refer to the Master Guide SAP NetWeaver 04 section SAP Enterprise Portal part of the corresponding installation package The use of SAP Enterprise Portal is optional It is required for the integration of mySAP SRM into a portal 11 Import the following Business Packages into the Enterprise Portal Business Package for SRM Business Package for Supplier Portal Download the Business Packages from the SAP Developer Network under the topic Portal Content Portfolio at http www sdn sap com Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 181 182 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Special SAP installations This chapter describes the concepts preparation and installation of special SAP solutions It focuses on the techniques about how to us
289. or SAP systems on System i models based on the Web AS 6 40 Java you also have to use the R8LOAD method For this environment the SAVLIB RSTLIB method is not supported by SAP For systems based on Web AS the InstKit must be patched For systems with release 4 6D and earlier the installation is done with R3SETUP using the script DBR38CP R3S 224 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Checklist for a homogeneous system copy based on Web AS 6 20 This section gives you a detailed checklist about the single steps Note This list is the result of experiences in the field It is not official documentation of SAP and therefore not officially supported Use it on your own risk The following checklist is for the repeated homogeneous System Copy is based on the Guideline for the Homogeneous System Copy of WEB Application Server 620 documentation and the following related SAP notes SAP note 708864 titled iSeries SAPinst kit for system copy 6 20 SAP note 585277 titled iSeries Performing a homogeneous system copy SAP note 206935 titled AS 400 Subsequent actions for homogeneous system copies Yv y 1 Be sure you have the 6 20 Kernel CDs copied to the System i server only for the check location phase in the SAPinst script Later the existing 6 40 kernel is reused 2 Get the license key from http service sap com licensekeys If a license key already exists be sure you can access the internet 3 Both System i server
290. orities see the Users and authorities topic in Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 the installation guide 2a and 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 If required perform a domain installation without being a domain administrator The procedure about how to perform a domain installation without being a domain administrator is described in the planning and preparation guide Configure the Windows transport system Some command line functions of the transport program tp exe do not work for example shadow buffers You have to correct the transport profile When using tp exe from the command prompt it is necessary to modify the transport configuration profile to indicate the transport directory in NETBIOS naming convention The name of a computer system can be up to 15 alphanumeric characters with no blank spaces The name must be unique on the network and can contain the following special characters LO R p pan The following characters are not allowed s lt gt Before you start to set up the Windows transport system you have to configure the domain controller in the Transport Management System TMS which sets up the TMS files also in the Integrated File System of the System i server For additional activities see the installation guide 2a see 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 Install the SAP F
291. orted for all SAP components and for all releases Also some of the procedures are only available as pilot project for certain SAP components SAP releases and or databases For more information see SAP note 543715 gt Besides the procedures provided with SAP systems there might also other methods to replicate existing SAP systems for example methods offered by hardware partners SAP systems copied or migrated with such methods are still supported by SAP but support cannot be provided by SAP for these non SAP procedures Instead the corresponding supplier of the procedure for example the hardware partner is in charge of providing support for the non SAP procedure gt If you want to perform the system copy of a Unicode system that is source and target systems are Unicode systems the same procedures can be used as for copying non Unicode systems Table 6 3 System copy and migration procedures Procedure Standard system copy Incremental migration IMIG Standard procedure using the tools gt R3SETUP up to SAP Web AS 6 10 gt SAPinst as of SAP Web AS 6 20 IMIG is a special method to perform a system copy of large systems with only a minimum downtime To achieve this all large tables are exported during uptime and subsequent changes of these tables are logged Later the tables are updated in the target system using the logged information This procedure is valid for Homogeneous system copy Heterogeneou
292. overview Self Service Procurement Indirect Procurement enables your employees to create and manage their own requirement requests This relieves your purchasing department of a huge administrative burden while making the procurement process both faster and more responsive For more information about Self Service Procurement see the documentation Business Scenario Descriptions for mySAP SRM Deployment options This section describes the deployment options that are supported for Self Service Procurement However the open and flexible design of SAP Enterprise Buyer also allows you to combine the described deployment options gt Classic deployment You implement the SAP Enterprise Buyer system and one or multiple ERP systems All Materials Management MM is mapped in the ERP system Additionally Accounting Fl and Controlling CO are processed in the ERP system gt The extended classic deployment You implement the SAP Enterprise Buyer system and one or multiple ERP systems The complete procurement process takes place in the SAP Enterprise Buyer system The purchase order in the SAP Enterprise Buyer system is the leading purchase order Goods receipts confirmations and invoices can be pre entered in the SAP Enterprise Buyer system Purchase order data is updated in the back end system from SAP Enterprise Buyer Goods receipt and invoice data is updated from the back end system gt The stand alone deployment In this deployment
293. owledge Warehouse business overview SAP Knowledge Warehouse KW delivers the technical infrastructure you need to set up and manage your own enterprise specific knowledge base in the areas of documentation training and manuals For project teams and end users SAP KW streamlines training and Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 93 business processes helping you to reduce your costs In addition the possibility to reuse supplement and continually update SAP content offers great saving potential SAP KW provides an information repository for companies of all sizes including global multilingual companies with facilities to model structures according to their corporate and market structure Use SAP KW to create and adjust documentation manuals and training materials of varying media Tailor the materials to your specific business processes using the editors and office products your employees know If necessary SAP can deliver SAP KW with current SAP materials so that you can immediately begin training your project team and end users and edit the corresponding documentation SAP KW is shipped with the following content created specifically for SAP application gt Standard delivery Documentation context sensitive online application help Quality management manual template EN ISO 9000 ff and 14000 compliant gt Optional package Training materials includes course materials and instructor guides
294. parate J2EE server in stand alone mode where your Web applications are installed Note A J2EE add in installation is mandatory for the XI Java Components For all other components Web Applications Enterprise Portal we recommend that you install a stand alone J2EE Refer to the topics Installation Installation Guide Web AS Java 6 40 lt Platform gt lt Database gt at http service sap com nw04installation 4 Install the BW Java components Both components MMR 3 50 Metamodel Repository MMR 3 50 and Universal Data Integration UDI 3 50 are delivered together in a single installation The BW Java components are optional for the mySAP ERP key capabilities 126 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Installation Guide SAP Business Information Warehouse 3 5 at http service sap com nw04installation Install SAP Exchange Infrastructure XI 3 0 Java Components and subsequently configure the local SLD As stated previously the XI Java Components require an add in installation of the J2EE If you operate a separate SAP XI system you can elect to runa central SLD on a separate server For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics Installation Guide SAP Exchange Infrastructure 3 0 at http service sap com nw04installation Install Search and Classification TREX 6 1 For performance reasons
295. plorer Analyzer and SAP BW Reporting with SAP BW Web Applications For these scenarios the component is required if documents and searching for documents are available For all other scenarios this component is not required Note TREX is not supported on i5 OS Install the TREX on another platform like Windows 32 bit AIX 5 2 5 3 but not on Windows 64 bit or Linux on Power 4 Optional Installation of SAP BW Pre calculation Service This is only required for SAP BW Reporting with Business Explorer Analyzer 5 Installation of Internet Explorer or Netscape browser on each host from which you want to display SAP BW Web Applications 6 Optional Installation of Crystal Enterprise SAP Edition Version 10 Crystal Enterprise server component and Crystal Reports design tool This is only required if you are require additional capabilities for formatted reporting For more information see SAP Service Marketplace under the topic FAQ at http service sap com businessobjects 4 3 4 SAP BW documentation reference The following installation guides are available on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic Installation at http service sap com instguidesNw04 80 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Installation Guide SAP Business Information Warehouse Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server ABAP on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server
296. posite Application Framework 2 Crystal Enterprise 80 Crystal Report 80 Customizing Scout 143 Enterprise Portal 72 Enterprise Services Architecture 70 Exchange Infrastructure 72 84 industry specific 3 Internet Sales 127 IPC Web 127 Knowledge Provider 136 Knowledge Warehouse 72 LSO Content Player 127 Master Data Management 72 MI Client 92 Copyright IBM Corp 2006 All rights reserved Mobile Infrastructure 72 91 mySAP Business Suite 40 108 mySAP Customer Relationship Management 138 mySAP Supply Chain Management 157 NetWeaver ix 40 71 NetWeaver Business Intelligence 2 NetWeaver Developer Studio 2 NetWeaver Development Environment 72 NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure 2 NetWeaver Master Data Management 2 NetWeaver Mobile 2 NetWeaver Portal 2 NetWeaver Visual Composer 2 SAP Business Solutions and Applications 1 Software Lifecycle Manager 32 Transport Management System 134 TREX 82 WFM Core 111 XSS 127 Applications for Information Workers 1 ASP 62 add a user ASP 120 asset life cycle management 165 authentic 96 Auxiliary Storage Pool ASP 62 AWT 91 B BC 109 BD54 230 BDLS 230 BI 72 BI_CONT 80 BMS 154 Broadcast Messaging Server BMS 154 Business Explorer 77 Business Explorer Analyzer 80 Business Information Warehouse 72 77 Business Information Warehouse BW 72 Business Intelligence Information Broadcasting 72 BW 72 77 installation 77 BW staging 79 C central instance 28 Central Performance History C
297. pplication RFC D ABAP Application J2EE E SLD Server SLD Client SLD Bridge Figure 2 22 Summary of all System Landscape Directory SLD connections 2 4 3 System Landscape Directory 6 40 Getting Started Checklist Here we show you a checklist about how to proceed to set up the SAP System Landscape Directory SLD Activities on the SLD Server Side gt Adjust Java Virtual machine JVM heap size for the server nodes Depending on the JDK JRE vendor the SLD server requires specific minimum heap size values SUN at least 512MB IBM Compaa at least 1024MB The values are set using the SAP J2EE Engine Config Tool For more details see the Post Installation Guide for SLD 640 section 3 1 gt Activate the SLD Server Call the SLD initial page http lt host gt lt port gt sld and choose Administration Server Settings Enter a name for the Object Server Preferably use a prefix reserved on the SAP Service Marketplace as an Object Server name If you have multiple server nodes the profile parameter ObjectManager Bufferlnstances must be set to false default true Start the SLD Server For more details see the SLD User Manual for Web AS 640 NetWeaver 04 Making Server Settings page 21 gt Import the SAP Master Component information Choose Administration Import and select the file CR_content zip located in lt SAP Install Dir gt lt SID gt SY S global sid model 34 An Overvie
298. pplication Server first with an overview and then the installation steps gt Overview As mentioned previously the SAP Web Application Server is the basis of nearly all SAP applications First we give you a short overview to the Web Application Server Web AS its functions and purposes gt Installation steps for the SAP Web Application Server 6 40 We describe how to install the Web AS and discuss the concepts and demonstrate the single steps of the installation on the System i We focus on the System i specific points and also provide some pictures from a real installation Copyright IBM Corp 2006 All rights reserved 39 3 1 Overview 40 The implementation of the SAP application of the mySAP Business Suite and mySAP NetWeaver is based on the mySAP Web Application Server Therefore the technology and the installation of the mySAP Web Application Server is the basis for the installation of SAP applications such as gt mySAP Business Suite mySAP ERP mySAP CRM mySAP SCM mySAP PLM mySAP SRM gt mySAP NetWeaver including the SAP Solution Manager mySAP BW mySAP EP mySAP XI mySAP MI mySAP KW gt SAP Solution Manager SolMan Figure 3 1 shows you that every SAP solution is based on the Web Application Server either with the ABAP stack or the Java stack We understand to have an SAP solution all applications are within the mySAP Business Suite ERP CRM SCM PLM SRM and mo
299. pply Chain Management solution suite It is an advanced planning and scheduling tool that enables real time decision support and collaborative network optimization across the extended supply chain SAP SCM server helps companies synchronize supply chain activities with their partners and excel at customer service and order fulfillment Embedded SAP BW SAP SCM server is shipped with an embedded SAP BW 3 0B that together with the liveCache contributes to efficiently perform Forecasting amp Replenishment tasks Note SAP SCM server uses the embedded SAP BW architecture for planning technical reasons such as using information cubes that is do not use the SAP BW embedded in SAP SCM server for the reporting purposes of your company Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 157 5 4 2 SAP APO optimizer SAP has developed an innovative and flexible APS optimization application that opens SAP SCMs advanced planning and scheduling capabilities to external optimization technology The Optimization Extension Workbench This strategy enables mySAP SCM customers to take advantage of both the mySAP SCM existing set of optimizers and company specific optimization software The optimization technology integrates different planning methods in one planning system to fulfill optimization requirements gt Optimizers guided by global objective function based on key performance indicators In case of highly complex planning scenarios optimizati
300. procedure see the SAP installation guides in the SAP Marketplace under the topic SAP Components and select the desired SAP application at http service sap com instguides 6 5 Installation of other SAP components There are more SAP components and solutions For example we have some components that are not supported on i5 OS like SAP Master Data Management MDM SAP Business Connector BC SAP Retrieval and Information Extraction TREX SAP Content Server SAP Visual Composer SAP Communication Station vvvvvy On the other side we have some components that are an integrated part of SAP NetWeaver like gt SAP Internet Transaction Server ITS gt SAP Internet Graphics Server IGS gt SAP System Landscape Directory SLD There are much more besides these There are also SAP components based on SAP applications which are already in maintenance but there are already successors to them for example R 3 4 6C or R 3 Enterprise Some of these solutions run on i5 OS or DB 2 UDB for iSeries and some are available only on other platforms On System i models you can run the LPAR method with multiple operating systems and multiple databases i5 OS with its integrated database DB2 UDB for iSeries AIX with multiple databases Linux with multiple databases Windows as IXS or IXA with multiple databases vvvy Therefore all SAP applications can be implemented on a System i system But our focus in this book is the first point
301. program s described in this publication at any time without notice Any references in this information to non IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Information concerning non IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations To illustrate them as completely as possible the examples include the names of individuals companies brands and products All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental COPYRIGHT LICENSE This information contains sample application programs in source language which illustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms You may copy modify and distribute thes
302. r completing the installation successfully you can delete the temporary directories that are necessary during the installation If you use the recommended defaults the directories are named tmp sid with the copies of the CDs or DVDs and usr sap SAPinst with the temporary SAPinst files Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 67 68 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components This chapter shows the installation concepts of the SAP NetWeaver components General aspects of the SAP NetWeaver components are discussed followed by a brief description of SAP NetWeaver components from the application point of view gt General aspects of mySAP NetWeaver 04 The general aspects and differences between SAP NetWeaver 2004 or SAP NetWeaver 04 and SAP NetWeaver 2004s are discussed gt mySAP NetWeaver overview SAP NetWeaver is the technical infrastructure for SAP applications However the Web AS also contains some components also called mySAP applications gt A technical overview of the concepts and installation steps of the following components are given Installation of SAP Business Information Warehouse BW Overview of the SAP BW installation on System i models Installation of SAP Enterprise Portal Overview of the SAP EP installation on System i models Installation of SAP Exchange Infrastructure XI Overview of the SAP XI installati
303. r front ends No proprietary browser needs to be installed on the device gt Customer modification of user interface look and feel using HTML templates The SAP Mobile Infrastructure Client is based on Java and has been tested for Windows 2000 PocketPC EPOC32 and other environments Certain handheld applications require optimized user interfaces and very rapid response times They also require access to native operating system features such as printing peripheral interfaces such as barcode scanners and smart card readers and certain device management functions SAP uses a modified programming model such as Active Server Pages or Embedded Visual Basic that allows 144 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models the SAP Mobile Infrastructure to support these features The PocketPC platform supports this programming model For comprehensive information about the SAP Mobile Infrastructure see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com mi Alternatively refer to 4 6 Installation of SAP Mobile Infrastructure on page 91 SAP Web AS Standard ABAP i Browser Standard Browser Backend System e g SAP R 3 Figure 5 7 mySAP Mobile Infrastructure technical landscape for mySAP CRM Portal enablement The Enterprise Portal Solution primarily consists of the following platforms gt Portal platform gt Knowledge Management platform The Portal platform
304. r what has changed from the previous upgrade maintenance and operations Go to Guide Finder on SDN release i as Planning Documentation to be read before installing and operating SAP NetWeaver software Installation Documentation on installing SAP NetWeaver software Upgrade Documentation on upgrading former releases to SAP NetWeaver 04 Operations Documentation on operating SAP NetWeaver systems Maintenance Documentation on maintaining SAP NetWeaver software including how to install Support Packages SPs SAP Notes NW 04 Instant access to the central SAP Notes for SAP NetWeaver 04 and its components Supplementary Information Security Guide High Availability Platform Availability Matrix Find information on security aspects and considerations for Find guidelines and tips on how to implement high availability Find technical and release planning information on SAP implementing SAP NetWeaver solutions in your system landscape NetWeaver 04 How To Guides Sizing Best Practices Find information on haw to perform specific tasks Find guidelines and recommendations on hardware requirements Find information on pre packed easy to use solutions for for your implementation SAP NetWeaver Related links SDN Ramp up Knowledge Transfer for SAP NetWeaver Security Guide Software Download Center Documentation Center Figure 2 7 SAP NetWeaver 04 installation documentations Figure 2 8 on page 17 shows the System i specific installa
305. rade Guides Education Ramp Up Knowledge Transfer RKT SAP Solutions Training Figure 5 4 CRM versions and documentations 5 3 1 CRM documentation and installation guides You can find the most current information about the technical implementation of CRM 4 0 and the latest installation and configuration guides in the SAP Service Marketplace http service sap com crm inst We recommend that you use the documents that are available for download on these pages gt SAP CRM 4 0 Installation on operating system database gt Information about Plug In Installation for OLTP R 3 Systems gt Language Transport 6 20 BC CTS LAN installing the required languages gt CRM Monitoring Installation Guide gt CRM Communication Station Guide gt Adapter Framework under the topics SAP Customer Relationship Management SAP CRM Powered by SAP NetWeaver Process Integration CRM Integration Services gt CRM Middleware Adapter and Site Types Adapter The Adapter Framework in the SAP Help Portal http help sap com Configuring the CRM Server and the OLTP R 3 System for proper communication gt Components of eSelling and Channel Management Installation Guide Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 139 gt Mobile Client Component Installation Guide gt Installing the Internet Pricing and Configurator gt Text Retrieval amp Information Extraction Installation Guide gt Broadcast
306. rating system commands to set up the system and executing the load routines to load the database The client communicates with the server through TCP IP sockets and reads the installation files through a binary share rootbin The installation files must reside on the System i server so that both the client through the share and the server can access the data Note that this installation concept started with SAP releases 6 x In earlier releases 4 6D and earlier the R3SETUP tool was used directly on the System i server The JInstGui Server runs on a System i subsystem an instance of the TMKSVR and the InstGui client runs on a Windows front end that reads its configuration and programs from the System i IFS in the path usr sap sapinst and connects to the TMKSVR All components of the WEB AS on System i servers are installed using the InstGui An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Note This client server concept with TMKSVR might be object to changes with SAP releases after Web_AS 6 40 Instead of the TMKSVR there will be a PASE SAPInst installation concept 2 6 General steps of an SAP installation In general you have to perform the following steps for the installation of nearly each mySAP application We show you these steps from a high level point of view Attention Refer to the official SAP installation guides for any SAP Installation You must follow the instructions given there and in the correspon
307. rative business maps and best practices for mySAP Product Lifecycle Management You can find comprehensive information about Integrated Business Content for mySAP Product Lifecycle Management on the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com ibc 5 5 4 mySAP PLM Software component matrix Table 5 13 provides an overview of the software components required for the implementation of a specific scenario Table 5 13 mySAP PLM scenario software component matrix M mandatory O optional Collaboration projects Design collaboration with cFolders PI BASIS SAP GUI for customizing and system administration only sesa CPS E T rw ooo o o sewo o o o swo o o o o C A a a a ECL Viewer Viewer a Retrieval amp Information Extraction TREX WFM WFM Core 166 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Collaboration projects Design collaboration with cFolders MS Internet Explorer o Internet MS Internet Explorer o cProject Suite Windows File Explorer Extension Easy Document Management Easy Document Management Management Business Package for Design Collaboration m Note You have to read this matrix vertically That is check which business scenario you want to implement and then verify which software components are mandatory M mandatory and which are optional O optional for your installation In the Master Guide for mySAP PLM Using SAP cProject Suite
308. rator CRM IPC Master data for pricing and configuration is either replicated from SAP SD pricing and SAP PLM configuration knowledge bases to the CRM Server through plug in and CRM Middleware or maintained in the CRM system CRM with no R 3 back end system Master data replication for the CRM Mobile Clients is managed using the CRM Middleware consolidated database The source is the CRM system and not R 8 even if the data is originally maintained in R 3 and replicated to the CRM system Note In CRM 4 0 the IPC data loader is not used for master data replication The most important components of the Internet Pricing and Configurator are gt Sales Configuration Engine SCE also part of the mobile client installation gt Sales Pricing Engine SPE also part of the mobile client installation gt IPC User Interface Ul Configuration UI e JSP or ITS based E Selling Interaction Center e Java Swing based Field Sales UI for pricing analysis The UI for pricing analysis that is used in CRM Online is JSP based Text Retrieval amp Information Extraction TREX The TREX tools support flexible document searching structuring of extensive document collections by using automatic document classification and the extraction of interesting information from a document corpus text mining In the CRM environment the following TREX components are used Index Management Service IMS The SAP Index Management Servi
309. re and within the SAP NetWeaver BW EP XI MI KW and more So you see the importance of the Web AS with its ABAP and Java technology for the SAP applications SAP Solutions are based on SAP Web Application Server M mySAP NetWeaver Components BW EP XI MI KW SAP Web Application Server Technology ABAP JAVA Figure 3 1 The SAP applications are based on the SAP Web Application Server technology If you know the procedures and the principles about how to install the SAP Application Server you can also derive the same knowledge about how to install the other SAP applications Most SAP on System i specific tasks have to be done with the installation of the SAP Web Application Server with its platform dependent tasks An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models In the following Figure 3 2 you see an extract from an overview of the official SAP installation guides in the SAP Marketplace http service sap com instguides Y Installation amp Upgrade Guides gt Industry Solutions Y mySAP Business Suite Solutions e mySAP Business Suite gt mySAP CRM Y my SAP ERP mySAP ERP 2005 Y mySAP ERP 2004 e SAP ECC 5 0 e SRM Server 5 0 e ERP Java Components e ERP ABAP Add On Components e Mobile Infrastructure Components e ERP Further Components e SAP Learning Solution 3 0 Y NetWeaver Components gt Release 04 mySAP Financials mySAP Human Resources mySAP Marketplace gt
310. re Conversion Figure 5 6 The mySAP Solution Manager Customizing Scout within CRM The Customizing Scout is relevant for all key capabilities and supports the following processes gt Customizing data is loaded initially from ECC to CRM using the CRM Middleware download gt The customizing entries can be compared between ECC and CRM and any differences visualized gt Deltas are kept synchronized This means that when Customizing settings are maintained in ECC they are also updated in CRM gt Transport of customizing settings through the test and production system landscape SAP Mobile Infrastructure The SAP Mobile Infrastructure is a platform independent framework that enables mobile devices to run applications offline without a live connection to a server or the Web and later synchronize the data with SAP and non SAP components Key features include the following gt A wide variety of application program interfaces APIs for local data storage data synchronization and so on This approach simplifies application development and also allows third parties to create specific solutions gt A powerful deployment mechanism offers administration free installation upgrades and removal of applications for mobile users This ensures the availability of offline applications on mobile devices gt The ability to generate any kind of plain standard markup language such as HTML to enable the use of standard browse
311. re are some golden rules for the main memory gt Ensure an appropriate configuration of the Share Pools Set the Share Pool MACHINE to at least 10 of the main memory and not less than 600 MB Perfect tuning is to set it to the minimum value that avoids paging For more information search for QMCHPOOL at the iSeries Information Center http publib boulder ibm com infocenter iseries v5r4 index jsp Remove the INTERACT pool unless you are running non SAP applications that generate a significant interactive workload on the System i server Change the subsystem QINTER to use the BASE Sharepool using CHGSBSD See also the SAP notes 428855 and 621793 Activate the Expert Cache only for the BASE Pool For details see also SAP note 428855 Set the SPOOL pool big enough to handle printers and remote output queues if you want to use connection type C in your SAP systems For example 32 MB for about 10 to 20 printers OUTQs Note You can adapt the Share Pool configurations dynamically later during the runtime of the system gt All SAP installation workload on System i models is handled in a separate subsystem that is created during installation The main memory for this subsystem is handled by the BASE Share Pool For a more detailed description see also 2 6 General steps of an SAP installation on page 37 gt The rules for the estimation of the minimum main memory requirements for the installation
312. riant for RSPO1041 contains a field for the system ID Compare with the saved or printed list from the old TARGET SID Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 229 18 Handle the transport requests when a Quality Assurance System is refreshed By the update of the QAS system Quality Assurance System from the PRD System Production all transport requests that have already been in the QAS system but not in the PRD system are now missing in the QAS system Therefore all transport requests that are in the TMS queue of the PRD system must be forwarded to the QAS system and imported because they are not contained in the copied database of the PRD system In the following you find the single activities about how to handle the transport requests In this example TARGET SID is the same as QAS system a Check if there are transport requests in the buffer of the QAS system Print the list and clear the buffer Tip Rename the import buffer file Execute the following commands on operating system level TP cleanbuffer TARGET SID pf usr sap trans bin TP_DOMAIN_dom PFL RNM usr sap trans buffer TARGET SID usr sap trans buffer TARGET SIDdate b Forward all transport requests of the Import Queue of the PRD system to the QAS system from transaction STMS c Import all transport requests in the buffer of the TARGET SID d Then rebuild the former buffer of the QAS system if it wasn t empty in Step a DEL usr sap trans buffer TARGET SID
313. rise Resource Planning SAP NetWeaver 04 provides mySAP Enterprise Resource Planning ERP with a comprehensive integration platform and delivers the foundation to serve all ERP applications SAP NetWeaver is built to extend mySAP ERP and to integrate non SAP systems We have described the installation of SAP NetWeaver 04 in the previous sections The installation of the SAP ERP ECC5 0 itself is based on WEB AS 6 40 so you require the installation guide for ECC5 0 You should also be familiar with the installation guide of WEB AS 6 40 The installation of the SAP R 3 Enterprise 4 7 is based on WEB AS 6 20 In this case too you should check both the installation guides to understand the concepts If you have an installation based on a service release for example SAP R 3 Enterprise 4 7 SR1 this means that SAP has been integrating a higher support package level into the delivery This also implies that you have a different installation package installation guides and also different SAP notes For NetWeaver 2004S the installation guides are split into separate manuals Ensure that you have the latest version of your installation guides and installation notes from the following links gt For installation guides http service sap com instguides gt For installation notes http service sap com notes 5 2 1 mySAP ERP components 110 We have already discussed SAP NetWeaver the foundation upon which mySAP ERP is built We no
314. rm a local or a domain installation Local installation You need to be Local Administrator of the system involved In a local installation all Windows account and user information is stored locally on one host and is not visible to any other hosts in the system If the SAP system is to run on a single system you can perform a local installation Performing a local installation for a distributed system leads to authorization problems that have to be resolved Domain installation You need to be Domain Administrator of the domain involved and all machines in the system must belong to the same domain In a domain installation the user information is stored centrally on the domain controller and is accessible to all hosts in the system If the system is to be distributed across more than one machine we strongly recommend a domain installation If for any reason you are not granted domain administration rights you can perform the installation as a domain user who is a member of the local administrator group However the domain administrator has to prepare the system appropriately for you gt Plan your SAP System Landscape Directory The SAP System Landscape Directory SLD is the central information provider for the complete system landscape In general the SLD is deployed after the installation of a Java or ABAP Java system Nevertheless to bring the SLD server into operation you have to configure and activate it For more i
315. rms Adapter Engine versus SAP Exchange Infrastructure XI Adapter Engine is also installed automatically with the SAP Exchange Infrastructure installation but one of its components needs to be installed on the business systems in addition others could be installed under certain circumstances on the business systems too The following scenarios apply gt Using the Java Proxy environment server or runtime environment always requires installing XI Adapter Engine separately on an SAP Web AS Java system gt You can use the already installed adapters File JMS JDBC SOAP Marketplace RNIF RFC Mail SAP BC on the SAP Exchange Infrastructure server if required gt Under certain circumstances it may be more suitable for you to run one or more required adapters on the business systems or SAP Web AS Java See the table below for advantages or disadvantages In this case you need to install XI Adapter Engine separately this is an option and not mandatory 88 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Table 4 2 describes some considerations that may help you to decide when to install adapters on the business systems Table 4 2 Considerations about how to install the XI adapters Installation host Advantage Disadvantage Adapter on the SAP Exchange Infrastructure host automatically installed or J2EE engine Decentral Adapter Engine Adapter on the business system itself Plain J2SE Adapter Engine
316. rocess of your development project from conception through planning and quality checks to the completion of the project It also allows you to communicate with external partners or lead customers cProjects incorporates internationally recognized standards QS 9000 and is based on methods such as Advanced Product Quality Planning APQP developed in the automobile industry Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 165 Design collaboration with cFolders cFolders is an Internet based collaboration application in mySAP PLM This new collaboration platform enables you to collaborate with external business partners in virtual teams to optimize cross enterprise processes It allows you to efficiently share and exchange structured and unstructured information such as data sheets and different kinds of documents with internal team members external partners and suppliers The application supports two different business scenarios for this purpose gt Collaborative scenario for example for internal team members and external partners gt Competitive scenario for example for use as a supplier s bidding room In addition the tight integration of cFolders in Collaboration Projects cProjects in mySAP PLM connects in house project management capabilities to secure external collaboration 5 5 3 Integrated Business Content The Integrated Business Content knowledge portal offers scenario based access to generic descriptions collabo
317. ront End software For the installation make sure that the front end software is installed on at least one host machine in your system environment To simplify administration of your SAP system we recommend you to do this on the central instance host With the SAP front end installation software SAPSetup you can optimize the deployment of SAP GUI to thousands of clients You can easily tailor installation packages to match your requirements distribute patches and set up automatic update processes for your clients 10 Check the general information about preparing the system for SAPinst 1 i The Java based SAPinst graphical user interface GUI called SAPinst GUI requires a Java Development Kit Java 2 SDK Standard Edition with graphical capabilities AWT Swing Since System i models do not provide a graphical user interface you must install the JDK on a Windows host to perform the installation with SAPinst The installation tool SAPinst uses the Java based graphical user interface SAPinst GUI regardless of your system variant Therefore you always need a Java runtime environment JRE on the host where SAPinst is to run The JRE is included in the JDK If required you can perform a remote installation using a standalone SAPinst GUI ona separate Windows or UNIX host This enables you to perform the installation on a remote host while monitoring it with the SAPinst GUI from a local host If you want to perform a remote install
318. rt number when installing the TMK server We recommend that you create a copy SAPINST of the System i user profile QSECOFR Use this profile for SAP installations Map the installation drive share rootbin on the System i server to a new drive letter for example X see Figure 3 14 Server name for SAP installation Port number must match TMKSVR port see previous slide SAPinst TMKSVR Session Parameters rootbin share Host ipaso3 Dispatcher 53875 for example Port X IBASO3 ROOTBIN gt E Drive Drive letter of the User Profile SAPINST SAPINST I Remember Password user profile Password i and password Figure 3 14 SAPINST start dialog If you cannot connect to the TMK server you can check whether the subsystem TMKSVRnn is active where nn is the instance number of your TMK server for example 01 and if a job named DISPATCH is active in that subsystem After you have connected successfully you see a job named SAPINST in this subsystem Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 51 Installing the ABAP database with SAPinst To install the ABAP database with SAPinst follow these steps 1 Start the installation of the ABAP database by executing SAPINST EXE in the subdirectory SAPINST OS400 AS400 Then the window shown in Figure 3 15 with the header Welcome to NetWeaver Installation comes up i SAPinst SAPINST IBASO3 BASYCS COM Welcome
319. rver Adobe Document Services SAP Front End Installation SAP Internet Graphics Service Homogeneous and Heterogeneous System Copy System Landscape Directory e Java Troubleshooting Guide e XML Based Data Archiving High Availability with MSCS for SAP Web AS 6 40 SR1 Java Figure 6 10 SAP Documentation also for Homogeneous and Heterogeneous System Copy The documentation for Homogeneous and Heterogeneous System Copy for SAP System based on Web AS 6 40 SR1 is divided into two parts gt For ABAP gt For Java Note Refer to these official guides and the SAP notes mentioned in these guides Make sure that you have the most current version of this installation guide and of the SAP notes For detailed information see gt SAP System Copy and Migration in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com systemcopy gt SAP OS DB Migration in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com osdbmigration gt Check the SAP OS DB Migration Planning Guide that is available in the Media Library gt SAP note 82478 In the guide you find the following considerations gt A system copy should only be done by a person with experience in copying systems and with knowledge of the operating system the database and the ABAP dictionary gt Client transport is not supported as a system copy method Transporting production clients is not supported at all You can use client transport for the init
320. ry on page 61 GRTOBJAUT OBJ QSYS CHGSYSLIBL OBJTYPE CMD USER R30WNER AUT USE You also have the option of granting authorization to USER PUBLIC 2 Start and stop the SAP system To start the SAP system a Log on to your System i server as user SIDOPR or SIDOFR Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 129 b Check that there are no active jobs for the instance that you have just installed To do this proceed as follows i For the central services instance the central instance and all dialog instances enter the following command WRKACTJOB SBS R3_instance_number You can find the numbers of the installed instances in the directory usr sap S D on every host for which you installed instances for in this system The instances are abbreviated as follows Central instance DVEBMGSnn ABAP JCnn Java Central services instance SCSnn Dialog instance Dnn ABAP Jnn Java ii If a job is displayed stop it with the command ENDSBS SBS R3_instance_number OPTION IMMED c To start the SAP system enter the STARTSAP command and choose F4 d Enter the SAP system ID for example C11 and instance number for example 90 Repeat this for each instance that you want to start We recommend that you retain the default value ENV for both SAP system ID ENV is replaced by the correct value for the SAP system ID Ensure that you start the instances in the correct order First the central services instan
321. s Source and target server must fulfill the operating system requirements Use the same operating system release and PTF level if possible a Check the operating system version with GO LICPGM and select Option 10 and press function key PF11 b Use DSPPTF to check the PTF level according the Informational APAR http www 03 ibm com servers eserver iseries service erp support htm c The SAP kernel patch level should be the same Transfer the SAP 6 40 kernel of the source system to the target server if it is newer i Save the kernel library in a SAVF and transfer it to the target server using FTP in binary mode and then run LODR3KRN ii Apply the new kernel library using APYR3KRN The prerequisites to prepare for the installation include 1 Time schedule for the system copy is planned and all involved persons are informed 2 Cancel the schedule for the backup on the database server of the target system Prepare the source SID Follow these steps to prepare the system SOURCE SID 1 Check and release all open Transport requests in SOURCE SID Transaction SE01 Create a list of the open transport requests including owner information Discuss or mail with feedback requests to the owners of these transport requests There should not be open transport requests otherwise they are removed 2 Check if there are open or canceled update records Use Transactions SM13 and RSA7 If so create a list including owner information
322. s 65 mySAP Customer Relationship Management CRM 138 mySAP Enterprise Resource Planning ERP 110 mySAP Product Lifecycle Management PLM 164 mySAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM 172 mySAP Supply Chain management SCM 157 other SAP components 233 SAP Business Information Warehouse BW 77 SAP Exchange Infrastructure 84 SAP Knowledge Warehouse KW 93 SAP Mobile Infrastructure MI 91 SAP Solution Manager SolMan 97 Search and Classification TREX 80 TMKSVR 46 Installation Guide SAP 10 13 Installation Master CD 37 Installation Tool 37 InstGui 36 INSTKIT 216 Integrated Business Content 166 Integration Builder 87 Index 243 Integration Directory 87 Integration Repository 87 Integration Server 87 Intelligence Connector IC 154 Interaction Center WebClient ICW 154 Interaction Center Workforce Management Calculation Services and Application Services IC WFM 154 Intermediate Documents IDocs 85 International SAP IBM Competence Center ISICC 17 Internet Communication Framework ICF 136 Internet Customer Self Service ICSS 154 Internet Pricing and Configurator IPC 147 Internet Sales ISA WAC 127 Internet Sales R 3 Edition ISA R 3 154 IPC 109 147 IPC Web App 127 IPC Web Applications IPCW 154 IPCW 154 ISA 154 ISA R 3 154 ISERPACK 45 ISICC 17 ITS 96 109 J J2EE 22 Java API 92 Java Development Kit JDK 44 Java Foundation Classes JFC 91 Java Messaging Service JMS 85 Java runtime env
323. s in an email to redbook us i bm com gt Mail your comments to IBM Corporation International Technical Support Organization Dept JLU Mail Station P099 2455 South Road Poughkeepsie NY 12601 5400 Preface xi xii An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Overview of SAP solutions applications components and tools Systems Applications and Products in Data Processing SAP provides a comprehensive range of applications and solutions to empower every aspect of your business operations SAP business solutions and applications are listed in Figure 1 1 Business Solutions and Applications mySAP Business Suite SAP xApps Composite Applications e mySAP Customer Relationship Management e SAP xApp Analytics e mySAP ERP SAP xApps for Governance Risk and e mySAP Product Lifecycle Management Compliance e mySAP Supply Chain Management SAP xApps for Mobile Business mySAP Supplier Relationship Management SAP Manufacturing Applications for Information Workers SAP Service and Asset Management Duet Solutions for Governance Risk and Compliance Solution Extensions Figure 1 1 SAP Business Solutions and Applications SAP applications for small and midsize enterprises are shown in Figure 1 2 Solutions for Small and Mid size Enterprises mySAP All in One e SAP Business One Figure 1 2 SAP Solutions for Small and Midsize Enterprises SAP NetWeaver
324. s installed automatically The installation procedure of the SAP license depends on the installation that you performed If you installed an SAP Web AS ABAP Java system or an SAP system based on SAP Web AS ABAP Java refer to e Solution Life Cycle Management SAP Licenses SAP License Keys SAP License in the SAP Library e SAP note 94998 general e SAP note 767123 especially for the licensing of SAP NetWeaver 04 If you installed an SAP Web AS Java system refer to Solution Life Cycle Management SAP Licenses gt SAP License Keys gt Licensing of the SAP J2EE Engine in the SAP Library You can install multiple licenses one for each host running a message server 8 Remove the SAPinst installation files You use this procedure to gain disk space after the installation by deleting the SAPinst On the System i host remove the installation directory and its subdirectories the temporarily 132 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models copied DVDs the directory usr sap SAPinst SAPCAR64 and the library TMKSVR You can also disconnect from the installation share and remove it from the System i server Do not perform this procedure until you have installed all instances of the SAP system on the System i host Do not delete the log files unless you are sure that you do not need them again Do not delete log files other than those in the paths given in this section The following are th
325. s on System i Models directly from the sourcing application or SAP Bidding Engine Save it either locally or in the back end system depending on the technical scenario you are using classic extended classic or stand alone gt Spend Analysis Spend Analysis is a decision support application that enables you as a purchaser to analyze your total spend across system and organizational boundaries You can perform the analyses per supplier per product or per product category SRM Business scenario and software component To see which business scenario of this mySAP Business Suite solution uses which component you find an overview in the SRM Master Guide In this matrix you can derive which module you have to install for which business scenario Note Read this matrix vertically That is check which business scenario you want to implement and then verify which software components are mandatory M mandatory and which are optional O optional for your installation Table 5 14 SRM business scenario software component matrix M mandatory O optional Software component Business scenario SAP Supplier Relationship Management Server 5 0 SAP SRM Server based on SAP Web Application Server 6 40 comprises SAP Enterprise Buyer SAP Bidding Engine and Supplier Self Service SAP Internet Transaction Server SAP ITS 6 20 6 40 SAP Internet Pricing and Configurator SAP IPC 4 0 SAP Business Information Warehouse S
326. s system copy Unicode conversions only with SAPinst and R3load This procedure is valid for Homogeneous System Copy Heterogeneous System Copy Unicode conversions only with SAPinst and R3load Database specific For some databases database specific Homogeneous system copy of procedure procedures are available SAP systems Split mirror This procedure uses storage technology to Homogeneous system copy of solution create a split mirror image of a single system SAP systems and SAP system or a system landscape landscapes SAP provides an overview and more detailed information about system copies their functions and procedures on the following Web sites http service sap com systemcopy http service sap com platforms 6 4 Installation of SAP systems before Web Application Server For systems with basis 4 6D and lower the installation of SAP systems is done by R83SETUP with the following Loading the Installation library R3SETUP from the kernel CD Using LODRUN Copying the installation script templates using the command CPYR3S Calling the command R3SETUP using the appropriate setup script vvvy For example CENTRDB R S for a central system that is a database instance and a central instance at once 232 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models We do not describe the installation procedures for SAP systems based on SAP Basis 4 6D For more information about the detailed installation
327. s the version release and modification of the operating system such as INFOAPAR 530 for i5 OS V5R3M0 Installing the English secondary language library If your System i model is installed with a primary language other than English we recommend that you install English as a secondary language This makes problem determination easier for the worldwide support organizations of SAP and IBM Objects for a secondary language are stored in libraries named QSYSxxxx where xxxx is replaced by the language code For English you use QSYS2924 on an operating system with Single Byte Character Set or QSYS2984 on an operating system with Double Byte Character Set Note The operating system character set is completely independent from the SAP character set or code page Figure 3 25 on page 62 shows you the SAP installation window about how to enter the English as the secondary language library Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 61 TE SAPinst SAPINST IBASO3 BASYCS COM SAP NetWeaver 04 Support Release 1 gt ABAP System gt IBM DB2 UDB f PI E3 S IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries gt Language Options Enter the SAP codepage ofthe system and specify a secondary language library if required SAP System Language Options SAP Codepage 1100 Secondary Language Library los Additional Information The SAP codepage for an ASCII Latin 1 system is 1100 the SAP codepage for a Unicode system is 4102 If Englis
328. s to the documentation and other information Note The information given in the planning guide on Linux is not intended to replace the documentation of the Linux operating system OS For more information about an installation on Linux see SAP note 171356 In the installation guide 3a you find a detailed checklist about a Linux host machine such as the Hardware requirements Software requirements 2 Check the requirements for a dialog instance In the installation guide 3a you find a detailed checklist about a Linux application server such as the Hardware requirements Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 209 Software requirements 3 Check and modify the Linux kernel If you are using a Linux kernel version certified by SAP you do not normally need to modify the Linux kernel To check the Linux kernel version enter this command uname a For more information about the Linux kernel versions certified by SAP see SAP note 171356 Note Check the kernel parameters There can be unpredictable problems with your system during and after installation if you have a wrong kernel 4 Set up swap space for Linux Make sure that the UNIX kernel is already configured and the other prerequisites are met For more information about checking the Linux kernel see the installation guide 3a See 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 5 Check network information service
329. s used as backend system 3 Installation of SAP SRM Server comprising SAP EBP 5 0 SAP Bidding Engine Supplier Self Service Refer to the Installation Guide SAP SRM Server on lt Platform gt lt Database gt 4 Installation of SAP IPC Refer to the Installation Guide SAP IPC Server and Installation Guide SAP IPC Web Applications This is a mandatory component for Self Service Classic Extended and Self Service Lean Procurement It is an optional component for Self Service Procurement Classic Deployment Nevertheless if you operate Self Service Procurement Classic Deployment without SAP IPC the following restrictions apply The products are normally selected from a catalog In addition you are still able to select products from the product master or user defined text items The product price must remain in the 1CN CBPSAP118 master record table Contracts and in particular discounts are not taken into account You cannot use interlinkages and scales Currency changes can only happen on the item level and not on the document level 5 Installation of SAP Internet Transaction Server ITS Refer to the SAP Web Installation Guide located on the SAP Server Components CD You can either use the internal SAP ITS which is integrated into the SRM Server SAP ITS 6 40 or use the stand alone SAP ITS SAP ITS 6 20 Note The internal SAP ITS is not supported until SRM Server 5 0 Support Pack
330. scenario you have no Materials Management MM in your ERP system and are using the Materials Management functions in the SAP Enterprise Buyer system for all non production procurement If required you can connect Accounting FI and Controlling CO However this is optional mySAP SRM Self service Procurement technical landscape Figure 5 14 on page 179 shows the underlying architecture of Self Service Procurement including existing connections 178 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Front End Firewall https SRM Server Bidding Engine SAP Exchange Infrastructure 3 0 Figure 5 14 mySAP SRM Self service procurement technical landscape mySAP SRM Self service Procurement installation steps 1 Installation of SAP Exchange Infrastructure optional Refer to the Master Guide SAP NetWeaver 04 section SAP Exchange Infrastructure part of the corresponding installation package The use of SAP Exchange Infrastructure is optional It is required for outbound XML based messaging or for connection of non SAP planning or execution systems With the role of an Integration Server SAP Exchange Infrastructure requires a dedicated SAP Web Application Server This means that running applications in other clients of the same SAP Web AS is not supported If you installed SAP Exchange Infrastructure import integration objects for mySAP SRM on the SAP Exchange I
331. scribed in the 5 2 2 mySAP ERP installation planning activities on page 115 5 Decide whether you want to use SAP System Landscape Directory This is the same procedure as described in the 5 2 2 mySAP ERP installation planning activities on page 115 The following planning activities are optional and only apply if you want to perform one of the following activities gt Installation of multiple SAP systems on a single System i server gt Using the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP for SAP Logon for the Microsoft Management Console MMC LDAP can also be used for other purposes for example the LDAP Connector If you do not want to use LDAP for SAP Logon or MMC no LDAP specific installation steps are required now To refer to the considerations based on these issues see the official SAP installation and implementation guides 4 8 5 SAP SolMan installation preparation activities When preparing to install SAP Solman follow these steps Check the general information hardware and software requirements Check the hardware and software requirements Check Qp2Term Qp2Shell and the OS 400 Portable Application Solution Environment Install the Qshell Check and adjust the i5 OS system values Set the time zone environment variable Adjust the startup program QSTRUP Add a user ASP Configure the TCP IP 10 Adjust the relational database name 11 Install English as a secondary languag
332. sections describe the technical components of SAP MI Chapter 4 Installation of the mySAP NetWeaver components 91 4 6 1 SAP Mobile Infrastructure Client SAP Mobile Infrastructure MI Client provides a mobile application with the following services gt Ul programming models The standard programming model for mobile applications is Java Server Pages JSP and Abstract Window Toolkit AWT However the SAP ME 1 0 programming model micro ITS is still supported gt Framework services The framework services are provided to the mobile applications as Java APIs The most important APIs are used for Data synchronization During synchronization SAP MI Client codes the data using a 128 bit RDS RSA Data Security method and compresses the data Data persistence Reading and writing replicated data Connecting peripheral devices native drivers Tracing and XML parsing 4 6 2 SAP Mobile Infrastructure Server SAP Mobile Infrastructure MI Server contains the following components gt SAP MI J2EE Server This server is an integral part of SAP Web AS Java It is responsible for Installing SAP MI Client When a mobile device logs on initially to SAP MI J2EE Server it determines which parts are required by SAP MI Client and installs them on the mobile device The local device drivers that are needed on the platform are also installed Administration of the mobile device The system administrator keeps an overview of the mob
333. sers for Windows File System Access Use this procedure to start the NetServer on System i servers Windows uses NetServer to access IFS files on the System i server where the central instance is running a Log on to the System i server as a user that has authorization IOSYSCFG for example user QSECOFR b Start the NetServer automatically by adding the following command to the startup program as specified in the QSTRUPPGM system value WRKSYSVAL QSTRUPPG W as either of the following STRTCPSVR SERVER NETSRV STRTCPSVR SERVER ALL 5 Reduce the size of the file cache The Windows file cache directly competes with SAP programs for memory Therefore you should adjust the file cache as described in the planning and preparation guide 6 Grant user rights for the installation Grant the required rights and privileges that authorize you to install the SAPinst tool and the SAP system If you attempt the installation without the required authorization the system aborts For performance and security reasons make sure that you do not run an SAP instance including the database instance on the host where the domain controller is running Never perform a local installation on a domain controller To grant the right user rights for the installation you have to differ if you want to install a local or a domain installation 204 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models For more information about user auth
334. service sap com nw04installation 3 Install the required business packages which are also referred to as Portal Content You can download them from the topics Download gt Installations and Upgrades Entry by Application Group gt SAP Application Components gt SAP ERP SAP ERP 2004 gt SAP Business Packages at http service sap com swdc For more information about business packages see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com ep content Installation sequence SRM Host If you desire a minimal setup you can install SAP SRM Server 5 0 and other technical components on a third server that is separate from the ERP and the Enterprise Portal hosts This approach succeeds in minimizing the demands that are placed on the ERP host If you choose to pursue this approach ensure that you select a platform that is valid for all the components you plan to install 1 Install SAP SRM Server 5 0 This installation also includes NetWeaver components SAP_BASIS 640 SAP_ABA 640 SAP_BW 350 and PI BASIS 2004_1_640 For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics mySAP ERP 2004 SRM Server 5 0 Installation Guide SAP SRM Server 5 0 operation system at http service sap com erp inst 2 Install SAP Catalog Content Management 1 0 CCM 100 by using the SAINT tool For more information see SAP the Service Marketplace under the topic SAP note 705060 CCM 100 Installation with SAINT at
335. sing devices including RFID readers and printers Bluetooth devices embedded systems and bar code devices gt Tools Adaptive Computing Controller Provides a central point of control for assigning computing resources and optimizing their use SAP Composite Application Framework Provides a robust environment for the design and use of composite applications that comply with enterprise services architecture SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio Offers a convenient user interface and rich functionality for developing J2EE applications SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer Simplifies the creation of portal content and analytical applications enabling business analysts to build or customize applications using a visual user interface rather than manual coding SAP Solution Manager Facilitates technical support for distributed systems with functionality that covers all key aspects of solution deployment operation and continuous improvement 2 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models SAP provides more than 50 applications including industry specific solutions SAP applications are described at http www sap com solutions In this Redpaper we focus on the business applications based on SAP NetWeaver We show you the concepts and issues which are specific to the System i customer Apart from the System i specific topics we also provide some platform independent descriptions of the SAP installations This helps
336. stages of an SAP installation We also provide information about the hardware and software requirements gt SAP NetWeaver and SAP Web Application Server The SAP NetWeaver is the infrastructure for nearly all SAP applications The SAP Web Application Server with its Advanced Business Application Programming ABAP Java stack or both is a component of the SAP NetWeaver Therefore we define the concepts and components of these main technical fundaments of nearly each SAP application gt The SAP System Landscape Directory SLD The SAP System Landscape SLD is the central information provider for your system landscape We show you some exemplary SLD configurations and provide a checklist about how to setup the SLD gt The Client Server concept for an SAP installation on System i servers We provide a short description of the technical principles of an SAP procedure which is done by a remote installation client with the SAP installation server named TMKSVR gt General steps of an SAP installation In ten points we summarize the main steps of nearly any SAP installation Copyright IBM Corp 2006 All rights reserved 5 2 1 Planning and preparing an SAP installation For an SAP installation it is crucial to go through a very intensive and exact preparation phase Plan this phase as soon and as detailed as possible Also be prepared to run into some difficulties which can always appear before during or after an SAP install
337. stem java System Finalization Dialog Instance Finalization Distributed System re Central Instance Finalization re Dialog Instance Finalization 2 E Java System Y E IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries Central System l Custom Installation Java System Dialog Instance Installation Y i Distributed system re Central Instance Host Preparation r Java Database Installation re Java Central Instance Installation eB Dialog Instance Installation Gj NetWeaver Components Running on Java S E Adobe Adobe Document Services Installation V EBW Java Components G BW UDI Java Components Installation Y x Components Exchange Infrastructure Installation Adapter Engine Installation r Adapter Engine J2SE Installation First step of installing a distributed Java Add In by creating the Java database schema This step is only applicable on the database host of an SAP NetWeaver 04 Support Release 1 Figure 4 2 mySAP NetWeaver 2004s components on the SAP Installation Master CD 74 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models mySAP NetWeaver installable components Figure 4 3 shows all the installable components of mySAP NetWeaver 04 and how they can be installed to the ABAP or to the JAVA stack mySAP ERP 2004 Analytics Financials Human Capital Management Procurement amp Logistics Execution Product Development amp Manufacturing Sales and Service Corporate Services SAP NetWeaver 04
338. stem i Models you want to implement ADS EP 6 0 XI and TREX in a minimal landscape consider the hardware sizing recommendations provided in the previously gt Keep yourself informed about the supported platforms for each component you want to install Some components can feature platform restrictions For more information refer to the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com platforms gt Because of high performance and memory demands we recommend that you install ADS Enterprise Portal EP and TREX on separate hosts for production use gt An add in installation of SAP Enterprise Portal is currently supported for demonstration training and test systems If you want to install SAP EP in the same system as SAP ECC for a production environment see the following point gt For Business Information Warehouse reporting purposes you should reserve a dedicated back end client In this client activate BI CONT as required Operating Business Information Warehouse and SAP ERP Central Component SAP ECC in the same system and in a production environment is solely supported on a project basis If you want to implement this setup contact SAP The same restriction applies for the joint installation and production operation of SAP Enterprise Portal with SAP ECC or SAP XI with SAP ECC on a shared SAP Web Application Server If installed in a shared system a common client for SAP BW 3 5 and SAP ECC 5 0 is not supported SAP XI
339. structure NWDI These systems may consist of several instances for development Dev quality assurance QA and production Prod Nevertheless all instances are bound to one central SLD This imposes high demands on the SLD regarding availability and stability High availability concerning operation maintenance and upgrade of the SLD is crucial for clients that depend on SLD data Figure 2 20 on page 32 shows you a central SLD for all applications Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 31 SLD HA Cluster Solution Central Master Manager Prod Web Dynpro JCO RFC Prod ABAP Back End Figure 2 20 Central System Landscape Directory SLD for all applications Best Practise for the SAP NetWeaver Landscape The following points constitute the best practices for the system landscape gt gt gt gt gt One central SLD is used Administration and monitoring components are grouped together on one host This central monitoring and administration system must have high availability HA SAP Solution Manager is installed on the same host as the central monitoring and administration system but in a separate SAP Web AS SLD can act as a data source for landscape data for SAP Solution Manager Support Infrastructure and Central Administration and Monitoring The SAP Solution Manager represents the support infrastructure and the central administration and monitoring comprises t
340. system copy 222 homogeneous system copy 222 HTTP 85 l IBM Info APAR 11 IBM licenced program 5722AC3 option BASE Crypto Access Provider 128 bit for AS 400 mandatory for JDK 1 4 18 5722JC1 option BASE IBM Toolbox for Java 18 5722JV1 option BASE IBM Developer Kit for Java5722JV1 option 5 Java Developer Kit 1 3 18 5722SS1 option BASE Operating System 400 18 5722SS1 option 1 OS 400 Extended Base Support 18 5722881 option 12 OS 400 Host Servers 18 5722SS1 option 13 OS 400 System Openness In cludes 18 5722881 option 2 OS 400 Online Information 18 5722SS1 option 21 Extended NLS Support 18 5722SS1 option 3 OS 400 Extended Base Directory Support 18 5722SS1 option 30 OS 400 Qshell Interpreter 18 5722SS1 option 33 OS 400 Portable Application Solu tions Environment PASE 18 5722881 option 39 OS 400 International Components for Unicode 18 IBM licensed program 18 IC 154 IC WFM_ 154 ICF 136 ICSS 154 ICW 154 IDoc 85 IGS 109 IMG 12 IMIG 232 Implementation Guide IMG 12 IMS 147 Incremental migration IMIG 232 Index Management Service IMS 147 industry specific solutions 3 Info APAR link to 11 Infor APAR 7 initial SAP user 130 install Web Application Server Step 1 42 Step 10 66 Step 11 66 Step 12 67 Step 13 67 Step 14 67 Step 2 43 Step3 44 Step 4 45 Step5 46 Step6 49 Step 7 49 Step 8 66 Step9 66 installation ABAP central instance 56 ABAP database 49 ABAP stack 53 Client Server concept 36 Java stack 54 log file
341. t already installed install option 33 of the license program 5722 SS1 the OS 400 PASE For more information about Qp2Term Qp2Shell and installing the OS 400 PASE refer to http www ibm com servers enable site porting iseries pase 4 Install the Qshell You must install the Qshell on your System i server This gives you a greater flexibility in dealing with stream files because you can use a large set of utilities that are common on UNIX systems for example grep tail or Is In addition Qshell is compatible with ksh scripts in UNIX The following is the procedure Install option 30 of the Qshell Interpreter license program 5722SS1 For more information about Qshell use the keywords Qshell to search the IBM InfoCenter at http publib boulder ibm com infocenter iseries v5r4 index jsp 5 Check and adjust the System i activities and system values shown in Table 5 1 and Table 5 2 Table 5 1 System i activity before installing an SAP system a CHGIPLA CPRJOBTBL ALL Check and adapt TCP IP configuration on the System i server See SAP note 92589 Table 5 2 System i system value settings before installing an SAP system QACTJOB 1000 Start with this value QADLACTJ Start with this value fecnsvess fem Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 117 QDATE and QTIME a Check and set to actual date and time this is important QJOBMSGQFL WRAP Important otherwise the system will stop during runtime
342. t that uses the Knowledge Provider KPRO component for example SAP BW or SAP KW schedule asynchronous indexing and de indexing 18 If you want to use KPRO check for problems in IMS monitoring 19 Perform the client copy 20 Check the RFC Destination 21 You can change the passwords of created i5 OS users 22 Change passwords of created users 23 Perform a full backup 24 Prepare the SAP system for business application Note Refer to the Installation and Post installation Guide SAP Solution Manager 3 2 IBM server iSeries Part II Installation and Post Installation in the SAP Marketplace at http service sap com instguides For these SAP SolMan post installation activities point 1 to 24 see also the corresponding considerations and procedures as described in the 5 2 5 mySAP ERP post installation activities on page 129 and the following An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Installation of the mySAP Business Suite This chapter provides an overview of the concepts and installation steps of the following components First we give a general introduction and then discuss the installations of the various SAP applications gt General aspects of the mySAP Business Suite applications In this section we explain that all solutions of the mySAP Business Suite are based on the SAP NetWeaver infrastructure and especially on the SAP Web Application Server We have previously described the main co
343. ta library for Java It is created by SAPinst e SAPS DJRN This is the journal receiver library that is associated with library SAPS DDB It is created by SAPinst If you are installing an SAP Web AS J2EE Add In we recommend that you use the same ASP for the data libraries of ABAP components R38S DDATA and Java components SAP S DDB and the same ASP for the two associated journal receiver libraries R38S DJRN and SAPS DJRN This can be helpful for future enhancements Keep the libraries that contain the data objects and their associated journal receivers in different ASPs This enables data recovery after disk failures and improves performance Each data library uses its own journal that is located in the respective data library For more information see SAP note 654801 Figure 5 3 is an example of how the libraries mentioned previously are distributed R3 lt SID gt DATA R3 lt SID gt JRN QSQJRN JRN JRNRCV SAP lt SID gt DB SAP lt SID gt JRN QSQJRN JRN JRNRCV Figure 5 3 Example Distribution of SAP libraries to the i5 OS ASPs 9 Add a user ASP SAP recommends that you keep your journal receivers in a separate user ASP SAP also recommend that you allow 4 GB to 72 GB the minimum size is 4 GB for your user ASP If you have a very busy system you can allow more disk units However SAP recommends that you select at least 2 disks and in a busy system 4 6 disks You can increase the size lat
344. tance ERROR 2005 08 16 10 08 11 CRTR3INST_IND_DB4 InternalInstallationDo 0 CRTR3INST SID SID ROLE GATEWAY INST INST failed All instances for system SID read No central instance found for system SID See SAP note 327434 for further information Execute the following command which generates the entries that are still needed for a standalone gateway CRTR3INST SID SID INST INST ROLE CENTRAL Note Note that INST must contain an instance number that is different from the gateway instance to be installed Afterwards start the R8SETUP procedure again The program completes the installation Steps to install a standalone gateway manually The steps to manually install a standalone gateway are described in SAP note 92963 and outlined here 1 Load an SAP kernel on the System i server and add the library to your library list 2 Configure the SAP system ADDR3SYS SID SID SYSTEM host OPTLIB kernel 3 Configure the central instance ADDR3INST SID SID INSTID 00 SYSTEM host TYPE CENTRAL 4 Configure the gateway instance ADDR3INST SID SID INSTID 01 SYSTEM host TYPE GATEWAY 5 Create just the gateway instance CRTR3INST SID SID SEQ 2 6 Startup the instance STARTSAP SID SID INSTANCE 01 The central instance is needed because the ADDR3INST command checks this It is not needed for running the stand alone gateway once it is created Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 221 Alternative installation of a s
345. tandalone gateway without SAPINST An alternative installation method that does not use SAPINST is to manually install the copy of an existing kernel library as follows 1 Create a SAVF on both System i servers 2 Save the kernel library on the source server into the SAVF 3 Transfer the SAVF binary with FTP 4 Restore the library RSTLIB OPTION ALL MBROPT ALL ALWOBJDIF ALL Add the library to your library list ADDLIBLE 6 Create the users R30WNER and R3GROUP using the commands CRTSAPUSR OWNER and CRTSAPUSR GROUP 7 Change the object owner of the kernel library CHGOBJOWN NEWOWN R3OWNER 8 Perform the command FIXR3OWNS for the kernel library ol Now you can create the Gateway Instance as follows 1 The SAP transport directory should be local for a standalone gateway otherwise you have to ensure SAPINST and GW SIDOFR exist on the SAPTRANSHOST 2 CRTR8SYS SID GW SID KRNLIB kernel library 3 CRIRSINST SID GW SID INST GW instance no ROLE GATEWAY CCSID 500 and if your primary language is not 2924 SECLANGLIB QSYS2924 4 Logon with GW SIDOFR and start the gateway instance 5 Now you can adapt your IPL start program authorizations and system values on the SAP Gateway Host if needed 6 3 Set up an SAP system by system copy There are two different classes to perform an SAP system copy gt Homogeneous system copy gt Heterogeneous system copy The SAP implementation understanding o
346. te Language EN Released on 17 02 2006 Table 2 1 IBM Informational APARs for SAP a e wero e a e wera T C e a e a T a e The IBM informational APARs Info APARs are constantly updated by IBM and are available at the following Web site http www ibm com servers eserver iseries service erp support htm You can enter your name on this Web site page in an IBM mail list which provides you information about IBM informational APAR updates Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 7 Note When you install your System i server and i5 OS correctly and complete it with the application of all required PTFs from IBM you can save a lot of time and avoid running into problems gt Other prerequisites Check the other prerequisites for the installation which are detailed in the different guidelines Another important task is also to plan the external and internal capacity you require for the installation for example Project management External manpower or consultants Internal manpower or capacity External costs Internal costs gt Installation software Order the correct installation package from SAP You can order it with your special SAP User for the SAP Service Marketplace S User directly from the SAP software catalog http service sap com swcat You must adapt your licence contract with SAP After signing of the contract with SAP you or somebody from your company receive an S User ID with
347. te or imply that only that IBM product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non IBM product program or service IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the
348. tead of an upgrade master guide there can be several business scenario upgrade guides or a solution upgrade guide for previous shipments of the business scenarios of an SAP application This guide is located in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com instguides gt Component Upgrade Guide The Component Upgrade Guide describes the technical upgrade of an SAP component taking into account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business related configuration This guide is located in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com instguides Additional documentation You can also refer to the following documentation gt SAP Release notes Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features or changes in an SAP component since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developments enable the SAP system to generate delta and upgrade IMGs These are located in the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com releasenotes gt Info APARs Refer to the list of IBM Info APARs in the topic Operating System and Database Patches section of Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 For each i5 OS version and release there is a different Info APAR The installation of the CUM and PTF mentioned in this Info APAR is a prerequisite for each SAP installation 2 1 4 The SAP installation guides The most important guides for i
349. technical landscape Mandatory components gt SAP Web Application Server 6 40 SAP cProject Suite is installed as an add on on SAP Web Application Server 6 40 gt SAP cProject Suite 3 10 SAP cProject Suite 3 10 is an add on that you must install on the SAP Web Application Server Host A SAP cProject Suite 3 10 includes two applications cProjects A project management application cFolders A collaboration platform Optional components gt SAP R 3 4 6B or higher You can use SAP R 3 to create object links to R 3 business objects such as documents material masters or purchase order items gt R 3 Plug In Install an R 3 plug in on the R 3 system It is a mandatory component when using an R 3 system gt SAP Content Server You can use the SAP Content Server for storing documents If no SAP Content Server is available documents are stored in WAS 6 40 170 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models gt ECL Viewer 4 0 You can use ECL Viewer 4 0 for visualizing documents within cFolders Perform the following steps to download the new ECL Viewer 4 0 from the SAP Service Marketplace a Go to http service sap com plm Switch to Life Cycle Data Management gt Integration Visualization of Product Knowledge Media Center Download the ECL Viewer zip file to your local hard drive right click document download icon Open the zip file and run the Setup exe file
350. tem i family of products and the i5 O0S integrated DB2 Universal Database UDB for the iSeries database All of the SAP applications are based on a common infrastructure layer called SAP NetWeaver This IBM Redpaper focuses on the SAP business applications based on mySAP NetWeaver 2004 and outlines the activities involved when installing an SAP system that are specific to the System i customer Use this Redpaper as an installation checklist For more detailed information about planning and installation steps and other considerations when installing an SAP application refer to the formal SAP documentation Refer to Implementing SAP Applications with System i and 15 08 SG24 7166 for information about the activities involved in maintaining and operating an SAP system G Redpaper INTERNATIONAL TECHNICAL SUPPORT ORGANIZATION BUILDING TECHNICAL INFORMATION BASED ON PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE IBM Redbooks are developed by the IBM International Technical Support Organization Experts from IBM Customers and Partners from around the world create timely technical information based on realistic scenarios Specific recommendations are provided to help you implement IT solutions more effectively in your environment For more information ibm com redbooks
351. tering Cross Site Mirroring XSM For your sizing considerations take into account the net and gross requirements when you implement a disk protection such as Raid 5 There are different strategies and options to implement RAID 5 Refer to the Integrated Storage topic in Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 Also consider the following requirements gt Your system ASP should not exceed 80 of the available disk space gt Your journal receiver ASP should not exceed 70 of the available disk space 2 3 SAP NetWeaver and SAP Web Application Server To understand the installation concepts and installation steps for an SAP system it is important to have a look at the SAP infrastructure NetWeaver and its components This infrastructure is the basis for nearly any SAP application Within SAP NetWeaver there is the SAP Web Application Server which represents the hardware dependent SAP application platform with the ABAP and JAVA stack In the following section you see the basic system variants of the SAP NetWeaver and the distribution of the SAP instances 2 3 1 SAP NetWeaver components SAP NetWeaver 04 provides mySAP ERP with a comprehensive integration platform and delivers the foundation to serve all ERP applications SAP NetWeaver is built to extend mySAP ERP and to integrate non SAP systems Chapter 2 Introduction to an SAP installation 21 Figure 2 9 show you the SAP NetWeaver 04 with its
352. terprise Portal 6 0 SP3 is now called SAP Enterprise Portal 6 0 on Web AS 6 40 SAP EP 6 0 on Web AS 6 40 As one of the building blocks of mySAP NetWeaver SAP Enterprise Portal 6 0 on Web AS 6 40 provides key capabilities such as Portal Infrastructure Knowledge Management and Collaboration all based on open technology and standards which make mySAP NetWeaver a powerful integration and application platform SAP EP Integration adds business value because it enables seamless deployment of BI Applications SAP Exchange Infrastructure SAP XI SAP XI Integration adds business value because SAP XI can be used as the single point to channel information exchange between various systems SAP Mobile Infrastructure SAP MI SAP MI is a technology solution for mySAP NetWeaver on which mySAP Mobile Business applications are based However with SAP MI you can also make non SAP based applications mobile SAP Knowledge Warehouse SAP KW SAP KW delivers the technical infrastructure that you require to set up and manage your own enterprise specific knowledge base in the areas of documentation training and manuals For project teams and end users SAP KW streamlines training and business processes helping you reduce your costs In addition the possibility to reuse supplement and continually update SAP content offers great saving potential mySAP NetWeaver Development Environment NWDE mySAP NetWeaver Development Environment is used to deve
353. thin the frame Add ons based on NW ABAP individually using the SAINT tool The Java Web Applications shown in Figure 5 2 are essentially independent J2EE components combined in a single installation as ERP Java Components Install the ERP Java Components using the SAPinst tool If you want to use any of the Java Web Applications shown in Figure 5 2 then you must use the ERP Components DVD All SAP NetWeaver components are part of the ERP solution shipment The installation sequence for these components is explained in the next section Certain business processes described in the next sections require the use of Internet Transaction Server 6 20 For additional information see the SAP Service Marketplace under the topic SAP note 741821 at http service sap com notes For business processes that require SAP SRM Server Supplier Relationship Management we recommend that you use a separate server On this server you can also install for example SAP Catalog Content Management SAP Business Connector ADS SAP Content Server and IPC 114 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models 5 2 2 mySAP ERP installation planning activities 1 Choose your basic system variant and decide how you want to distribute the SAP system instances ABAP System JAVA System ABAP JAVA System Check the SAP system components Central Instance Central services instance Database instance Dialog
354. ting SAP su Inxadm c usr sap LNX adm stopsap_ hostname _17 su Inxadm c usr sap LNX adm startsap_ hostname _17 do not advertise unreasonable commands that there is no reason to use with this device echo Usage sap start stop status restart reload exit 1 esac exit 0 Store the script with the name of etc rc d init d sapr3 Then call the following command to setup the symbolic ling in the directory etc rc d rc d for the suitable run level chkconfig add sapr3 6 1 9 Database server on a System i server and application server on Windows This section discusses the setup of a 3 tier landscape with a database server on a System i server and an application server on Windows The central system of the SAP system must already be installed normally as 2 tier system on the System i host Then plan and perform the installation of the additional application server on Windows First get the required documentation Planning Guide Installation Guide and the latest version of the relevant SAP notes 200 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Note If you install an SAP Web Application Server ABAP on a separate Windows server verify that gt You have the all current installation guides from the SAP Service Marketplace for your SAP release available gt You have the all current SAP notes mentioned in that installation guides available Refer to the applicable installation guides in 2a
355. tion host 42 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models User profile on Windows Create a local user SAPINST with administrator rights To do this perform the following steps Create a local user Inthe User name field enter your installation user name for example SAPINST Inthe Password and Confirm password fields enter the password notSAPINST Deselect User must change password at next logon Assign the new user SAPINST to group Administrators ahRONM User profile on System i Create user SAPINST as a copy of a user profile with the same authorities as QSECOFR by executing the following command WRKUSRPRF and option 3 Otherwise you can create a user profile with the command CRTUSRPRF USRPRF SAPINST PASSWORD notSAPINST USRCLS SECOFR TEXT SAP Installation Master SPCAUT USRCLS 3 2 2 Preparing the Windows PC for SAPINST The installation of the Web AS is done by a remote PC that has to be connected to the System i where the Web AS should be installed This connection can be done by an SAP tool called TMKSVR or by a rootbin share So we call this step also Install TMK server or create rootbin share The next step is to create a rootbin share on the System i server so that the Windows PC can access the root directory on System i models This share must be binary so that no character conversion happens between System i servers and Windows Then map the rootbin share
356. tion Center gt Interaction Center WinClient ICWIN gt Interaction Center WebClient ICWEB Service gt CRM Enterprise Service EPSERV gt CRM Professional Service PRSERV Sales gt Account Management ACMGT gt CRM Enterprise Sales EPSALES Marketing gt CRM Marketing Management MKMGT gt CRM Trade Promotion Management TPMGT Table 5 9 and Table 5 10 on page 152 list the technical or software component you have to install for a specific key capability also Known as business scenario Table 5 9 mySAP CRM key capability software component matrix M mandatory O optional Technical software component FE Sa oR A FR E masons ee SS SS SAPWebAS o Web AS JAVA 2 E Standard Edition J2SE wa fef feo e e e COE we o o o o e fe ewone __ __ e wo O O S e ei Peens _ _ e 150 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Technical software component vese cenre tf seww O O e e e e D o E E SAP Mobile Infrastructure Mobile Infrastructure Pocket e e 2002 for PDA strong arm CPU or Xscale Web server on PDA e g Tomcat 3 2 1 SAP e Selling Web Application Components SAP Multichannel Interface Server Multichannel Interface Server e E E E E E R E S E E Ee ee ee e ee ee a Cs E E e E S Ps el i eS a 8 FR ee E E Ss a eee C FS ae ea e e E a T a ey Ee ee a Fs Fe a a FS aa ie a ee ie a Fe ee Java Virt
357. tion Center WebClient ICW gt Broadcast Messaging Server BMS gt Software Agent Framework SAF gt CRM WAC E Selling Web Application Components ISA gt Telecom Sales gt Selling Via Ebay SVE gt Internet Sales R 3 Edition ISA R 3 gt IPC Web Applications IPCW gt Interaction Center Workforce Management Calculation Services and Application Services IC WFM gt MapBox MBX gt Internet Customer Self Service ICSS gt Channel Management CHM For more information see the documentation nstallation Guide Java Components for SAP Customer Relationship Management 4 0 SR1 on the SAP Service Marketplace under the topics mySAP CRM gt SAP CRM 4 0 at http service sap com crm inst Installation of the mySAP CRM Server For each scenario check and follow exactly the installation checklists which are given in the installation guide mySAP CRM is part of the mySAP Business Suite Therefore the installation is based on the SAP NetWeaver 04 and of the Web Application Server 04 We described the concepts the planning and preparation activities and the single steps of the installation procedure of the SAP Web Application Server previously in this chapter The installation of the mySAP CRM server on the System i server itself is done by SAPINST from the CRM Master DVD It is the same procedure as the installation of the SAP NetWeaver components or mySAP ERP discussed in detail previously in this chapter
358. tion guides for the SAP Web Application Server 6 40 SR1 You come to this screen by visiting the following Web site http service sap com nw04installation Then choose SAP Web AS SAP Web AS 6 40 SR1 and Related Documentation then select IBM DB2 Universal Database for iSeries 16 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Installation of SAP Web Application Server 6 40 SR1 on IBM eServer iSeries Part I Planning and Preparation SAP Web AS ABAP iSeries SAP Web AS Java iSeries SAP Web AS ABAP on Linux Dialog instance only SAP Web AS Java on Linux Dialog instance only SAP Web AS ABAP on Windows Dialog instance only SAP Web AS Java on Windows Dialog instance only Part Il Installation and Post Installation SAP Web AS ABAP iSeries SAP Web AS Java iSeries SAP Web AS ABAP on Linux Dialog instance only SAP Web AS Java on Linux Dialog instance only SAP Web AS ABAP on Windows Dialog instance only SAP Web AS Java on Windows Dialog instance only Figure 2 8 SAP NetWeaver System i specific installation guides 2 2 Installation requirements You can check the hardware and software requirements using the requirements checklists in the installation guide 2 2 1 Sizing requirements The sizing requirements in the installation guides give the minimum requirements for the installations of small SAP systems and do not i
359. ts necessary for different mySAP CRM business scenarios Installation of the mySAP Supply Chain Management Here we show you an overview to the mySAP Supply Chain Management SCM installation on System i models The SAP APO Optimizer and the liveCache for SCM belong to this SAP application Installation of mySAP Product Lifecycle Management Here we show you an overview to the mySAP Product Lifecycle Management PLM installation on System i models The cProjects and cFolders are the main components of mySAP PLM Installation of mySAP Supplier Relationship Management Here we show you an overview to the mySAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM installation on System i models SRM consists of multiple business scenarios and each of these needs another installation approach Note The mySAP Business Suite components are technically based on the mySAP NetWeaver and the SAP Web Application Server Therefore the installation of a mySAP Business Suite component is a logical add on to these and does not require any additional or technical discussion 5 1 General aspects of the mySAP Business Suite applications The mySAP Business Suite consists of the following solutions vvvvy mySAP Enterprise Resource Planning ERP mySAP Customer Relationship Management CRM mySAP Product Lifecycle Management PLM mySAP Supply Chain Management SCM mySAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Because all of these solutions are based on the S
360. u want to use Microsoft Office 2000 or Microsoft Office XP as an editing tool see the following step register the dynamic link library htmltidy dll on each SAP GUI client Installation of at least one of the following required editing tools Microsoft Office 2000 or Microsoft Office XP XML editors supported by SAP KW e Epic Editor 4 3 1 from Arbortext Inc For more information refer to http www arbortext com e Authentic 2004 from Altova This editor can be downloaded from http www altova com download_authentic html The following SAP KW documentation is available gt Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server ABAP on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt Installation Guide SAP Web Application Server Java on lt Operating System gt lt Database gt SAP Front End Installation Guide Installation Guide SAP Knowledge Warehouse An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models gt Installation Guide SAP Content Server gt Installation Guide Search and Classification TREX gt Installation Guide SAP Web available on the Server Components CD DVD gt Configuration Guide SAP KW Business Scenarios available on the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com ibc 4 8 Installation of SAP Solution Manager The SAP Solution Manager SolMan belongs to the mySAP NetWeaver even it is no real SAP application In the SAP installation guides the installation of the
361. ual Machine CRM Workforce Management CRM ICS WFM AS CS Note Read this matrix vertically That is you check which business scenario you want to implement and then you verify which software components are mandatory M mandatory and which are optional O optional for your installation Table 5 10 on page 152 shows the second part of the key capabilities Chapter 5 Installation of the mySAP Business Suite 151 Table 5 10 mySAP CRM key capability software component matrix M mandatory O optional Technical software Key capability ousiness scenario component ICWEB EPSERV PRSERV ACMGT EPSALS MKMGT TPMGT eae ee ee CRM Add on for Service Industries oes SSE SAPWebAS o Web AS JAVA 2 O Standard Edition J2SE SAP BW a PENE Eben Cale ERES TE Business Package for mySAP CRM SAP APO n a i a E e E an a SS ee ee ee Se es eoe NE a A E o d a a S E SC E E E E ee ee ee e E N E E ee C S E S E ee ee ee ee ee E nea er ae ee ee ee aed a a e a e e e CRM Multichannel Interface MCI eram e o ee ee TE AR n n S ee ee M ee ee E nee e Se E a e e E eh E E pana E E E ee ee 152 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Technical software Key capability ousiness scenario component ICWEB EPSERV PRSERV ACMGT EPSALS MKMGT TPMGT Mapbox MS Exchange Groupware Connector Lotus Domino Groupware Connector cProjects Add on forCRM
362. uch sources as the SAP installation guides SAP notes for installation and IBM Info APARs See Figure 2 2 SAP Installation Obtain Information SAP notes for installation IBM Info APAR Ja B SAP Installation Guide Figure 2 2 The documentation and information necessary for an SAP installation In the following sections we provide a short overview of the installation steps for SAP WebAS 6 40 SR1 however do not use this as the official reference Use the SAP installation guides instead which you can download at http www service sap com instguides An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Note that you can use multiple guides For example if you install a complete SAP Web AS Release 6 40 SR1 you need four documents Planning and Preparation and Installation and Post Installation for both ABAP and Java The installation guides refer to some SAP notes with last minute information as well as the IBM Info APARs with current information about the PTFs necessary for your system Refer to the SAP notes at http service sap com notes Refer to the Info APARs at http www 03 ibm com servers eserver iseries service erp support html The following is an overview of the most important documentation types that are required in the various phases of the life cycle of an SAP application Implementation Upgrade SA
363. uisites in detail As usual you should be sure to acquire the latest version of the SAP notes mentioned in this guideline In this guide you find also a description of the R3LOAD tool mentioned below The export of the database of the source system within SAPinst is started from the Installation Master CD for the source platform and source database system The database is exported with R3LOAD processes to the file system If source and target server are in the same network LAN generate an empty directory in the IFS of the target System i server for the export and map it from the source system host using a binary share Otherwise the data exchange is normally done by tape But you can do the data exchange also by a removable disk and also by the disk drives of a PC Laptop The export files are compressed to about 10 until 20 percent of the database size The import of the database into the target system within SAPinst is started from the Installation Master CD for System i models For more details see the installation guide Homogeneous and Heterogeneous System Copy for SAP System based on Web AS 6 40 SR1 at the SAP Marketplace http service sap com instguides See Figure 6 10 on page 223 6 3 3 System copy and migration procedures Table 6 3 on page 232 lists the different procedures to perform a system copy or migration of SAP systems Be aware of the following Chapter 6 Special SAP installations 231 gt Not all procedures are supp
364. vice sap com patches Apply the support packages to your SAP system with the help of the Support Package Manager formerly called SAP Patch Manager transaction SPAM For more information about the availability of support packages see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com ocs schedules The SAP note Assistant lets you load implement and organize individual SAP notes efficiently It also recognizes dependencies between SAP notes support packages and modifications For more information see the SAP Service Marketplace at http service sap com noteassistant 18 If you install SAP Web AS as basis for an SAP component that uses the Knowledge Provider KPRO component for example SAP BW or SAP KW you schedule asynchronous indexing and de indexing Refer to the installation guides 19 If you want to use KPRO check for problems in IMS monitoring Refer to the installation guides 20 Perform the client copy If you intend to install a Java Add In you must first perform the client copy for the ABAP system You use this procedure to perform the client copy which consists of the following steps a Maintain the client with transaction SCC4 b Copy the client with local transaction SCCL 136 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models c Copy the files with transaction SCC3 For more detailed information about how to perform the client copy see the separate documentation in the SAP Library un
365. view of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models IBM DB2 UDB for iSeries gt SAP Database Library ASPs Enter the SAP database library ASPs Attention The Database Library ASP and the Journal Receiver Library ASP must exist in your system SAP System ASPs The journal receiver library R3 lt SAPS D JRN is associated with the database library R3 lt SAPS D DATA Keep the libraries that contain the data objects and their associated journal receivers in different ASPs This enables data recovery after disk failures and improves performance Database Library ASP ft Journal Receiver Library ASP 1 Back C Cancel Log of Figure 3 26 SAPINST Specifying the SAP database and journal receiver ASPs For a production system we recommend that you store the database and the journal receivers in different ASPs For a test system you can specify the same ASP for both SAP installations directly in an Independent ASP IASP are not supported in the standard procedure Note 1 In this example we specified 1 as the journal receiver library ASP because the installed SAP system ERX is an SAP Test System Refer to the SAP storage and database considerations topic in Implementing SAP Applications with System i and i5 OS SG24 7166 to identify the ASP in which you should store the journal receiver Note 2 If you want to use an separate ASP for the journal receiver this ASP needs to be configured through SST
366. w of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models For more details see the Post Installation Guide for SLD 640 section 3 3 3 Configure the SLD Data Bridge Choose Administration Data Supplier and maintain the gateway server host and the name of the gateway service If you are using the SAP Web AS Java standalone configuration a standalone SAP gateway has to be installed from the presentation CD first For more details see the SLD User Manual for Web AS 640 NetWeaver 04 Making Server Settings Assign SLD security roles to users user groups Start the J2EE Engine Visual Administrator and navigate to Administration Server gt Services SLD Data Supplier If a Non ABAP user store is used five SLD user groups have to be created For more details see the Post Installation Guide for SLD 640 section 3 2 Activities on the Client Side gt Configure the SLD Data Supplier in an ABAP system Call transaction RZ70 and maintain the gateway server host and the name of the gateway service For more details see the SLD User Manual for Web AS 640 NetWeaver 04 Making Server Settings page 103 also see SAP note 584654 Configure the SLD Data Supplier in a J2EE system Start the J2EE Engine Visual Administrator and navigate to Administration gt Server gt Services SLD Data Supplier For more details see the SLD User Manual for Web AS 640 NetWeaver 04 Making Server Settings page 115 also
367. w provide an overview of ERP relevant components from an application point of view Figure 5 1 on page 111 shows you an overview of all mySAP ERP 2004 components divided into gt ABAP components gt Java components gt Additional components An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models mySAP ERP 2004 Software Components I ABAP Components Java Components Additional Components SAP SRM Add ons based Java Web SAP ITS 6 20 on NW ABAP Applications SAP SRM Learning ISA WAC 4 0 Server 5 0 Solution 3 0 Frontend IPC Web App 4 0 Biller Direct 3 0 FINBASIS 3 0 PI 2004_1_500 SAP XSS 5 0 LSO Content Player 3 0 SAP Business Connector 4 7 SAP Solution Manager 3 1 Mobile SAP Solution Manager 3 1 EA IPPE 300 E Recruiting 3 0 EA RETAIL 500 Mobile Sales for ERP MRS 2 0 Catalog Content m EA PS 500 Management 1 0 Internet Pricing amp Mobile Time Sheet 1 6 Configurator J2SE EA HR 500 lgurator 929E Mobile Travel Expenses 1 6 eProject Suite EA GLTRADE 3 1 IPC 4 0 Mobile Asset 500 Management 2 5 EA FINSERV WFM Core 500 110_640 hortalicontent Mobile Direct Store Delivery 2 0 2 Business i EA DFPS 500 BI CONT 3 5 2 LSOOP 3 8 Offline Player EA APPL 500 SAP_HR 500 XI Content Frontend LSOAE 3 0 SAP_APPL 500 XI Content for Applications LSOAE G0 NetW 04 NW 04 ABAP Stack NW 04 Java Stack i Acciona Conpouents a a a ee a A E Figure 5 1 Overview of the mySAP ERP
368. x application server See page 209 gt Installation activities for installing a Linux application server See page 212 gt Post installation activities for installing a Linux application server See page 213 This is no substitute for the official SAP installation guides but this information can help and illustrate the installation process Planning activities for installing a Linux application server The procedures to install a Linux application server are described in the installation guide 3a Refer to the 6 1 3 SAP installation guides for additional Web AS ABAP on page 186 Refer to that guide for the planning activities The single steps are outlined as follows 1 Choose your basic system variant and decide how you want to distribute the SAP system instances 2 Check the SAP system components 3 Identify basic SAP system parameters 4 Decide whether you want to use SAP System Landscape Directory The following planning activities are optional gt Integration of Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP for SAP logon for the Microsoft Management Console MMC gt If you decide to use LDAP for SAP Logon or Microsoft Management Console MMC prepare the active directory for use with the SAP system Preparation activities for installing a Linux application server Follow these steps when preparing to install a Linux application server 1 Check the requirements for Linux Check the SAP note 785927 for update
369. xample mySAP ERP 2004 SR1 Planning and Preparation Guide 9 2 1 3 The main SAP documentation types 0 00 cece eee 10 2 1 4 The SAP installation guides 0 0 0 cee 13 2 2 Installation requirements 0 00 cee tees 17 2 2 1 Sizing requirements 0000s 17 2 2 2 Hardware requirements 0 00 ett 18 2 2 3 Operating system and licensed program requirements 2 18 2 2 4 Memory requirements 00 0 eee 19 2 2 5 Disk size requirements 000 cc tee 19 2 3 SAP NetWeaver and SAP Web Application Server 0000 cee eee eee 21 2 3 1 SAP NetWeaver components 0000 0c cece eee eee ee 21 2 3 2 Basic system variants of the SAP Web Application Server 23 2 3 3 SAP system components 0 060 cece tees 28 2 4 SAP System Landscape Directory SLD 00 0c 29 2 4 1 Introduction to the SLD 1 2 tee 29 2 4 2 Multiple landscape scenarios 0 0 0 tee 30 2 4 3 System Landscape Directory 6 40 Getting Started Checklist 34 2 4 4 Related documentation in SAP Service Marketplace 00 5 35 2 5 The Client Server concept for an SAP installation on System i servers 36 2 6 General steps of an SAP installation 00 00 ccc ee 37 Chapter 3 Installation of the SAP Web Application Server 39 Bill OVOIVIOW 524 arinean Goh Geta aia wise a eE an Bie he d
370. you to keep track of the installation procedure of an SAP application This approach makes the chapter lengthy nevertheless you get a realistic overview of what is important and what has to be done for the installation of an SAP application Note This Redpaper is not a single source for guidelines for an SAP installation Information in this paper may or may not be relevant for releases after NetWeaver 2004 Always refer to the official SAP installation guides and the SAP notes for the SAP component you are installing to obtain the most current information Chapter 1 Overview of SAP solutions applications components and tools 3 4 An Overview of Installing SAP Applications on System i Models Introduction to an SAP installation This chapter includes introductory installation information about such topics as planning and preparation requirements 2 3 SAP NetWeaver and SAP Web Application Server on page 21 SAP System Landscape Client Server and general steps gt Planning and preparing for an SAP installation In this section we demonstrate from a high level about how to plan and prepare for a general SAP installation We also provide a list of the primary SAP documentation for installing SAP systems This is valid for almost any SAP application therefore we do not differentiate between the different SAP components gt Installation requirements In this section we specify the issues and check points in the preliminary

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Sonda de bomba universal Manual de operacion 10046203spa  Home Decorators Collection 23158 Installation Guide  Piano manutenzione dell`opera  ienvenue à La Forêt Fouesnant - Ker An Aod • Location de    zūmo® 590 - tecno globe  Manual de Instruções CCM44  Philips SHL5100YL  R&S SMC100A Générateur de signaux  trod vih (insti)  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file